WO2020164402A1 - Communication method and communication device - Google Patents

Communication method and communication device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020164402A1
WO2020164402A1 PCT/CN2020/074221 CN2020074221W WO2020164402A1 WO 2020164402 A1 WO2020164402 A1 WO 2020164402A1 CN 2020074221 W CN2020074221 W CN 2020074221W WO 2020164402 A1 WO2020164402 A1 WO 2020164402A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
network device
interference
information
network
interfered
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/074221
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
郝金平
晋英豪
杨水根
张宏卓
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2020164402A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020164402A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/04Arrangements for maintaining operational condition
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication, and more specifically, to a communication method and communication device.
  • electromagnetic waves can propagate in the atmosphere by super-refraction, just like propagating forward in a waveguide. This is called an atmospheric duct phenomenon. Due to the atmospheric duct phenomenon, network equipment in a certain area may be interfered by signals from network equipment in a certain area that are far away. This interference can be called long-range interference.
  • the downlink signal of the network device in the area A propagates to the area B which is far away due to the atmospheric duct phenomenon.
  • area B may be undergoing uplink transmission.
  • the signal in area A will cause interference to area B, which will affect the network equipment in area B. Communication performance.
  • This application provides a communication method and communication device in order to solve the problem of remote interference.
  • a communication method including: a first network device obtains reference signal information from N second network devices, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and the reference signal information includes the interfered The identification information of the network device group; based on the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices, the first network device sends information for indicating interference cancellation to M second network devices among the N second network devices, Wherein, M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to N.
  • the first network device selects one or more network devices from the N second network devices to perform interference cancellation based on the information of the reference signal reported by the N second network devices, so that interference cancellation, reduction or Eliminating the interference to the interfered network device group can also minimize the impact on the communication performance at the N second network devices.
  • N second network devices learn that they have interfered with the interfered network device group and directly perform interference cancellation, then all N second network devices perform interference cancellation, which greatly affects the performance of N second network devices. Communication performance.
  • one or more network devices are selected from the N second network devices for interference cancellation, which can reduce or eliminate the interference while also guaranteeing Communication performance at N second network devices.
  • the interfered network device group may specifically be one or more network devices.
  • the N second network devices perform remote interference on the interfered network device group.
  • the information of the reference signal includes the identification information of the interfered network device group, that is, the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices includes the identification information of the interfered network device group, and the N second network
  • the identification information of the interfered network device group contained in the information of the reference signal of the device may be the same or different.
  • the reference signal information of the N second network devices includes the same identification information of the interfered network device group, and the reference signal information includes the reference signal strength ,
  • the reference signal strength of M second network devices exceeds the first threshold; or, the reference signal strength of M second network devices is greater than or equal to the reference signal strength of (NM) second network devices, (NM)
  • the second network device is different from the network devices in the M second network devices.
  • the first network device may select the main interference source to perform interference cancellation, for example, select a network device with a larger reference signal strength to perform interference cancellation.
  • the first threshold may be preset, for example, pre-defined by the protocol, or pre-configured by the network device; or, may also be dynamically set according to actual conditions, such as the average value of multiple reference signal strengths; or, It may also be estimated based on historical conditions, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices contains the same identification information of the interfered network device group, and the information of the reference signal includes information about the interference intensity or Information on the intensity of remote interference, the interference intensity of M second network devices or the intensity of M second network devices receiving remote interference exceeds the second threshold; or, the interference intensity of M second network devices is greater than or equal to (NM )
  • the interference intensity of the second network device, or the intensity of the remote interference of the M second network device is greater than or equal to the intensity of the remote interference of the (NM) second network device, (NM) the second network device It is different from the network equipment in the M second network equipment.
  • the first network device may select the main interference source to perform interference cancellation, for example, select a network device with a greater interference intensity to perform interference cancellation.
  • the second threshold may be preset, for example, pre-defined by the protocol, or pre-configured by the network device; or, it may be dynamically set according to actual conditions, such as the average value of multiple interference intensities or multiple The average value of the intensity of the remote interference; or, it may be estimated based on historical conditions, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the interference strength may be the interference strength calculated by the second network device based on the reference signal.
  • the method further includes: the first network device sends query information, and the query information is used to query the interference status of the interfered network device group.
  • the interfered state in other words, whether the interference is eliminated, or whether the interference still exists, or in other words, whether the remote interference is eliminated or whether the remote interference still exists.
  • Whether the interference is eliminated can indicate whether the interference is completely eliminated; or, it can also indicate whether the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold; or, it can also indicate whether the interference intensity is reduced; or, it can also indicate whether the degree of interference reduction exceeds a preset value, etc.
  • the preset threshold may be a predetermined threshold, for example, a threshold predetermined by a protocol or a threshold preconfigured by a network device, which is not limited.
  • the interference has been eliminated, in other words the remote interference has been eliminated, it can mean that the interference has been completely eliminated, or it can mean that the interference intensity has not exceeded the preset threshold, or it can mean that the interference intensity has been reduced, or it can mean The degree of interference intensity reduction exceeds a preset value and so on.
  • the interference is not eliminated, in other words, the remote interference is not eliminated, which can mean that the interference is not completely eliminated, or it can mean that the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold, or it can mean that the interference intensity has not changed or the interference intensity has increased, or it can also mean The degree of interference intensity decline does not exceed a preset value, etc.
  • the method further includes: the first network device receives response information for the query information.
  • the response information includes information that the interfered state is an interference-uncancelled state, or the response information includes that the interfered state is an interference-cancelled state.
  • the method further includes: the first network device receives a notification message, where the notification message is used to notify the interfered network device group that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state or the uneliminated state status.
  • the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices contains the same identification information of the interfered network device group, and when the first network device is within the preset time period When the information indicating that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state is not received, the method further includes: the first network device sends to T second network devices of the (NM) second network devices A message used to instruct interference cancellation, the (NM) second network device is different from the network devices in the M second network devices, where T is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and T is less than or equal to (NM).
  • the remaining network devices for example, Denoted as (NM) second network device
  • select one or more network devices for interference cancellation thereby improving the efficiency of interference cancellation.
  • the method further includes: the first network device receives, within a preset time period, information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state .
  • the first network device may determine whether the interference is eliminated according to whether the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state is received within a preset time period. For example, if information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the canceled state is received within a preset period of time, it is determined that the interference is eliminated; another example is that no information indicating that the interference is received is received within the preset period of time. If the interference state of the network device group is the eliminated state, it is determined that the interference is not eliminated. Therefore, not only can it be accurately confirmed whether the interference is eliminated, but also the signaling overhead can be saved.
  • the method further includes: the first network device receives remote interference strength information from the interfered network device group; the first network device determines the interfered person according to the remote interference strength information The interfered state of the network device group.
  • the remote interference strength information of the interfered network device group may be an IoT value, or may also be other remote interference strength information.
  • the method further includes: when the first network device receives remote interference intensity information from the interfered network device group, the first network device determines the interfered network The interfered state of the device group is not eliminated.
  • the first network device can determine whether the interference is eliminated according to whether the remote interference intensity information of the interfered network device group is received.
  • the method further includes: when the interfered state of the interfered network device group is in the non-eliminated state, the first network device sends the (NM) second network device
  • the first network device determines that the interference is not eliminated, it can select one or more network devices from the remaining network devices (for example, denoted as (NM) second network device) for interference cancellation, thereby improving the interference Elimination efficiency.
  • NM network devices
  • the interfered state is the un-cancelled state.
  • the remote interference is not eliminated, which can mean that the interference is not completely eliminated, or it can mean that the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold, or it can mean that the interference intensity has not changed or the interference The intensity increases, or, it can also mean that the degree of interference intensity does not exceed a preset value, and so on.
  • the interfered state when determining that the interfered state is the non-eliminated state, it can be determined through a response message, that is, the response message carries the information that the interfered state is the uneliminated state; or, it can also be determined through a notification message, that is, in the notification message. Carry the information that the interfered state is the non-cancelled state; or, it can also be determined by not receiving the interference-cancelled information within a preset time period, etc., which is not limited.
  • the first network device is one or more centralized units of the access network device, and the second network device is a distributed unit of the access network device; or, The first network device is a core network device or a network management device, and the second network device is a base station; or, the first network device is one or more of N second network devices, and the second network device is a base station.
  • a communication method including: a second network device sends information about a reference signal to a first network device, where the information about the reference signal includes identification information of the interfered network device group; and the second network device obtains information from the first network device.
  • a network device determines indication information based on the information of the reference signal, where the indication information is used to instruct the second network device to perform interference cancellation; based on the indication information, the second network device performs interference cancellation.
  • the second network device performs interference cancellation after receiving the instruction information.
  • the second network device does not perform interference cancellation if it does not receive the instruction information.
  • the first network device can select some network devices from the multiple second network devices to perform interference cancellation based on the information of the reference signal reported by the multiple second network devices, so that interference cancellation can be performed, and the interference to the network device can be reduced or eliminated.
  • Group interference can also minimize the impact on the communication performance of the second network device.
  • the second network device learns that it has interfered with the interfered network device group and directly performs interference cancellation, the communication performance at the second network device will be greatly affected.
  • the interference cancellation is performed through the instruction of the first network device, which can reduce or eliminate the interference while ensuring the communication performance at the second network device.
  • the interfered network device group may specifically be one or more network devices.
  • the second network device remotely interferes with the interfered network device group.
  • the information of the reference signal includes at least one of the following: information about the strength of the reference signal, information about the interference strength, or information about the strength of the remote interference.
  • the interference strength may be the interference strength calculated by the second network device based on the reference signal.
  • the method further includes: the second network device sends an inquiry message, and the inquiry message is used to inquire whether the interference to the interfered network device group is eliminated.
  • the method further includes: the second network device receives response information for the query information.
  • the method further includes: the second network device receives the reference signal, and resolves the interference status of the interfered network device group from the reference signal.
  • the method when the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state, the method further includes: the second network device sends notification information to the first network device, The notification information is used to notify the first network device that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state.
  • the method when the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the non-eliminated state, the method further includes: the second network device sends notification information to the first network device, The notification information is used to notify the first network device that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the non-eliminated state.
  • the second network device sends notification information to the first network device, or it can also be understood that the second network device sends request information requesting interference cancellation to the first network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the interfered state is the un-cancelled state.
  • the remote interference is not eliminated, which can mean that the interference is not completely eliminated, or it can mean that the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold, or it can mean that the interference intensity has not changed or the interference The intensity increases, or, it can also mean that the degree of interference intensity does not exceed a preset value, and so on.
  • the method further includes: the second network device sends notification information to the first network device, where the notification information is used to notify the first network device that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the non-eliminated state.
  • the method further includes: the second network device receives, within a preset time period, information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state .
  • the method further includes: the second network device receives remote interference strength information from the interfered network device group; the second network device determines the interfered person according to the remote interference strength information The interfered state of the network device group.
  • the remote interference strength information of the interfered network device group may be an IoT value, or may also be other remote interference strength information.
  • the method further includes: when the second network device receives remote interference intensity information from the interfered network device group, the second network device determines the interfered network The interfered state of the device group is not eliminated.
  • the second network device can determine whether the interference is eliminated according to whether the remote interference intensity information of the interfered network device group is received.
  • the first network device is one or more centralized units of the access network device, and the second network device is a distributed unit of the access network device; or, The first network device is a core network device or a network management device, and the second network device is a base station; or, the first network device is a base station, and the second network device is a base station.
  • a communication method including: a second network device receives a first reference signal; when the first condition is met, the second network device performs interference cancellation.
  • the second network device After the second network device obtains the reference signal (for example, recorded as the first reference signal), it determines whether to perform interference cancellation according to whether a certain condition (for example, recorded as the first condition) is satisfied. For example, when this condition is met, interference cancellation is performed; when this condition is not met, interference cancellation is not performed. Therefore, interference cancellation can be performed to reduce or eliminate the interference to the interfered network device group, and the impact on the communication performance of the second network device can be minimized.
  • a certain condition for example, recorded as the first condition
  • the second network device learns that it has interfered with the interfered network device group and directly performs interference cancellation, the communication performance at the second network device will be greatly affected.
  • the second network device determines whether to perform interference cancellation based on the acquired first reference signal and the first condition, which can reduce or eliminate the interference while ensuring the communication performance at the second network device.
  • the first condition is: the first reference signal strength exceeds the first threshold.
  • the second network device may decide whether to perform interference cancellation according to the reference signal strength (for example, recorded as the first reference signal strength) and the first threshold. For example, when the strength of the reference signal exceeds the first threshold, interference cancellation is performed; when the strength of the reference signal does not exceed the first threshold, interference cancellation is not performed. Therefore, by referring to network devices with relatively large signal strength to perform interference cancellation, the main interference source can perform interference cancellation, thereby improving the efficiency of interference cancellation.
  • the reference signal strength for example, recorded as the first reference signal strength
  • the first threshold for example, when the strength of the reference signal exceeds the first threshold, interference cancellation is performed; when the strength of the reference signal does not exceed the first threshold, interference cancellation is not performed. Therefore, by referring to network devices with relatively large signal strength to perform interference cancellation, the main interference source can perform interference cancellation, thereby improving the efficiency of interference cancellation.
  • the method further includes: the second network device obtains the first threshold value from the first network device.
  • the first threshold may be sent by the first network device to the second network device.
  • the first condition is: the first interference intensity exceeds the second threshold, or the intensity of the remote interference exceeds the second threshold.
  • the first interference intensity may be determined based on the first reference signal, or the first interference intensity may also be detected remote interference.
  • the second network device can decide whether to perform interference cancellation according to the interference intensity (for example, recorded as the first interference intensity) and the second threshold. For example, when the intensity of interference or the intensity of remote interference exceeds the second threshold, interference cancellation is performed; when the intensity of interference or the intensity of remote interference does not exceed the second threshold, interference cancellation is not performed. Therefore, by using network equipment with relatively large interference intensity to perform interference cancellation, the main interference source can perform interference cancellation, thereby improving the efficiency of interference cancellation.
  • the interference intensity for example, recorded as the first interference intensity
  • the second threshold for example, when the intensity of interference or the intensity of remote interference exceeds the second threshold, interference cancellation is performed; when the intensity of interference or the intensity of remote interference does not exceed the second threshold, interference cancellation is not performed. Therefore, by using network equipment with relatively large interference intensity to perform interference cancellation, the main interference source can perform interference cancellation, thereby improving the efficiency of interference cancellation.
  • the method further includes: the second network device obtains the second threshold value from the first network device.
  • the second threshold may be sent by the first network device to the second network device.
  • the method further includes: the second network device sends inquiry information, and the inquiry information is used to inquire about the interference status of the interfered network device group.
  • the interfered state includes whether the interference is eliminated, or whether the interference still exists, or in other words, whether the remote interference is eliminated or whether the remote interference still exists.
  • Whether the interference is eliminated may indicate whether the interference is completely eliminated; or, it may also indicate whether the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold; or, it may also indicate whether the interference intensity is reduced, and so on.
  • the preset threshold may be a predetermined threshold, for example, a threshold predetermined by a protocol or a threshold preconfigured by a network device, which is not limited.
  • the method further includes: the second network device receives response information for the query information.
  • the method further includes: the second network device receives, within a preset time period, information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state .
  • the second network device can determine whether the interference is eliminated according to whether the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state is received within a preset time period. For example, if information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the canceled state is received within a preset period of time, it is determined that the interference is eliminated; another example is that no information indicating that the interference is received is received within the preset period of time. If the interference state of the network device group is the eliminated state, it is determined that the interference is not eliminated. Therefore, not only can it be accurately confirmed whether the interference is eliminated, but also the signaling overhead can be saved.
  • the second network device remotely interferes with the interfered network device group.
  • the method further includes: when the second network device does not receive within a preset time period indicating that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state And when the second condition is met, the second network device performs interference cancellation.
  • the second network device when the information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state is not received within the preset time period, the second network device can determine that the interference is not eliminated, and the second network device According to the information of the first reference signal and the second condition, it can be judged again whether to perform interference cancellation. For example, when the second network device determines not to perform interference cancellation according to the information of the first reference signal and the first condition, then when it is determined that the interference is not eliminated, the second network device further determines whether to cancel the interference according to the information of the first reference signal and the second condition. Perform interference cancellation.
  • the method further includes: the second network device receives remote interference strength information from the interfered network device group; the second network device determines the interfered person according to the remote interference strength information The interfered state of the network device group.
  • the remote interference strength information of the interfered network device group may be an IoT value, or may also be other remote interference strength information.
  • the method further includes: when the second network device receives remote interference intensity information from the interfered network device group, the second network device determines the interfered network The interfered state of the device group is not eliminated.
  • the second network device can determine whether the interference is eliminated according to whether the remote interference intensity information of the interfered network device group is received.
  • the method further includes: when the interfered state of the interfered network device group is in the non-eliminated state, and when the second condition is met, the second network device performs Interference elimination.
  • the second network device may again determine whether to perform interference cancellation based on the information of the first reference signal and the second condition. For example, when the second network device determines not to perform interference cancellation according to the information of the first reference signal and the first condition, then when it is determined that the interference is not eliminated, the second network device further determines whether to cancel the interference according to the information of the first reference signal and the second condition. Perform interference cancellation.
  • the second condition is: the first reference signal strength exceeds the third threshold, and the third threshold is less than the first threshold; or, the second condition is: the first interference strength The fourth threshold is exceeded, or the intensity of the remote interference exceeds the fourth threshold, and the fourth threshold is less than the second threshold.
  • the third threshold is smaller than the first threshold, and the fourth threshold is smaller than the second threshold, thereby improving the efficiency of interference cancellation.
  • the first interference intensity may be determined based on the first reference signal, or the first interference intensity may also be detected remote interference.
  • the first threshold, the second threshold, the third threshold, and the fourth threshold are all allocated for the first reference signal.
  • the first threshold, the second threshold, and the third threshold can be allocated for the first reference signal in advance.
  • the fourth threshold; alternatively, the first threshold and the second threshold may be allocated to the first reference signal first, and when it is determined that the interference is not eliminated, the third threshold and the fourth threshold are then allocated to the first reference signal.
  • the method further includes: the second network device obtains the third threshold or the fourth threshold from the first network device.
  • the third threshold or the fourth threshold may be sent by the first network device to the second network device.
  • the method further includes: when the second network device does not receive within a preset time period indicating that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state When the third condition is met, the second network device performs interference cancellation.
  • the second network device may be based on the received
  • the second reference signal and the third condition are used to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
  • the second reference signal and the first reference signal may be the same or different, which is not limited.
  • the method further includes: when the interfered state of the interfered network device group is an uncancelled state, the second network device receives the second reference signal; Under three conditions, the second network device performs interference cancellation.
  • the second network device may be based on the received
  • the second reference signal and the third condition are used to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
  • the second reference signal and the first reference signal may be the same or different, which is not limited.
  • the third condition is: the second reference signal strength exceeds the fifth threshold, and the fifth threshold is less than the first threshold; or, the third condition is: the second interference strength The sixth threshold is exceeded, or the intensity of the remote interference exceeds the sixth threshold, and the sixth threshold is less than the second threshold.
  • the fifth threshold is smaller than the first threshold
  • the sixth threshold is smaller than the second threshold, thereby improving the efficiency of interference cancellation.
  • the second interference intensity may be determined based on the second reference signal, or the second interference intensity may also be detected remote interference.
  • the first threshold and the second threshold are allocated for the first reference signal.
  • the first threshold and the second threshold can be allocated for the first reference signal in advance; when it is determined that the interference is not eliminated, the second reference signal Assign the fifth and sixth thresholds.
  • the method further includes: the second network device obtains the fifth threshold or the sixth threshold from the first network device.
  • the fifth threshold or the sixth threshold may be sent by the first network device to the second network device.
  • the first network device is one or more centralized units of the access network device, and the second network device is a distributed unit of the access network device; or, The first network device is a core network device or a network management device, and the second network device is a base station; or, the first network device is a base station, and the second network device is a base station.
  • a communication method including: a first network device obtains information about a first reference signal from N second network devices, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and the value of the first reference signal The information includes the identification information of the interfered network device group; based on the information of the first reference signal of the N second network devices, the first network device sends the first information indicating the first condition to the N second network devices, The first condition is used for N second network devices to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
  • the first network device can send information indicating the first condition for the N second network devices based on the information of the reference signal reported by the N second network devices, so that the N second network devices can According to the information of the reference signal and the first condition, it is determined whether to perform interference cancellation. For example, when the first condition is met, interference cancellation is performed; when the first condition is not met, interference cancellation is not performed. Therefore, interference cancellation can be performed to reduce or eliminate the interference to the interfered network device group, and the impact on the communication performance of the N second network devices can also be minimized.
  • the N second network devices learn that they have interfered with the interfered network device group and directly perform interference cancellation, the communication performance at the N second network devices will be greatly affected.
  • the N second network devices can determine whether to perform interference cancellation through the acquired first reference signal and the first condition, which can reduce or eliminate the interference at the same time , Can also guarantee the communication performance at the second network device.
  • the interfered network device group may specifically be one or more network devices.
  • the N second network devices perform remote interference on the interfered network device group.
  • the first information includes a first threshold; the first condition is: the strength of the first reference signal exceeds the first threshold.
  • the first network device can send the first threshold to the N second network devices, so that the N second network devices can use the reference signal strength (for example, denoted as the first reference signal strength) and the first threshold value. Decide whether to perform interference cancellation. For example, when the strength of the reference signal exceeds the first threshold, interference cancellation is performed; when the strength of the reference signal does not exceed the first threshold, interference cancellation is not performed. Therefore, by referring to network devices with relatively large signal strength to perform interference cancellation, the main interference source can perform interference cancellation, thereby improving the efficiency of interference cancellation.
  • the reference signal strength for example, denoted as the first reference signal strength
  • the main interference source can perform interference cancellation, thereby improving the efficiency of interference cancellation.
  • the first information includes a second threshold; the first condition is: the first interference intensity exceeds the second threshold, or the intensity of remote interference exceeds the second threshold.
  • the first network device can send the second threshold to the N second network devices, so that the N second network devices can exceed the total interference intensity (for example, the first interference intensity) or the intensity of the remote interference.
  • the second threshold and the second threshold are used to determine whether to perform interference cancellation. For example, when the interference intensity exceeds the second threshold, interference cancellation is performed; when the interference intensity does not exceed the second threshold, interference cancellation is not performed. Therefore, by using network equipment with relatively large interference intensity to perform interference cancellation, the main interference source can perform interference cancellation, thereby improving the efficiency of interference cancellation.
  • the interference strength (for example, recorded as the first interference strength) may be the interference strength calculated by the second network device based on the reference signal.
  • the method further includes: the first network device sends inquiry information, and the inquiry information is used to inquire about the interference status of the interfered network device group.
  • the method further includes: the first network device receives response information for the inquiry information.
  • the method further includes: the first network device receives notification information, and the notification information is used to notify that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the non-eliminated state or The interference has been eliminated.
  • the method further includes: the first network device receives, within a preset time period, information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state .
  • the method further includes: when the first network device does not receive within a preset time period indicating that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state
  • the first network device sends the second information indicating the second condition to the N second network devices, the second condition is used by the N second network devices to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
  • the first network device may determine that the interference is not eliminated, and the first network device The second condition may be sent to the N second network devices, so that the N second network devices determine whether to perform interference cancellation according to the information of the first reference signal and the second condition.
  • the method further includes: the first network device receives remote interference strength information from the interfered network device group; the first network device determines the interfered person according to the remote interference strength information The interfered state of the network device group.
  • the remote interference strength information of the interfered network device group may be an IoT value, or may also be other remote interference strength information.
  • the method further includes: when the first network device receives remote interference intensity information from the interfered network device group, the first network device determines the interfered network The interfered state of the device group is not eliminated.
  • the first network device can determine whether the interference is eliminated according to whether the remote interference intensity information of the interfered network device group is received.
  • the method further includes: when the interfered state of the interfered network device group is in the non-eliminated state, the first network device sends the data to the N second network devices.
  • the second condition is used for N second network devices to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
  • the first network device when the first network device determines that the interference is not eliminated, it can send the second condition to the N second network devices, so that the N second network devices determine whether to proceed according to the information of the first reference signal and the second condition. Interference elimination.
  • the second information includes a third threshold, and the second condition is: the first reference signal strength exceeds the third threshold, and the third threshold is less than the first threshold; or, The second information includes a fourth threshold, and the second condition is that the first interference intensity or the intensity of remote interference exceeds the fourth threshold, and the fourth threshold is less than the second threshold.
  • the third threshold is less than the first threshold
  • the fourth threshold is less than the second threshold. That is, when the first network device determines that the interference is not eliminated, the first network device may send a third threshold that is less than the first threshold and a fourth threshold that is less than the second threshold to N second network devices, so that N second network devices The network device may determine whether to perform interference cancellation according to the first reference signal strength and the third threshold, or the N second network devices may determine whether to perform interference cancellation according to the first interference strength or the strength of remote interference received and the fourth threshold.
  • the method further includes: the first network device obtains the information of the second reference signal from the N second network devices; based on the information of the second reference signal of the N second network devices, the first network device sends the information to the N second network devices Send third information for indicating a third condition, where the third condition is used by N second network devices to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
  • the first network device may determine that the interference is not eliminated, and the first network device
  • the third condition may be determined based on the received second reference information, so that the second network device may determine whether to perform interference cancellation based on the received second reference signal and the third condition.
  • the second reference signal and the first reference signal may be the same or different, which is not limited.
  • the method further includes: when the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the non-cancelled state, the method further includes: the first network device obtains information from the Nth 2. Information of the second reference signal of the network device; based on the information of the second reference signal of the N second network devices, the first network device sends third information indicating the third condition to the N second network devices, The three conditions are used for N second network devices to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
  • the first network device can determine the third condition based on the received second reference information, so that the second network device can determine whether to use the received second reference signal and the third condition. Perform interference cancellation.
  • the second reference signal and the first reference signal may be the same or different, which is not limited.
  • the third information includes a fifth threshold, and the third condition is: the second reference signal strength exceeds the fifth threshold, and the fifth threshold is less than the first threshold; or,
  • the third information includes a sixth threshold, and the third condition is: the second interference intensity or the intensity of remote interference exceeds the sixth threshold, and the sixth threshold is less than the second threshold.
  • the fifth threshold is smaller than the first threshold
  • the sixth threshold is smaller than the second threshold, thereby improving the efficiency of interference cancellation.
  • the first network device is one or more centralized units of the access network device, and the second network device is a distributed unit of the access network device; or, The first network device is a core network device or a network management device, and the second network device is a base station; or, the first network device is one or more of N second network devices, and the second network device is a base station.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the device is a centralized unit and has the method function of the first aspect or the fourth aspect.
  • These functions can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above functions.
  • a communication device is provided, the device is a core network device and has the method function of the first aspect or the fourth aspect.
  • These functions can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above functions.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the device is a network management device and has the function of implementing the method of the first aspect or the fourth aspect. These functions can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above functions.
  • a communication device is provided, the device is a base station, and has the method function of the foregoing first aspect or fourth aspect.
  • These functions can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above functions.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the device is a distributed unit and has the method function of the second or third aspect.
  • These functions can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above functions.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the device is a base station and has the method function of the second aspect or the third aspect.
  • These functions can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above functions.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the device is a centralized unit.
  • the device includes a memory, a communication interface, and a processor.
  • the memory is used to store computer programs or instructions, and the processor is coupled to the memory and the communication interface.
  • the processor executes the computer program or instruction, the device executes the method of the first aspect or the fourth aspect.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the device is a core network device.
  • the device includes a memory, a communication interface, and a processor, where the memory is used to store computer programs or instructions, and the processor is coupled to the memory and the communication interface.
  • the processor executes the computer program or instruction, the device executes the method of the first aspect or the fourth aspect.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the device is a network management device.
  • the device includes a memory, a communication interface, and a processor.
  • the memory is used to store computer programs or instructions, and the processor is coupled to the memory and the communication interface.
  • the processor executes the computer program or instruction, the device executes the method of the first aspect or the fourth aspect.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the device is a base station.
  • the device includes a memory, a communication interface, and a processor.
  • the memory is used to store computer programs or instructions.
  • the processor is coupled with the memory and the communication interface. When the processor executes the computer program or instruction, the device executes the method of the first aspect or the fourth aspect.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the device is a distributed unit.
  • the device includes a memory, a communication interface, and a processor.
  • the memory is used to store computer programs or instructions, and the processor is coupled to the memory and the communication interface.
  • the processor executes the computer program or instruction, the device executes the method of the second aspect or the third aspect.
  • a communication device which is a base station, and includes a memory, a communication interface, and a processor.
  • the memory is used to store computer programs or instructions.
  • the processor is coupled with the memory and the communication interface. When the processor executes the computer program or instruction, the device executes the method of the second aspect or the third aspect.
  • a computer program product comprising: computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the method of the first aspect or the fourth aspect.
  • a computer program product comprising: computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the method of the second aspect or the third aspect.
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed, the method of the first aspect or the fourth aspect is implemented.
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed, the method of the second aspect or the third aspect described above is implemented.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario applicable to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of another application scenario applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of another application scenario applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 4 is a schematic flow chart of remote interference management
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic interaction diagram of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a communication method applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic interaction diagram of a communication method according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic interaction diagram of a communication method according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic interaction diagram of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to still another embodiment of the present application.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of this application can be applied to various communication systems, for example: the fifth generation (5G) system, new radio (NR), global system for mobile communications (GSM) system , Code division multiple access (CDMA) system, wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA) system, general packet radio service (GPRS), long term evolution (long term evolution) , LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (TDD), universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS), global interconnected microwave access ( worldwide interoperability for microwave access, WiMAX) communication systems, etc.
  • 5G fifth generation
  • NR new radio
  • GSM global system for mobile communications
  • CDMA Code division multiple access
  • WCDMA wideband code division multiple access
  • GPRS general packet radio service
  • long term evolution long term evolution
  • LTE LTE
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD LTE time division duplex
  • UMTS universal mobile telecommunication system
  • WiMAX worldwide interoperability for microwave access
  • Fig. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario suitable for an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal 130 accesses a wireless network to obtain services from an external network (such as the Internet) through the wireless network, or communicate with other terminals through the wireless network.
  • the wireless network includes a RAN110 and a core network (CN) 120.
  • the RAN110 is used to connect the terminal 130 to the wireless network
  • the CN120 is used to manage the terminal and provide a gateway for communication with the external network.
  • the terminal also known as user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), mobile terminal (MT), etc.
  • UE user equipment
  • MS mobile station
  • MT mobile terminal
  • some examples of terminals are: mobile phones (mobile phones), tablets, notebook computers, palmtop computers, mobile internet devices (MID), wearable devices, virtual reality (VR) devices, and augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving (self-driving), wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, and smart grid (smart grid)
  • PLMN public land mobile network
  • the network device is a device in a wireless network, for example, a radio access network (RAN) node that connects a terminal to the wireless network.
  • RAN nodes are: gNB, transmission reception point (TRP), evolved Node B (evolved Node B, eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (Node B) B, NB), base station controller (BSC), base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (baseband unit) , BBU), or wireless fidelity (Wifi) access point (AP), etc.
  • a network device may include a centralized unit (CU) node, or a distributed unit (DU) node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node.
  • Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram of another application scenario applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Access and mobility management function (AMF) entities mainly used for mobility management and access management, etc., and can be used to implement mobility management entity (mobility management entity, MME) functions except for session management Other functions, such as lawful interception, or access authorization (or authentication) functions.
  • MME mobility management entity
  • Other functions such as lawful interception, or access authorization (or authentication) functions.
  • gNB1 can be connected to AMF1 through a first communication interface
  • gNB2 can be connected to AMF2 through a second communication interface
  • the first communication interface and the second communication interface may be denoted by NG.
  • the present application does not limit the representation mode of the first communication interface and the second communication interface, and the foregoing communication interface may also adopt other expression modes.
  • gNB1 and gNB2 can be connected to the same AMF or different AMFs.
  • gNB1 and gNB2 can belong to different manufacturers and correspond to different AMFs.
  • the AMF in Fig. 2 can also be replaced with operation administration and maintenance (OAM).
  • gNB1 can be connected to OAM through the first communication interface
  • gNB2 can be connected to OAM through the second communication interface.
  • the first communication interface may be represented by OM1
  • the second communication interface may be represented by OM2.
  • the present application does not limit the representation mode of the first communication interface and the second communication interface, and the foregoing communication interface may also adopt other expression modes.
  • gNB1 and gNB2 can be connected to the same OAM or different OAMs.
  • gNB1 and gNB2 may belong to different manufacturers, and correspond to different OAMs.
  • the foregoing AMF entity may be understood as a network element used to implement the foregoing functions in the core network, and it may be an independent device or integrated in the same device to implement the foregoing functions, which is not limited in this application.
  • the first network device in the embodiment of the present application may correspond to the foregoing AMF or OAM
  • the second network device may correspond to the foregoing gNB1 and gNB2.
  • Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of another application scenario suitable for an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication interface between the CU and the DU may be referred to as an F1 interface.
  • the F1 interface is used to connect between the CU and the DU.
  • One CU can be connected to one or more DUs.
  • multiple DUs can be centrally controlled by one CU.
  • one DU may also be connected to multiple CUs.
  • the interface name shown in FIG. 3 is only an example, and the name of the interface in a specific implementation may be other names, and this application does not specifically limit this.
  • the CU has radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) or part of the RRC control function, including all the protocol layer functions or part of the protocol layer functions of the existing base station; for example, it only includes the RRC function or part of the RRC function, or includes the RRC function or service Data adaptation protocol (service data adaptation protocol, SDAP) layer functions, or include RRC/packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer functions, or include RRC/PDCP and part of the radio link layer control protocol (radio link) Control, RLC) layer functions; or include the RRC/PDCP/media access control (MAC) layer, or even part or all of the physical layer PHY functions, and other possibilities are not excluded.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the DU has all the protocol layer functions of the existing base station except the protocol layer functions of the CU, that is, part of the protocol layer function units of RRC/SDAP/PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY, such as part of the RRC function and PDCP/RLC/ Protocol layer functions such as MAC/PHY, or protocol layer functions such as PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY, or protocol layer functions such as RLC/MAC/PHY, or part of RLC/MAC/PHY functions, or only all or part of PHY Function; It should be noted that the functions of each protocol layer mentioned here may change, and they are all within the protection scope of this application. For example, DU has all the protocol layer functions of existing base stations.
  • the functions of the PDCP and above protocol layers are set in the CU, and the functions of the protocol layers below PDCP, such as RLC and MAC, are set in the DU.
  • this type of protocol layer division is just an example, it can also be divided in other protocol layers, for example, in the RLC layer, the functions of the RLC layer and above protocol layers are set in the CU, and the functions of the protocol layers below the RLC layer are set in DU.
  • part of the functions of the RLC layer and the functions of the protocol layer above the RLC layer are set in the CU, and the remaining functions of the RLC layer and the functions of the protocol layer below the RLC layer are set in the DU.
  • the radio frequency device can be remote, not placed in the DU, can also be integrated in the DU, or part of the remote part is integrated in the DU, and there is no restriction here.
  • relay nodes are only deployed with layer 2 (e.g., including radio link control (resource link control, RLC) layer, MAC layer, etc.) And the protocol stack architecture of layer 1 (for example, including the PHY layer), but not all protocol stack functions above layer 2, such as all RRC layer functions. Therefore, the data or signaling generated by the donor base station needs to be forwarded by the relay node to the terminal device.
  • layer 2 e.g., including radio link control (resource link control, RLC) layer, MAC layer, etc.
  • RLC resource link control
  • MAC media access control
  • the first network device in the embodiment of the present application may correspond to the CU in the CU-DU architecture, or may correspond to the above-mentioned donor base station, and the second network device may correspond to the DU in the CU-DU architecture, or may correspond to In the above-mentioned relay node.
  • electromagnetic waves can propagate in the atmosphere by super-refraction, just like propagating forward in a waveguide. This is called an atmospheric duct phenomenon. Due to the atmospheric duct phenomenon, network devices (such as gNB) in a certain area may be interfered by signals from network devices (such as gNB) in a certain area that are far apart. For example, in a time division duplex (TDD) scenario, the downlink signal of the network device in area A propagates to area B, which is far apart due to the atmospheric duct phenomenon. The distance from area A to area B can reach 300 kilometers. When the downlink signal of the network equipment in the area A reaches the area B after a long-distance transmission delay, the area B may be undergoing uplink transmission. At this time, the signal in the area A will cause interference to the area B. This interference can be called long-range interference.
  • TDD time division duplex
  • one or more network devices that are interfered are recorded as the interfered network device group, and one or more network devices that are interfered are recorded as the interfered network device group.
  • the interfered network device group may specifically be one or more network devices, and the interfered network device group may specifically be one or more network devices.
  • a network device in area B that is interfered by a signal in area A is recorded as the interfered network device group, and a network device in area A that interferes with the interfered network device is recorded as an interfering network device group.
  • interfered network device group and the interfered network device group are only named for distinguishing, and do not limit the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the interfered network device group may have a CU-DU architecture, that is, the interfered network device group may specifically be one or more DUs, and the one or more DUs may be centrally controlled by one CU.
  • the interfering network device group may have a CU-DU architecture, that is, the interfering network device group may specifically be one or more DUs, and the one or more DUs may be centrally controlled by one CU.
  • the interfered network device group that is subject to remote interference may notify the interfering network device group that the remote interference has occurred by sending a reference signal.
  • the interfered network device group may continuously send the characteristic reference signal sequence through the air interface to notify the interfering network device group that the remote interference has occurred.
  • the reference signal carries identification information of the interfered network device group, so that the interfered network device group knows the address of the interfered network device group.
  • the interference heat and dryness ratio can be used to measure the amount of interference that the network equipment is subjected to. Generally, the interference is described as'several times larger than heat and dryness.
  • network equipment In the process of detecting uplink long-range interference, network equipment usually uses IoT as the main measurement index to judge the situation of uplink long-range interference.
  • RIM Remote interference management
  • FIG. 4 shows a schematic flow diagram of remote interference management.
  • the interfering network device group causes remote interference to the interfered network device group.
  • the interfered network device group sends the reference signal, and accordingly, the interfered network device group receives the reference signal from the interfered network device group.
  • the interfering network device group can always monitor the reference signal. After receiving the reference signal, the interfering network device group can determine that it has caused interference to the interfered network device group.
  • the interfering network device group implements measures to eliminate remote interference, and sends a first notification message to the interfered network device group.
  • the first notification message is used to notify the interfering network device group that the reference signal of the interfered network device group has been received.
  • the interfering network device group ends implementing measures to eliminate remote interference, and sends a second notification message to the interfered network device group.
  • the second notification message is used to notify that the reference signal disappears, and the interfering network device group can stop monitoring the reference signal.
  • the interfering network device group ends implementing measures to eliminate remote interference, and may send a second notification message for notifying the disappearance of the reference signal to the interfered network device group.
  • first communication message and second notification message are merely naming for distinguishing, and do not limit the application.
  • S450 The interfered network device group stops sending the reference signal.
  • the interfering network device group will take separate measures to eliminate the remote interference after receiving the reference signal. In other words, the interfering network device group will take separate measures to eliminate the interference when it learns that it has caused interference to the interfered network device group. Remote interference.
  • the interfering network device group takes separate measures to eliminate remote interference, it will cause all network devices in the interfering network device group or too many network devices to participate in the elimination of remote interference, resulting in unnecessary cell performance loss at the interfering network device group.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, through the coordination of CU, AMF, or OAM, or the network device itself decides whether to perform interference cancellation, so that the network device with fewer or most effective interference network devices in the group of network devices performs interference cancellation In this way, not only can the interference be eliminated, but also the influence on the communication performance of the interfering network device group can be reduced.
  • pre-definition can be realized by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other methods that can be used to indicate related information in the device (for example, including terminal devices and/or network devices).
  • the specific implementation method is not limited.
  • pre-defined may refer to the definition in the agreement.
  • the "saving” mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may refer to storing in one or more memories.
  • the one or more memories may be provided separately, or integrated in an encoder or decoder, a processor, or a communication device.
  • the one or more memories may also be partly provided separately, and partly integrated in the decoder, processor, or communication device.
  • the type of the memory may be any form of storage medium, which is not limited in this application.
  • protocol may refer to a standard protocol in the communication field, for example, it may include an LTE protocol, an NR protocol, or a related protocol applied to a future communication system, which is not limited in this application.
  • the first, the second, etc. are only convenient for distinguishing different objects, and should not constitute any limitation to the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method 500 according to an embodiment of the present application. The method involves centralized units and distributed units. As shown in Figure 5, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which includes:
  • the first DU and the second DU receive reference signals from the interfered network device group.
  • N DUs receive the reference signal from the interfered network equipment group.
  • the N DUs cause long-range interference to the interfered network equipment group. That is to say, the interfered network equipment group sends the reference signal through the air interface, and the N DUs receive To the reference signal, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • FIG. 5 only lists the first DU and the second DU for description, and the first DU and the second DU belong to any two DUs among the N DUs.
  • the N DUs can be controlled by one CU.
  • the interfered network device group may specifically be K network devices, and the K network devices are all subject to the remote interference of N DUs; or, the interfered network device group has a CU-DU architecture, that is, the interfered network device group is specific There can be K DUs, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the reference signal may carry the identity (ID) of the interfered network device group, and the N DUs can parse the identity.
  • the N DUs can learn which network devices they have caused remote interference to.
  • the interference intensity may be calculated based on the reference signal.
  • the interference intensity may include, for example, the interference intensity information calculated based on the reference signal from the interfered network device group; and/or, the N DUs themselves received remote interference from the interfered network device group and the remote The measured value of the interference intensity, such as the IoT value.
  • the following are all expressed by interference intensity.
  • the DU can report information to the CU through the F1 interface.
  • the N DUs can report the information of the reference signal to the CU, so that the CU can select the DU for interference cancellation, so as to prevent the N DUs from performing interference cancellation alone, causing unnecessary communication at the N DUs Performance loss.
  • performing interference cancellation which may also be referred to as performing remote interference cancellation, is to eliminate the remote interference caused by N DUs to the interfered network device group.
  • the following is succinct, all referred to as performing interference cancellation.
  • S520 The first DU and the second DU report the information of the reference signal to the CU.
  • the N DUs report the information of the reference signal to the CU.
  • FIG. 5 for convenience of description, only the first DU and the second DU are listed as an example.
  • the reference signal information reported by the N DUs carries the identity of the interfered network device group, so that the CU can determine which DU carries the same identity by carrying the identity of the interfered network device group, in other words, it can determine What are the DUs that interfere with the same network equipment?
  • the reference signal information reported by the N DUs includes: reference signal strength and/or interference strength.
  • the reference signal strength may be represented by, for example, reference signal receiving power (RSRP).
  • RSRP reference signal receiving power
  • the interference intensity may include, for example, the interference intensity information calculated based on the reference signal of the interfered network device group, and/or the measured remote interference strength of the N DUs themselves subjected to the remote interference from the interfered network device group Measured value. Specifically, refer to the description in S510, which will not be repeated.
  • the information of the reference signal reported by the N DUs may be transmitted through the F1AP message, that is, the N DUs send the information of the reference signal to the CU through the F1AP message.
  • the information of the reference signal reported by the N DUs may be carried in an existing message.
  • a new class 2 element procedure can also be defined, for example, it can be represented by RIM RS Indication, and the RIM RS Indication contains the information of the reference signal, for example, RIM RS INDICATION message , As shown in Table 1 below. It should be understood that RIM RS Indication and RIM RS INDICATION message are only a naming method and are not limited.
  • the CU After the CU receives the reference signal information reported by the N DUs, it can select the DU for interference cancellation.
  • the CU selects a DU for interference cancellation.
  • the N DUs report the information of the reference signal to the CU, and the identity of the interfered network device group carried in the reported information of the reference signal may be the same or different.
  • the CU respectively selects one or more DUs from the DUs carrying the same identifier for interference cancellation.
  • the CU can select a DU for interference cancellation through any of the following implementation methods.
  • the CU may select DUs for interference cancellation among DUs carrying the same identifier based on the information of the currently reported reference signal.
  • N1 DUs Take the same identifier carried by N DUs as an example for illustrative description.
  • the CU arbitrarily selects N1 DUs among the reported N DUs for interference cancellation, where N1 is less than N, and N1 is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1.
  • the CU may select DUs for interference cancellation among DUs carrying the same identifier in combination with the historical interference cancellation process (for example, the last interference cancellation process) based on the information of the currently reported reference signal.
  • N2 DUs out of N DUs are used for interference cancellation
  • the CU selects N2 DUs from the reported N DUs for interference cancellation, where N2 is less than or equal to N, and N2 is greater than 1 or an integer equal to 1.
  • the DU selected by the CU and the DU in the historical interference cancellation process may be completely the same, partly the same, or completely different, which is not limited.
  • the CU may select DUs for interference cancellation among DUs carrying the same identifier based on the information of the currently reported reference signal and combined with the information of the historically reported reference signal.
  • the historically reported reference information includes the reference signal strength and/or interference strength
  • the CU may combine the historically reported reference signal information to determine the reference signal strength and/or interference strength, based on the reference signal strength and/or interference strength, Select a DU for interference cancellation from N DUs.
  • the CU may select DUs for interference cancellation from DUs carrying the same identifier.
  • the reference signal information reported by the N DUs includes reference signal strength and/or interference strength
  • the CU may select a DU for interference cancellation from the N DUs based on the reference signal strength and/or interference strength.
  • the CU selects the target DU based on the reference signal strength and/or interference strength, it can be selected by any of the following methods:
  • Method 1 Choose the one with higher reference signal strength
  • Method 2 Select the reference signal whose strength exceeds the first threshold
  • Method 3 choose the one with greater interference intensity
  • Method 4 select the interference intensity that exceeds the second threshold.
  • the CU After selecting a DU for interference cancellation, the CU sends instruction information to the DU for interference cancellation, which is used to instruct the DU to perform interference cancellation. Still taking the first DU and the second DU as an example, assuming that in S530, the CU selects the first DU for interference cancellation, the method 500 further includes S540:
  • the CU sends indication information to the first DU, where the indication information is used to instruct the first DU to perform interference cancellation.
  • FIG. 5 only lists the indication information that the CU sends to the first DU to indicate the interference message. It should be understood that, in S540, the CU sends indication information to each DU selected for interference cancellation.
  • the DU can eliminate or reduce the long-range interference caused to the interfered network equipment group by reducing the downlink power; another example, the DU can be used in the frequency domain (such as frequency band, etc.) and time domain (such as subframes, etc.) where interference is generated. ), or in the airspace (such as beams or beam sets, etc.) to stop sending data, etc., to eliminate or reduce the long-range interference caused to the interfered network device group. It should be understood that any measures that can be taken to reduce the remote interference of N DUs to the interfered network device group fall within the protection scope of this application.
  • the CU may also determine whether the remote interference of the N DUs to the interfered network device group is eliminated.
  • the CU determines whether the remote interference is eliminated.
  • whether the remote interference is eliminated in other words, whether the remote interference still exists, in other words, whether the interference is eliminated or whether the interference still exists.
  • Whether the remote interference is eliminated can indicate whether the remote interference is completely eliminated; or, it can also indicate whether the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold; or, it can also indicate whether the interference intensity is reduced; or, it can also indicate whether the degree of interference reduction is greater than a preset value, etc. .
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit it, and the following is used to indicate whether the remote interference is eliminated.
  • the preset threshold or preset value may be a preset threshold, for example, a predetermined threshold or a preset value configured by a network device, which is not limited.
  • the remote interference has been eliminated, in other words the interference has been eliminated, it can mean that the remote interference has been completely eliminated, or it can also mean that the interference intensity does not exceed the preset threshold, or it can also mean the interference intensity Already reduced, or, it can also mean that the degree of interference intensity has decreased beyond a preset value, and so on.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not make a limitation, and the following is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated.
  • the remote interference is not eliminated, in other words, the interference is not eliminated, which may indicate that the remote interference is not completely eliminated, or it may indicate that the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold, or it may also indicate that the interference intensity is not eliminated. Change or increase in interference intensity, or it can also mean that the degree of interference intensity decline does not exceed a preset value, and so on.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not make a limitation, and the following is used to indicate that the remote interference is not eliminated.
  • the CU determines remote interference cancellation.
  • the DU performing interference cancellation keeps the current configuration, or the DU performing interference cancellation keeps the current communication resource configuration until the RIM process ends.
  • the RIM process refer to the description of FIG. 4, which will not be repeated here.
  • the CU determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
  • the CU can perform S530, that is, the CU selects one or more DUs from the remaining DUs to continue interference cancellation, and then can continue to perform S540 and S550 until it is determined that the remote interference has been eliminated.
  • the remaining DU is a DU without interference cancellation among the N DUs, such as the second DU.
  • N DUs can perform S510, that is, re-receive the reference signal, and then report to the CU, and the CU can perform S530, that is, the CU selects one or more DUs from the remaining DUs or all the reported DUs. Continue to perform interference cancellation, and then continue to perform S540 and S550 until it is determined that the remote interference has been eliminated.
  • the DU performing interference cancellation may further reduce downlink power or stop communication until the CU determines that the remote interference has been eliminated.
  • the CU can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated by any of the following methods.
  • Method A CU inquires about the remote interference status of the interfered network device group, and receives the response message from the interfered network device group;
  • Method B The CU asks about the remote interference status of the interfered network equipment group, and determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the response message is received within a preset time period;
  • Method C The CU determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the notification message is received within the preset time period;
  • Method D The CU determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to the remote interference intensity information sent by the interfered network device group.
  • Method A The CU inquires about the remote interference status of the interfered network device group, and receives a response message from the interfered network device group.
  • the CU or N DUs can send an inquiry message to the interfered network device group.
  • the inquiry message is used to inquire whether the remote interference caused by the N DU to the interfered network device group is eliminated, for example, by Backhaul signaling inquires about the remote interference status to the interfered network equipment group.
  • N DUs send inquiry messages to the interfered network equipment group, which can be understood as any one or more of the N DUs sending inquiry messages to the interfered network equipment group; or, it can also be understood as N DUs
  • the DU with the coordination function in the DU sends an inquiry message to the interfered network device group; or, it can also be understood as that a representative DU in the N DU sends an inquiry message to the interfered network device group; or, it can also be understood as ,
  • One or more of the DUs performing interference cancellation send an inquiry message to the interfered network device group.
  • the CU sends an inquiry message to the interfered network device group. It can be inquired after the CU instructs the DU to perform interference cancellation, or after the DU interference cancellation processing, or after the CU selects the DU for interference cancellation Inquiry, this embodiment of the application does not limit this.
  • the inquiry message sent by the CU to the interfered network device group can be transmitted through the NGAP message.
  • the CU sends the inquiry message to the AMF, and the AMF then sends the inquiry message to the interfered network device group.
  • the inquiry message can be carried in an existing message, such as requesting the remote interference status of the interfered network device group through the information element Request RI status IE in the existing NGAP message.
  • the inquiry message may also be a redefined NGAP message, and the redefined NGAP message includes the information element Request RI status IE. It should be understood that the information element Request RI status IE is only a naming method and is not limited.
  • the redefined NGAP message can be represented by, for example, RAN RI STATUS REQUEST message and AMF RI STATUS REQUEST message.
  • RAN RI STATUS REQUEST message is the message from CU to AMF
  • RAN RI STATUS REQUEST message contains the information element Request RI status IE.
  • AMF RI STATUS REQUEST message is the message from AMF to the interfered network device group
  • AMF RI STATUS REQUEST message contains the information element Request RI status IE.
  • the interfered network device group After receiving the inquiry message, the interfered network device group replies with a response message to the CU.
  • the response message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, or the response message is used to indicate that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
  • the CU can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated according to the response message.
  • the response message may be transmitted through a reference signal message sent through the air interface. That is, the interfered network equipment group can send a reference signal message to the DU.
  • t bits are used to indicate whether the DU remote interference is eliminated, and the DU then informs the CU whether the remote interference is eliminated.
  • t is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1. Assuming that t is equal to 1, you can use '1' to indicate that the remote interference has not been eliminated, and use '0' to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated; alternatively, you can also use '1' to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, and '0' to indicate that the remote interference has not been eliminated .
  • the response message may be transmitted through an NGAP message.
  • the interfered network device group sends a response message to the AMF, and the AMF sends a response message to the CU.
  • the information element RI status IE in the existing NGAP message can be used to indicate whether the interference is eliminated.
  • the redefined NGAP message can also be used to indicate whether the remote interference is eliminated.
  • the redefined NGAP message can be represented by RAN RI STATUS message and AMF RI STATUS message.
  • RAN RI STATUS message is the message from the interfered network device group to the AMF
  • the RAN RI STATUS message contains the information element RI status IE.
  • AMF RI STATUS message is the message from AMF to CU, and AMF RI STATUS message contains the cell RI status IE.
  • the CU can ask the interfered network device group about the remote interference status, and according to the response message returned by the interfered network device group, conveniently and quickly confirm whether the remote interference is eliminated.
  • Method B The CU asks about the remote interference status of the interfered network device group, and determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the reply message is received within a preset time period.
  • the CU or N DUs can send an inquiry message to the interfered network device group to inquire whether the remote interference caused by the DU to the interfered network device group is eliminated, for example, through fallback signaling to The interfered network device group asks about the remote interference status.
  • the CU or N DUs sending inquiry messages to the interfered network device group refer to the description in Method A, which will not be repeated here.
  • the CU determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; if the CU does not receive the response message within the preset time period, Then the CU determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated. For example, after the CU sends an inquiry message to the interfered network device group, the CU starts the timer with the preset duration as the time length.
  • the CU determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; if the CU has not received the response message when the timer expires, the CU determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
  • the DU determines that the remote interference has been eliminated and informs the CU that the remote interference has been eliminated; If the DU does not receive a response message within the time period, the DU determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated, and informs the CU that the remote interference has not been eliminated. For example, after the DU sends an inquiry message to the interfered network device group, it starts the timer with the preset duration as the time length.
  • the DU determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; if the DU has not received a response message when the timer expires, the DU determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
  • the preset duration may be a preset duration, such as pre-defined by the protocol or pre-configured by the network device; or it may be a duration dynamically set according to actual conditions; or it may be a duration estimated based on historical conditions
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
  • the interfered network device group After receiving the inquiry message, if the interfered network device group detects that the remote interference is eliminated, it can immediately reply to the DU or CU with a response message, and the response message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated; If the interfered network device group detects that the remote interference has not been eliminated, it does not reply with a response message.
  • the interfered network equipment group can detect whether the remote interference is eliminated after receiving the inquiry message; or the interfered network equipment group may periodically detect whether the remote interference is eliminated after receiving the inquiry message; or the interfered network equipment group After receiving the inquiry message, it may be detected irregularly whether the remote interference is eliminated; or the interfered network device group may periodically or irregularly detect whether the remote interference is eliminated, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the CU can accurately confirm whether the interference is eliminated, and can save signaling overhead.
  • Method C The CU determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the notification message is received within a preset time period.
  • the DU or CU does not need to send an inquiry message to the interfered network device group.
  • the CU determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; if the CU does not receive the notification message within the preset time period, Then the CU determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated. For example, when the CU instructs the DU to start interference cancellation, the CU starts the timer with the preset duration as the length of time.
  • the CU determines The remote interference has been eliminated; if the CU has not received the notification message at the end of the timer, the CU determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
  • the DU determines that the remote interference has been eliminated and informs the CU that the interference has been eliminated; If the DU does not receive the notification message within the time period, the DU determines that the remote interference is not eliminated, and notifies the CU that the interference is not eliminated. For example, when the DU starts to cancel the interference, it starts the timer with the preset duration as the time length. If the DU receives a notification message during the timer running phase and the notification message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, the DU determines that the remote interference has been eliminated. Elimination; if the DU has not received the notification message at the end of the timer, the DU determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
  • the preset duration may be a preset duration, such as pre-defined by the protocol or pre-configured by the network device; or it may be a duration dynamically set according to actual conditions; or it may be a duration estimated based on historical conditions
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
  • the interfered network device group For the interfered network device group, it can periodically or irregularly detect whether the remote interference is eliminated. If the interfered network device group detects that the remote interference has been eliminated, it can immediately send a notification message that the remote interference has been eliminated to the DU or CU , The notification message can be sent through backhaul or carried in the reference signal sent on the air interface; if the interfered network equipment group detects that the remote interference is not eliminated, the notification message may not be sent, or the reference signal sent on the air interface It carries messages that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
  • the DU or CU can accurately confirm whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the notification message of the interfered network device group is received within the preset time period, and can save signaling overhead.
  • Method D The CU determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to the remote interference intensity information sent by the interfered network device group.
  • the remote interference intensity information sent by the interfered network device group may be an IoT value or other remote interference strength information.
  • the remote interference intensity information may be carried in the reference signal sent by the interfered network equipment group, or may be specially sent by the interfered network equipment group, or may be carried in the response message as described in way A. There is no limitation on the form of the remote interference intensity information.
  • whether the interference is eliminated can be determined according to whether the remote interference intensity information is received, or it can also be determined whether the interference is eliminated according to the received remote interference intensity information. For example, if the CU receives the remote interference intensity information, the CU determines that the remote interference is not eliminated; if the CU does not receive the remote interference intensity information, the CU determines that the remote interference is eliminated. For another example, if the CU receives the remote interference intensity information within the preset time period, the CU determines that the remote interference is not eliminated; if the CU does not receive the remote interference intensity information within the preset time period, the CU determines that the remote interference intensity information is eliminated.
  • whether the interference is eliminated can be determined according to whether the remote interference intensity information is received, or it can also be determined whether the interference is eliminated according to the received remote interference intensity information. For example, if the DU receives the remote interference intensity information, the DU determines that the remote interference is not eliminated; if the DU does not receive the remote interference intensity information, the DU determines that the remote interference is eliminated. For another example, if the DU receives the remote interference intensity information DU within the preset time period, the DU determines that the remote interference is not eliminated; if the DU does not receive the remote interference intensity information within the preset time period, the DU determines that the remote interference intensity information is eliminated.
  • the preset duration may be a preset duration, such as pre-defined by the protocol or pre-configured by the network device; or it may be a duration dynamically set according to actual conditions; or it may be a duration estimated based on historical conditions
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
  • the interfered network equipment group For the interfered network equipment group, it can periodically or irregularly detect whether the remote interference is eliminated, and send the remote interference intensity information to the DU or CU. Or, if the interfered network equipment group detects remote interference cancellation, it can immediately send remote interference strength information to the DU or CU.
  • the remote interference strength information can be carried in the reference signal sent by the air interface, or it can be carried in In the response message in mode A; if the interfered network device group detects that the remote interference is not eliminated, the remote interference strength information may not be sent, or the reference signal sent by the air interface may also carry the message that the remote interference is not eliminated.
  • the foregoing only exemplarily lists four methods, and the CU can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated based on any of the foregoing methods.
  • the embodiment of the present application is not limited to this, and any manner that enables the CU to determine whether the remote interference is eliminated falls within the protection scope of the embodiment of the present application.
  • Method 1 Choose the one with higher reference signal strength.
  • the reference signal strength of the DU performing interference cancellation is greater than the reference signal strength of the remaining DUs. Assuming that the identity of the interfered network device group in the information of the reference signal reported by the N DUs is the same, and the remaining DUs are DUs other than the DU for interference cancellation among the N DUs.
  • N DUs include DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6, and the identities of the interfered network device groups in the reference signal information reported by DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6 are all the same, and DU1, DU2
  • the reference signal strength of DU3 is greater than the reference signal strength of DU4, DU5, and DU6, and the DUs for interference cancellation include DU1, DU2, and DU3.
  • the CU can select DU1, DU2, and DU3 for interference cancellation.
  • Method 2 Select the reference signal whose strength exceeds the first threshold.
  • the first threshold may be preset, for example, pre-defined by the protocol, or pre-configured by the network device; or it may be dynamically set according to the actual situation, such as the average value of multiple reference signal strengths; or It is estimated based on historical conditions, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
  • the N DUs include DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6, and the identity of the interfered network device group in the reference signal information reported by DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6 are all the same.
  • the first threshold may be the average value of the reference signal strength reported by DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6, and the DU whose reference signal strength exceeds the first threshold is the DU for interference cancellation.
  • the first threshold may be the product of the sum of the reference signal strengths reported by DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6 and the coefficient t, where t is greater than 0 and t is less than 1, and the reference signal strength exceeds the first threshold
  • the DU is the DU for interference cancellation.
  • Method 3 choose the one with greater interference intensity.
  • Choosing a larger interference intensity can also be understood as that the interference intensity of the DU that performs interference cancellation is greater than the interference intensity of the remaining DUs.
  • N DUs include DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6, and the identities of the interfered network device groups in the reference signal information reported by DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6 are all the same, and DU1, DU2 ,
  • the interference intensity of DU3 is greater than the interference intensity of DU4, DU5, and DU6, the DUs for interference cancellation include DU1, DU2, and DU3.
  • the CU can select DU1, DU2, and DU3 for interference cancellation.
  • Method 4 select the interference intensity that exceeds the second threshold.
  • the second threshold can be preset, for example, pre-defined by the protocol, or pre-configured by the network device; or it can be dynamically set according to the actual situation, such as the average value of multiple interference intensities; or, it can be Estimated based on historical conditions, this is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the second DU includes DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6, and the identities of the interfered network device groups in the reference signal information reported by DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6 are all the same.
  • the second threshold may be the average value of the interference intensity reported by DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6, and the DU whose interference intensity exceeds the second threshold is the target DU.
  • the second threshold may be the product of the sum of the interference intensities reported by DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6 and the coefficient t, where t is greater than 0 and t is less than 1, and the interference intensity exceeds the second threshold.
  • DU1 the interference intensities reported by DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6
  • the coefficient t where t is greater than 0 and t is less than 1, and the interference intensity exceeds the second threshold.
  • the CU can select the main interference source, so that the main interference source takes interference elimination measures, which not only reduces the effect of long-range interference, but also avoids unnecessary cell performance loss at the DU.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method 700 according to an embodiment of the present application. This method involves AMF or OAM, and gNB. As shown in Figure 7, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which includes:
  • the first gNB and the second gNB receive reference signals from the interfered network device group.
  • N gNBs receive the reference signal from the interfered network equipment group, and the N gNBs all cause long-range interference to the interfered network equipment group, that is, the interfered network equipment group sends the reference signal through the air interface, and the N gNB receives To the reference signal, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • FIG. 7 only lists the first gNB and the second gNB for description. The first gNB and the second gNB belong to any two gNBs of the N gNBs.
  • the interfering network device group does not have a CU-DU architecture.
  • the interfering network device group is gNB, or it may be other network devices.
  • gNB is used as an example for introduction.
  • the reference signal carries the identity (ID) of the interfered network device group, and the N gNBs can resolve the identity.
  • the N gNBs can learn which network devices they cause remote interference to.
  • the interference intensity may be calculated based on the reference signal.
  • the interference intensity please refer to the description in the method 500, which is not repeated here.
  • N gNBs can report reference signal information to the coordinating network element, so that the coordinating network element can select the gNB for interference cancellation, avoiding N gNBs from performing interference cancellation alone, which causes unnecessary interference at the N gNBs. Communication performance loss.
  • interference cancellation which can also be referred to as remote interference cancellation, is to eliminate the remote interference caused by N gNBs to the interfered network device group.
  • the following is succinct, all referred to as performing interference cancellation.
  • the coordination network element is only a naming used to indicate its function, and its naming does not limit the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the coordination network element may be, for example, AMF; or, the coordination network element may also be OAM; or, the coordination network element may also be one or more gNBs among N gNBs, and the one or more gNBs may be gNBs with coordination functions. , Or the one or more gNBs may be representative gNBs, which is not limited.
  • the first gNB and the second gNB report the information of the reference signal to the coordination network element.
  • the N gNBs report the information of the reference signal to the coordination network element.
  • FIG. 7 for convenience of description, only the first gNB and the second gNB are listed as examples.
  • the reference signal information reported by the N gNBs carries the identity of the interfered network device group, so that the coordinated network element can determine which gNB carries the same identity by carrying the identity of the interfered network device group. In other words, It is possible to determine which gNBs are remotely interfering with the same interfered network device group.
  • the information of the reference signals reported by the N gNBs includes: reference signal strength and/or interference strength.
  • reference signal strength and the interference strength please refer to the description in the method 500, which will not be repeated here.
  • the information of the reference signals reported by the N gNBs may be transmitted through NGAP messages. Assuming that the coordination network element is AMF, N gNBs send reference signal information to AMF. The information of the reference signal reported by the N gNBs may be carried in an existing message. Or, for the information of the reference signal reported by N gNBs, a new class 2 element procedure can also be defined, for example, it can be represented by RIM RS Indication, and the RIM RS Indication contains reference signal information, for example, RIM RS INDICATION message , As shown in Table 1 above. It should be understood that RIM RS Indication and RIM RS INDICATION message are only a naming method and are not limited.
  • the coordination network element After the coordination network element receives the information of the reference signal reported by the N gNBs, it can select a gNB for interference cancellation from the N gNBs.
  • the coordination network element selects a gNB for interference cancellation.
  • the N gNBs report the information of the reference signal to the coordination network element, and the identity of the interfered network device group carried in the information of the reported reference signal may be the same or different.
  • the coordination network element respectively selects one or more gNBs from the gNBs carrying the same identifier for interference cancellation.
  • the coordination network element can select a gNB for interference cancellation through any of the following implementation methods.
  • the coordination network element may select the gNB for interference cancellation among the gNBs carrying the same identifier based on the information of the currently reported reference signal.
  • the coordination network element selects N1 gNBs from the reported N gNBs for interference cancellation, where N1 is less than or equal to N, and N1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the coordination network element can select the gNB for interference cancellation from the gNB carrying the same identifier in combination with the historical interference cancellation process (for example, the last interference cancellation process) based on the information of the currently reported reference signal.
  • N2 gNBs Take the same identifier carried by N gNBs as an example for illustration.
  • the coordination network element selects N2 gNBs from the reported N gNBs for interference cancellation, where N2 is less than or equal to N, and N2 Is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the gNB selected by the coordination network element and the gNB in the historical interference cancellation process may be completely the same, partly the same, or completely different, which is not limited.
  • the coordination network element can select the gNB for interference cancellation among the gNBs carrying the same identifier based on the information of the currently reported reference signal, combined with the information of the historically reported reference signal.
  • historically reported reference information includes reference signal strength and/or interference strength
  • the coordination network element may combine historically reported reference signal information to determine the reference signal strength and/or interference strength, based on the reference signal strength and/or interference Intensity, select a gNB for interference cancellation from N gNBs.
  • the coordination network element may select a gNB for interference cancellation among gNBs carrying the same identifier based on the reference signal strength and/or interference strength included in the currently reported reference signal information.
  • the reference signal information reported by N gNBs includes the reference signal strength and/or interference strength, and the coordination network element may select from N gNBs for interference cancellation based on the reference signal strength and/or interference strength.
  • the coordination network element may select from N gNBs for interference cancellation based on the reference signal strength and/or interference strength.
  • the coordination network element selects the gNB for interference cancellation based on the reference signal strength and/or interference strength, it can be selected by any of the following methods:
  • Method 1 Choose the one with higher reference signal strength
  • Method 2 Select the reference signal whose strength exceeds the first threshold
  • Method 3 choose the one with greater interference intensity
  • Method 4 select the interference intensity that exceeds the second threshold.
  • the coordination network element After the coordination network element selects a gNB for interference cancellation, it sends indication information to the selected gNB for instructing the gNB to perform interference cancellation. Still taking the first gNB and the second gNB as examples, it is assumed that in S730, the coordination network element selects the first gNB for interference cancellation, and the method 700 further includes S740:
  • the coordination network element sends instruction information to the first gNB, where the instruction information is used to instruct the first gNB to perform interference cancellation.
  • FIG. 7 only lists the indication information that the coordination network element sends to the first gNB to indicate the interference message. It should be understood that in S740, the coordination network element sends indication information to each gNB selected for interference cancellation.
  • gNB can eliminate or reduce the long-range interference caused to the interfered network equipment group by reducing the downlink power; another example, gNB can be used in the frequency domain (such as frequency band, etc.) and time domain (such as subframes, etc.) where interference occurs. ), or in the airspace (such as beams or beam sets, etc.) to stop sending data, etc., to eliminate or reduce the remote interference caused to the interfered network device group. It should be understood that any measures that can be taken to reduce the remote interference of N gNBs to the interfered network device group fall within the protection scope of this application.
  • the coordination network element may also determine whether the interference of the N gNBs to the interfered network device group is eliminated.
  • whether the remote interference is eliminated in other words, whether the remote interference still exists, in other words, whether the interference is eliminated or whether the interference still exists.
  • Whether the remote interference is eliminated can indicate whether the remote interference is completely eliminated; or, it can also indicate whether the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold; or, it can also indicate whether the interference intensity is reduced; or, it can also indicate whether the interference reduction degree is greater than a preset value, etc. .
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit it, and the following is used to indicate whether the remote interference is eliminated.
  • the preset threshold or the preset value may be a preset threshold, for example, a predetermined threshold or a preset value pre-configured by a protocol or a network device, which is not limited.
  • the remote interference has been eliminated, in other words the interference has been eliminated, it can mean that the remote interference has been completely eliminated, or it can also mean that the interference intensity does not exceed the preset threshold, or it can also mean the interference intensity Already reduced, or, it can also mean that the degree of interference intensity has decreased beyond a preset value, and so on.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not make a limitation, and the following is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated.
  • the remote interference is not eliminated, in other words, the interference is not eliminated, which may indicate that the remote interference is not completely eliminated, or it may indicate that the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold, or it may also indicate that the interference intensity is not eliminated. Change or increase in interference intensity, or it can also mean that the degree of interference intensity decline does not exceed a preset value, and so on.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not make a limitation, and the following is used to indicate that the remote interference is not eliminated.
  • the coordination network element determines whether the remote interference is eliminated, or the gNB can also determine whether the remote interference is eliminated.
  • the coordination network element is OAM
  • gNB can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated, or gNB can also report the result of determining whether the remote interference is eliminated to OAM, so that OAM can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated;
  • the coordination network element is AMF
  • the AMF can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated, or the AMF may also send the result of determining whether the remote interference is eliminated to the gNB, so that the gNB can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated.
  • the following is an example of determining whether the long-range interference is eliminated by the gNB as an example.
  • gNB determines remote interference cancellation.
  • the gNB performing interference cancellation keeps the current configuration, or the gNB performing interference cancellation keeps the current communication resource configuration until the RIM process ends.
  • the RIM process refer to the description of FIG. 4, which will not be repeated here.
  • the gNB determines that the remote interference is not eliminated.
  • the coordination network element can perform S730, that is, the coordination network element selects one or more gNBs from the remaining gNB to continue interference cancellation, and then can continue to perform S740 and S750 until it is determined that the remote interference has been eliminated.
  • the remaining gNB is the gNB for which interference cancellation is not performed among the N gNBs.
  • N gNBs can perform S710, that is, re-receive the reference signal, and then report to the coordinating network element, and the coordinating network element can perform S530, that is, the coordinating network element can select among the remaining gNBs or all the reported gNBs One or more gNBs continue to perform interference cancellation, and then S740 and S750 can be continued until it is determined that the remote interference has been eliminated.
  • the gNB performing interference cancellation may further reduce the downlink power or stop communication until it is determined that the remote interference has been eliminated.
  • the gNB can use any of the following methods to determine whether the remote interference is eliminated.
  • Method A gNB inquires about the remote interference status of the interfered network device group, and receives the response message from the interfered network device group;
  • Method B gNB asks about the remote interference status of the interfered network device group, and determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the response message is received within a preset time period;
  • Method C gNB determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the notification message is received within the preset time period
  • Method D The gNB determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to the remote interference intensity information sent by the interfered network device group.
  • Method A gNB inquires about the remote interference status of the interfered network device group, and receives a response message from the interfered network device group.
  • the gNB Based on the identity of the interfered network equipment group, the gNB sends an inquiry message to the interfered network equipment group, or the coordinating network element may send an inquiry message to the interfered network equipment group, and the inquiry message is used to inquire about N gNBs about the interfered network equipment Whether the remote interference caused by the group still exists, for example, by inquiring the remote interference status to the interfered network device group through fallback signaling.
  • the following uses gNB to send an inquiry message to the interfered network device group as an example for exemplification.
  • the gNB sends an inquiry message to the interfered network equipment group, which can be inquired after the gNB that needs interference cancellation instructed by the coordination network element to perform interference cancellation, or it can be inquired after the interference cancellation processing of the gNB that performs interference cancellation is completed, or, It may also be inquired after the coordination network element selects the gNB that needs to perform interference cancellation, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the gNB sending an inquiry message to the interfered network device group can be understood as that any one or more gNBs in the N gNB send an inquiry message to the interfered network device group; or, it can also be understood as the information in the N gNB
  • the gNB with the coordination function sends an inquiry message to the interfered network device group; or, it can also be understood that a representative gNB among the N gNBs sends an inquiry message to the interfered network device group.
  • the following uses gNB to send an inquiry message to the interfered network device group as an example for exemplification.
  • the inquiry message sent by the gNB to the interfered network device group can be transmitted through NGAP messages.
  • the coordinating network element is AMF
  • gNB sends an inquiry message to AMF
  • AMF sends an inquiry message to the interfered network device group.
  • the inquiry message can be carried in an existing message, such as requesting the remote interference status of the interfered network device group through the information element Request RI status IE in the existing NGAP message.
  • the inquiry message may also be a redefined NGAP message, and the redefined NGAP message includes the information element Request RI status IE. It should be understood that the information element Request RI status IE is only a naming method and is not limited.
  • the redefined NGAP message can be represented by, for example, RAN RI STATUS REQUEST message and AMF RI STATUS REQUEST message.
  • RAN RI STATUS REQUEST message is the message from gNB to AMF
  • RAN RI STATUS REQUEST message contains the information element Request RI status IE.
  • AMF RI STATUS REQUEST message is the message from AMF to the interfered network device group
  • AMF RI STATUS REQUEST message contains the information element Request RI status IE.
  • the interfered network device group After receiving the inquiry message, the interfered network device group returns a response message to the coordination network element or gNB.
  • the response message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, or the response message is used to indicate that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
  • the coordination network element or gNB can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated through the received response message.
  • the response message may be transmitted through a reference signal message sent through the air interface. That is, the interfered network device group may send a reference signal message to the gNB, and t bits are used in the reference signal message to indicate whether the remote interference is eliminated, where t is an integer greater than or equal to 1. Assuming that t is equal to 1, you can use '1' to indicate that the remote interference has not been eliminated, and use '0' to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated; alternatively, you can also use '1' to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, and '0' to indicate that the remote interference has not been eliminated .
  • the response message may be transmitted through NGAP messages.
  • the coordinating network element is AMF
  • the interfered network device group sends a response message to AMF
  • AMF can send a response message to gNB.
  • the information element RI status IE in the existing NGAP message can be used to indicate whether the remote interference is eliminated.
  • the redefined NGAP message can also be used to indicate whether the remote interference is eliminated.
  • the redefined NGAP message can be represented by RAN RI STATUS message and AMF RI STATUS message.
  • RAN RI STATUS message is the message from the interfered network device group to the AMF, and the RAN RI STATUS message contains the information element RI status IE.
  • AMF RI STATUS message is the message from AMF to gNB, and AMF RI STATUS message contains the cell RI status IE.
  • the coordinating network element when the coordinating network element is the AMF, the interfered network device group sends a response message to the AMF, and the AMF can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated according to the response message, and the AMF may not send a response message to the gNB again.
  • the coordinating network element is OAM
  • gNB sends an inquiry message to the interfered network device group, and gNB receives the response message from the interfered network device group, and gNB reports the received response message to OAM so that OAM can determine the remote interference Whether to eliminate.
  • the gNB can query the interfered network device group about the remote interference status, and according to the response message returned by the interfered network device group, it is convenient and quick to confirm whether the remote interference is eliminated.
  • Method B The gNB asks about the remote interference status of the interfered network device group, and determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the reply message is received within a preset time period.
  • the gNB Based on the identity of the interfered network equipment group, the gNB sends an inquiry message to the interfered network equipment group, or the coordinating network element may send an inquiry message to the interfered network equipment group, and the inquiry message is used to inquire about N gNBs about the interfered network equipment Whether the remote interference caused by the group still exists, for example, by inquiring the remote interference status to the interfered network device group through fallback signaling.
  • the gNB sending the inquiry message to the interfered network device group please refer to the description in Method A, which will not be repeated here.
  • the gNB determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; if the gNB does not receive the response message within the preset time period, Then the gNB determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated. For example, after the gNB sends an inquiry message to the interfered network device group, it starts the timer with the preset duration as the time length.
  • the gNB determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; if the gNB has not received a response message when the timer expires, the gNB determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
  • the coordination network element determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; If the internal coordination network element does not receive the response message, the coordination network element determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated. For example, after the coordinating network element sends an inquiry message to the interfered network device group, it starts a timer with the preset duration as the time length.
  • the coordination network element determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; if the coordination network element has not received a response message at the end of the timer, the coordination network element determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
  • the preset duration may be a preset duration, such as pre-defined by the protocol or pre-configured by the network device; or it may be a duration dynamically set according to actual conditions; or it may be a duration estimated based on historical conditions
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
  • the interfered network device group After receiving the inquiry message, if the interfered network device group detects that the remote interference is eliminated, it can immediately reply to the gNB or the coordinating network element with a response message, and the response message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been Elimination; if the interfered network device group detects that the remote interference has not been eliminated, it will not respond with a response message.
  • the interfered network equipment group can detect whether the remote interference is eliminated after receiving the inquiry message; or the interfered network equipment group may periodically detect whether the remote interference is eliminated after receiving the inquiry message; or the interfered network equipment group After receiving the inquiry message, it may be detected irregularly whether the remote interference is eliminated; or the interfered network device group may periodically or irregularly detect whether the remote interference is eliminated, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • gNB can ask the interfered network device group about the remote interference status, and according to whether the response message from the interfered network device group is received within the preset time, it can accurately confirm whether the remote interference is eliminated, and it can save trust. Order overhead.
  • Method C The gNB determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the notification message is received within the preset time period.
  • the gNB or the coordination network element does not need to send an inquiry message to the interfered network device group.
  • the gNB determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; if the gNB does not receive the notification message within the preset time period, Then the gNB determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated. For example, when gNB starts to cancel interference, it starts a timer with a preset duration. If the gNB receives a notification message during the timer operation phase and the notification message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, the gNB determines that the remote interference has been eliminated. Elimination; if the gNB has not received the notification message at the end of the timer, the gNB determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
  • the coordination network element determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; If the internal coordination network element does not receive the notification message, the coordination network element determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
  • the timer can be started with a preset duration.
  • the coordination network element determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; if the coordination network element has not received the notification message when the timer expires, the coordination network element determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
  • the preset duration may be a preset duration, such as pre-defined by the protocol or pre-configured by the network device; or it may be a duration dynamically set according to actual conditions; or it may be a duration estimated based on historical conditions
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
  • the interfered network equipment group For the interfered network equipment group, it can periodically or irregularly detect whether the remote interference is eliminated. If the interfered network equipment group detects that the remote interference is eliminated, it can immediately send the remote interference eliminated to the gNB or the coordination network element Notification message.
  • the notification message can be sent through backhaul or carried in the reference signal sent by the air interface; if the interfered network equipment group detects that the remote interference has not been eliminated, the notification message may not be sent, or it can be sent over the air interface
  • the reference signal carries a message that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
  • the gNB or the coordinating network element can accurately confirm whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the notification message sent by the interfered network device group is received within a preset time period, and can save signaling overhead.
  • Method D The gNB determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to the remote interference intensity information sent by the interfered network device group.
  • the remote interference intensity information sent by the interfered network device group may be an IoT value or other remote interference strength information.
  • the interference intensity information may be carried in the reference signal sent by the interfered network equipment group, or may be specially sent by the interfered network equipment group, or may also be carried in the response message as described in way A. There is no limitation on the form of the remote interference intensity information.
  • the gNB it can be determined whether the interference is eliminated according to whether the remote interference intensity information is received, or it can also be determined whether the interference is eliminated according to the received remote interference intensity information. For example, if the gNB receives the remote interference strength information, the gNB determines that the remote interference is not eliminated; if the gNB does not receive the remote interference strength information, the gNB determines that the remote interference is eliminated. For another example, if the gNB receives the remote interference strength information gNB within the preset time period, the gNB determines that the remote interference is not eliminated; if the gNB does not receive the remote interference strength information within the preset time period, the gNB determines that the remote interference is eliminated.
  • whether the interference is eliminated can be determined according to whether the remote interference intensity information is received, or it can also be determined whether the interference is eliminated according to the received remote interference intensity information. For example, if the coordination network element receives the remote interference intensity information, the coordination network element determines that the remote interference is not eliminated; if the coordination network element does not receive the remote interference intensity information, the coordination network element determines that the remote interference is eliminated. For another example, if the coordination network element receives the remote interference intensity information within the preset time period, the coordination network element determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated; if the coordination network element does not receive the remote interference intensity information within the preset time period , The coordination network element determines the remote interference cancellation.
  • the preset duration may be a preset duration, such as pre-defined by the protocol or pre-configured by the network device; or it may be a duration dynamically set according to actual conditions; or it may be a duration estimated based on historical conditions
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
  • the interfered network equipment group For the interfered network equipment group, it can periodically or irregularly detect whether the remote interference is eliminated, and send the remote interference intensity information to the gNB or the coordination network element. Or, if the interfered network equipment group detects remote interference cancellation, it can immediately send remote interference strength information to the gNB or the coordinating network element.
  • the remote interference strength information can be carried in the reference signal sent by the air interface, or it can be carried. In the response message as described in Method A; if the interfered network device group detects that the remote interference has not been eliminated, the remote interference strength information may not be sent, or the reference signal sent by the air interface may also carry the uneliminated remote interference news.
  • the foregoing only exemplarily lists four methods.
  • the gNB or the coordination network element can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated based on any of the foregoing methods.
  • the embodiment of the present application is not limited to this, and any manner that enables the gNB or the coordinating network element to determine whether the remote interference is eliminated falls within the protection scope of the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method 800 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method involves centralized units and distributed units.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which includes:
  • the DU receives the reference signal from the interfered network device group.
  • N DUs receive reference signals from the interfered network equipment group, and the N DUs all cause long-range interference to the interfered network equipment group, that is, the interfered network equipment group sends reference signals to the N DUs through the air interface.
  • the reference signal is received, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • FIG. 8 only lists one DU for description, and the DU belongs to any DU among the N DUs.
  • the DU can determine whether to perform interference cancellation by itself based on the received reference signal, so as to avoid the DU from performing interference cancellation separately after receiving the reference signal, causing unnecessary communication performance loss at the DU.
  • performing interference cancellation which may also be referred to as performing remote interference cancellation, is to eliminate the remote interference caused by the DU to the interfered network device group.
  • the following is succinct, all referred to as performing interference cancellation.
  • S820 The DU determines whether to perform remote interference cancellation.
  • the DU can be determined according to whether the reference signal strength exceeds the threshold #1.
  • the DU can determine whether to perform interference cancellation according to the reference signal strength and threshold #1. For example, when the reference signal strength of the DU exceeds the threshold #1, interference cancellation is performed; when the reference signal strength of the DU does not exceed the threshold #1, interference cancellation is not performed. Regarding the description of the reference signal strength reference method 500, details are not repeated here.
  • the threshold #1 may be a preset threshold, such as a threshold pre-specified by a protocol, or a threshold pre-configured by a network device; or, it may also be a threshold estimated based on historical conditions.
  • the threshold #1 may be a threshold allocated by the CU to the DU in advance.
  • the CU can refer to the description in the method 500, and the details are not repeated here.
  • the DU reports the information of the reference signal to the CU, and accordingly, the CU receives the information of the reference signal reported by the DU.
  • the reference signal information reported by the DU carries the identity of the interfered network device group, so that the CU can determine which DU carries the same identity by carrying the identity of the interfered network device group, in other words, it can determine the remote interference What are the DUs of the same network equipment?
  • S520 For the specific form of the DU reporting the information of the reference signal to the CU, refer to S520 in the method 500, which will not be repeated here.
  • the CU assigns threshold #1.
  • the reference signal information includes the reference signal strength
  • the CU determines a threshold value #1 according to the reference signal strength, such as taking the average value of the N reference signal strengths, and sending the threshold value #1 to the DU.
  • the CU determines a threshold #1 according to the reference signal strength in the historically reported reference information, and sends the threshold #1 to the DU.
  • the DU can be determined according to whether the interference intensity exceeds the threshold #2.
  • the DU can determine whether to perform interference cancellation according to the interference intensity and threshold #2. For example, when the interference intensity of DU exceeds threshold #2, interference cancellation is performed; when the interference intensity of DU does not exceed threshold #2, interference cancellation is not performed. Regarding the interference intensity, refer to the description in the method 500, which will not be repeated here.
  • the threshold #2 may be a preset threshold, such as a threshold pre-specified by a protocol or a threshold pre-configured by a network device; or, it may also be a threshold estimated based on historical conditions.
  • the threshold #2 may be a threshold allocated by the CU to the DU in advance.
  • the CU can refer to the description in the method 500, and the details are not repeated here.
  • the DU reports the information of the reference signal to the CU, and accordingly, the CU receives the information of the reference signal reported by the DU.
  • the reference signal information reported by the DU carries the identity of the interfered network device group, so that the CU can determine which DU carries the same identity by carrying the identity of the interfered network device group, in other words, it can determine the remote interference What are the DUs of the same network equipment?
  • S520 For the specific form of the DU reporting the information of the reference signal to the CU, refer to S520 in the method 500, which will not be repeated here.
  • the CU For DUs carrying the same identifier, the CU allocates threshold #2.
  • the information of the reference signal includes the interference intensity
  • the CU determines a threshold #2 according to the interference intensity, such as taking the average value of N interference intensities, and sends the threshold #2 to the DU.
  • the CU determines a threshold #2 according to the interference intensity in the historically reported reference information, and sends the threshold #2 to the DU.
  • the DU can also determine whether the remote interference of the DU to the interfered network device group is eliminated, or it can also be understood as the CU determines whether the remote interference of the DU to the interfered network device group is eliminated, or it can also be understood as,
  • the DU that performs interference cancellation in the DU determines whether the remote interference to the interfered network device group is eliminated. The following is an example of DU determining whether the remote interference is eliminated.
  • the DU determines whether the remote interference is eliminated.
  • whether the interference is eliminated in other words, whether the interference still exists, in other words, whether the remote interference is eliminated or whether the remote interference still exists.
  • Whether the interference is eliminated may indicate whether the interference is completely eliminated; or, it may also indicate whether the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold; or, it may also indicate whether the interference intensity is reduced; or, it may also indicate whether the degree of interference reduction exceeds a preset value, and so on.
  • the preset threshold or the preset value may be a preset threshold, for example, a predetermined threshold or a preset value pre-configured by a protocol or a network device, which is not limited.
  • the remote interference has been eliminated, in other words the interference has been eliminated, it can mean that the remote interference has been completely eliminated, or it can also mean that the interference intensity does not exceed the preset threshold, or it can also mean the interference intensity Already reduced, or, it can also mean that the degree of interference intensity has decreased beyond a preset value, and so on.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not make a limitation, and the following is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated.
  • the remote interference is not eliminated, in other words, the interference is not eliminated, which may indicate that the remote interference is not completely eliminated, or it may indicate that the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold, or it may also indicate that the interference intensity is not eliminated. Change or increase in interference intensity, or it can also mean that the degree of interference intensity decline does not exceed a preset value, and so on.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not make a limitation, and the following is used to indicate that the remote interference is not eliminated.
  • the DU determines remote interference cancellation.
  • the DU keeps the current configuration, or the DU keeps the current communication resource configuration until the RIM process ends.
  • the RIM process refer to the description of FIG. 4, which will not be repeated here.
  • the DU determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
  • the DU can notify the CU that the remote interference is not eliminated, and the CU can assign threshold #3 and/or threshold #4 to the DU, and the DU continues to perform S820 until it is determined that the remote interference has been eliminated; or, the CU can assign a threshold to the remaining DUs #3 and/or threshold #4, the remaining DUs continue to perform S820 until it is determined that the remote interference has been eliminated, and the remaining DUs are DUs that have not undergone interference cancellation.
  • the threshold #3 is less than the preset threshold #1
  • the threshold #4 is less than the preset threshold #2.
  • the DU that performs interference cancellation in the DU can further reduce the downlink power or stop communication until the DU determines that the remote interference has been eliminated.
  • threshold #3 and threshold #4 there are many ways to determine threshold #3 and threshold #4:
  • the threshold #3 may be a preset threshold, such as a threshold pre-specified by a protocol, or a threshold pre-configured by a network device; or, it may be a threshold estimated based on historical conditions.
  • multiple thresholds may be configured in advance, for example, including threshold #1 and threshold #3, or including threshold #2 and threshold #4.
  • the threshold #3 may be a threshold allocated by the CU to the DU in advance. For example, when the CU allocates the threshold #1 to the DU, the threshold #3 is allocated, that is, the CU allocates the threshold #1 and the threshold #3 to the DU. For another example, when the CU allocates the threshold #2 to the DU, the threshold #4 is allocated, that is, the CU allocates the threshold #2 and the threshold #4 to the DU.
  • the threshold #3 may be a threshold allocated by the CU to the DU according to the information of the previously received reference signal.
  • the CU then allocates a threshold for the DU based on the information of the previously received reference signal, such as threshold #3 and threshold #4.
  • the DU when the DU determines that the remote interference is not eliminated, the DU reports the information of the reference signal to the CU, and accordingly, the CU receives the information of the reference signal reported by the DU.
  • the specific form of the DU reporting the information of the reference signal to the CU reference may be made to S520 in the method 500, which will not be repeated here.
  • the threshold #3 or the threshold #4 may be a threshold allocated by the CU to the DU according to the reported information of the reference signal.
  • DU can use any of the following methods to determine whether the remote interference is eliminated.
  • Method A inquires about the remote interference status of the interfered network equipment group, and receives the response message from the interfered network equipment group;
  • Method B DU inquires about the remote interference status of the interfered network equipment group, and determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the reply message is received within a preset time period;
  • Method C determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the notification message is received within the preset time period
  • Method D The CU determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to the remote interference intensity information sent by the interfered network device group.
  • method A For the above method A, method B, method C, and method D, please refer to the description in method 500, which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method 900 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method involves AMF or OAM, and base stations.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which includes:
  • the gNB receives the reference signal from the interfered network device group.
  • N gNBs receive the reference signal from the interfered network equipment group, and the N gNBs all cause long-range interference to the interfered network equipment group, that is, the interfered network equipment group sends the reference signal through the air interface, and the N gNB receives To the reference signal, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • FIG. 9 only lists one gNB for description, and the gNB belongs to any gNB among the N gNBs.
  • the gNB may determine whether to perform interference cancellation by itself based on the received reference signal, so as to prevent the gNB from performing interference cancellation separately after receiving the reference signal, causing unnecessary communication performance loss at the gNB.
  • performing interference cancellation which can also be referred to as performing remote interference cancellation, is to eliminate the remote interference caused by the gNB to the interfered network device group.
  • the following is succinct, all referred to as performing interference cancellation.
  • the gNB determines whether to perform interference cancellation.
  • gNB can be determined according to whether the reference signal strength exceeds threshold #5.
  • the gNB can determine whether to perform interference cancellation according to the reference signal strength and threshold #5. For example, when the reference signal strength exceeds threshold #5, interference cancellation is performed; when the reference signal strength does not exceed threshold #5, interference cancellation is not performed. Regarding the description of the reference signal strength reference method 500, details are not repeated here.
  • the threshold #5 may be a preset threshold, such as a threshold pre-defined by a protocol, or a threshold pre-configured by a network device; or, it may also be a threshold estimated based on historical conditions.
  • the threshold #5 may be a threshold pre-allocated by the coordination network element to the gNB.
  • the coordination network element reference may be made to the description in method 700, which will not be repeated.
  • the gNB reports the information of the reference signal to the coordination network element.
  • the reference signal information reported by the gNB carries the identity of the interfered network device group, so that the coordinated network element can determine which gNB carries the same identity by carrying the identity of the interfered network device group, in other words, it can be determined What are the gNBs that interfere with the same network equipment remotely?
  • S720 For the specific form of the information of the reference signal reported by the gNB to the coordination network element, refer to S720 in the method 700, which will not be repeated here.
  • the coordination network element For the gNB carrying the same identifier, the coordination network element allocates threshold #5.
  • the reference signal information includes the reference signal strength
  • the coordination network element determines a threshold #5 according to the reference signal strength, such as taking the average value of the N reference signal strengths, and sending the threshold #5 to the gNB.
  • the coordination network element determines a threshold #5 according to the reference signal strength in the historically reported reference information, and sends the threshold #5 to the gNB.
  • the gNB may be determined according to whether the interference intensity exceeds the threshold #6.
  • the gNB can determine whether to perform interference cancellation according to the interference intensity and threshold #6. For example, when the interference intensity exceeds threshold #6, interference cancellation is performed; when the interference intensity does not exceed threshold #6, interference cancellation is not performed. Regarding the interference intensity, refer to the description in the method 500, which will not be repeated here.
  • the threshold #6 may be a preset threshold, such as a threshold pre-defined by a protocol or a threshold pre-configured by a network device; or, it may also be a threshold estimated based on historical conditions.
  • the threshold #6 may be a threshold pre-allocated to the gNB by the coordination network element.
  • the coordination network element can refer to the description in the method 700, which will not be repeated.
  • the gNB reports the information of the reference signal to the coordination network element.
  • the reference signal information reported by the gNB carries the identity of the interfered network device group, so that the coordinated network element can determine which gNB carries the same identity by carrying the identity of the interfered network device group, in other words, it can be determined What are the gNBs that interfere with the same network equipment remotely?
  • S720 For the specific form of the information of the reference signal reported by the gNB to the coordination network element, refer to S720 in the method 700, which will not be repeated here.
  • the coordination network element assigns threshold #6.
  • the information of the reference signal includes the interference intensity
  • the coordination network element determines a threshold #6 according to the interference intensity, such as taking the average value of N interference intensities, and sends the threshold #6 to the gNB.
  • the coordination network element determines a threshold #6 according to the interference intensity in the historically reported reference information, and sends the threshold #6 to the gNB.
  • the gNB may also determine whether the interference of the interfered network device group is eliminated.
  • whether the remote interference is eliminated in other words, whether the remote interference still exists, in other words, whether the interference is eliminated or whether the interference still exists.
  • Whether the remote interference is eliminated can indicate whether the remote interference is completely eliminated; or, it can also indicate whether the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold; or, it can also indicate whether the interference intensity is reduced; or, it can also indicate whether the interference reduction degree is greater than a preset value, etc. .
  • the preset threshold or the preset value may be a preset threshold, for example, a predetermined threshold or a preset value pre-configured by a protocol or a network device, which is not limited.
  • the remote interference has been eliminated, in other words the interference has been eliminated, it can mean that the remote interference has been completely eliminated, or it can also mean that the interference intensity does not exceed the preset threshold, or it can also mean the interference intensity Already reduced, or, it can also mean that the degree of interference intensity has decreased beyond a preset value, and so on.
  • the embodiments of the present application are not limited, and the following are all expressed as long-range interference eliminated.
  • the remote interference is not eliminated, in other words, the interference is not eliminated, which may indicate that the remote interference is not completely eliminated, or it may indicate that the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold, or it may also indicate that the interference intensity is not eliminated. Change or increase in interference intensity, or it can also mean that the degree of interference intensity decline does not exceed a preset value, and so on.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not make a limitation, and the following is used to indicate that the remote interference is not eliminated.
  • the gNB determines whether the remote interference is eliminated, which can also be understood as the coordination network element determines whether the remote interference of the gNB to the interfered network device group is eliminated.
  • the coordination network element is AMF
  • AMF can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated, or AMF can also send the result of determining whether the remote interference is eliminated to gNB, so that the gNB can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated;
  • the coordination network element is OAM
  • the gNB may determine whether the remote interference is eliminated, or the gNB may also report the result of determining whether the remote interference is eliminated to the OAM, so that the OAM can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated.
  • the following is an example of determining whether the long-range interference is eliminated by the gNB as an example.
  • gNB determines remote interference cancellation.
  • the gNB keeps the current configuration, or the gNB keeps the current communication resource configuration until the end of the RIM process.
  • the RIM process refer to the description of FIG. 4, which will not be repeated here.
  • the gNB determines that the remote interference is not eliminated.
  • the coordination network element can assign threshold #7 and/or threshold #8 to gNB, and gNB continues to perform S920 until the coordination network element or gNB determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; or, the coordination network element can assign thresholds to the remaining gNB# 7 and/or threshold #8, the remaining gNBs continue to perform S520 until the coordination network element or the gNB determines that the remote interference has been eliminated, and the remaining gNBs are gNBs that have not undergone interference cancellation among the N gNBs.
  • the threshold #7 is less than the preset threshold #5
  • the threshold #8 is less than the preset threshold #6.
  • the gNB that performs interference cancellation among the N gNBs may further reduce the downlink power or stop communication until the gNB determines that the remote interference has been eliminated.
  • threshold #7 and threshold #8 there are many ways to determine threshold #7 and threshold #8:
  • threshold #7 may be a preset threshold, such as a threshold pre-specified by a protocol, or a threshold pre-configured by a network device; or, it may also be a threshold estimated based on historical conditions.
  • multiple thresholds may be configured in advance, for example, including threshold #5 and threshold #7, or including threshold #6 and threshold #8.
  • the threshold #7 may be a threshold that the coordination network element allocates to the gNB in advance. For example, when the coordination network element allocates threshold #5 to gNB, threshold #7 is allocated, that is, the coordination network element allocates threshold #5 and threshold #7 to gNB. For another example, when the coordination network element allocates threshold #6 to gNB, threshold #8 is allocated, that is, the coordination network element allocates threshold #6 and threshold #8 to gNB.
  • the threshold #7 may be a threshold allocated by the coordination network element to the gNB according to the information of the previously received reference signal.
  • the coordination network element allocates a threshold for the gNB based on the information of the previously received reference signal, such as threshold #7 and threshold #8.
  • the gNB when the gNB determines that the remote interference is not eliminated, the gNB then reports the information of the reference signal to the coordination network element, and accordingly, the coordination network element receives the information of the reference signal reported by the gNB.
  • the specific form of the gNB reporting the information of the reference signal to the coordination network element refer to S720 in the method 700, which will not be repeated here.
  • the threshold #7 or the threshold #8 may be the threshold allocated by the coordination network element to the gNB according to the reported information of the reference signal.
  • the actions after the gNB determines that the remote interference is eliminated or the gNB determines that the remote interference is not eliminated will not be repeated.
  • the gNB can use any of the following methods to determine whether the remote interference is eliminated.
  • Method A gNB inquires about the remote interference status of the interfered network device group, and receives the response message from the interfered network device group;
  • Method B gNB asks about the remote interference status of the interfered network device group, and determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the response message is received within a preset time period;
  • Method C gNB determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the notification message is received within the preset time period
  • Method D The gNB determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to the remote interference intensity information sent by the interfered network device group.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1000 may include a communication unit 1010 and a processing unit 1020.
  • the communication device 1000 can implement steps or processes corresponding to the centralized unit or coordination network element (such as the above-mentioned AMF, OAM, network equipment, etc.) in the above method embodiment.
  • the centralized unit or coordination network element such as the above-mentioned AMF, OAM, network equipment, etc.
  • It is a centralized unit or coordinated network element, or a chip or circuit configured in a centralized unit or coordinated network element.
  • the communication unit 1010 is configured to: obtain information about reference signals from N second network devices, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and the information about the reference signal includes the interfered network device group
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: based on the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices, the first network device sends instructions to M second network devices among the N second network devices Information for interference cancellation, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to N.
  • the information of the reference signals of the N second network devices includes the same identification information of the interfered network device group, the information of the reference signals includes information about the strength of the reference signal, and the reference signals of the M second network devices The strength exceeds the first threshold; or, the reference signal strength of M second network devices is greater than or equal to the reference signal strength of (NM) second network devices, among (NM) second network devices and M second network devices The network equipment is different.
  • the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices includes the same identification information of the interfered network device group, the information of the reference signal includes the information of the interference intensity or the information of the intensity of the remote interference, and M
  • the interference intensity of the second network device or the intensity of remote interference received by the M second network devices exceeds the second threshold; or, the interference intensity of the M second network devices is greater than or equal to the interference of (NM) second network devices Strength, or, the strength of the M second network devices received by the remote interference is greater than or equal to the strength of the (NM) second network devices received by the remote interference, (NM) the second network device and the M second network
  • the network equipment in the device is different.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to send inquiry information, and the inquiry information is used to inquire about the interference state of the interfered network device group.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: receive response information for the inquiry information.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: receive a notification message, which is used to notify that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the non-eliminated state.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: within a preset time period, receive information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: the information of the reference signals of the N second network devices contains the same identification information of the interfered network device group, and when the information indicating the interfered network device is not received within a preset time period When the interference state of the network device group is the information of the eliminated state, send a message for indicating interference cancellation to T second network devices in the (NM) second network device, (NM) second network device It is different from the network device in the M second network devices, where T is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and T is less than or equal to (NM).
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices contains the same identification information of the interfered network device group, when the processing unit 1020 determines the interference state of the interfered network device group When it is in the un-cancelled state, send a message indicating interference cancellation to T second network devices in (NM) second network devices, and one of (NM) second network devices and M second network devices
  • T is an integer greater than or equal to 1
  • T is less than or equal to (NM).
  • the second network device is a distributed unit of an access network device; or, the second network device is a base station.
  • the communication unit 1010 is configured to: receive information about the first reference signal from N second network devices, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and the information about the first reference signal includes The identification information of the interfering network device group; the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: send first information indicating the first condition to the N second network devices based on the information of the first reference signal of the N second network devices, The first condition is used for N second network devices to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
  • the first information includes a first threshold; the first condition is: the strength of the first reference signal exceeds the first threshold.
  • the first information includes a second threshold; the first condition is that the first interference intensity or the intensity of remote interference exceeds the second threshold.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to send inquiry information, and the inquiry information is used to inquire about the interference state of the interfered network device group.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: receive response information for the inquiry information.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: receive a notification message, which is used to notify that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state or the uneliminated state.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: within a preset time period, receive information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: the information of the reference signals of the N second network devices contains the same identification information of the interfered network device group, and when the information indicating the interfered network device is not received within a preset time period When the interference state of the network device group is the information of the eliminated state, the second information indicating the second condition is sent to the N second network devices, and the second condition is used for the N second network devices to determine whether to interfere eliminate.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices contains the same identification information of the interfered network device group, when the processing unit 1020 determines the interference state of the interfered network device group When it is in the un-cancelled state, the second information indicating the second condition is sent to the N second network devices, and the second condition is used by the N second network devices to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
  • the second information includes a third threshold, and the second condition is: the first reference signal strength exceeds the third threshold, and the third threshold is less than the first threshold; or, the second information includes a fourth threshold, and the second condition Yes: the first interference intensity or the intensity of remote interference exceeds the fourth threshold, and the fourth threshold is less than the second threshold.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: the information of the reference signals of the N second network devices contains the same identification information of the interfered network device group, and when the information indicating the interfered network device is not received within a preset time period When the interference state of the network device group is the information of the eliminated state, obtain the information of the second reference signal from the N second network devices; based on the information of the second reference signal of the N second network devices, send the information to the Nth The second network device sends third information used to indicate the third condition, and the third condition is used by N second network devices to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: when the processing unit 1020 determines that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the non-cancelled state, obtain information about the second reference signal from the N second network devices; The second reference signal information of the second network device sends third information indicating the third condition to the N second network devices. The third condition is used by the N second network devices to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
  • the third information includes a fifth threshold, and the third condition is: the second reference signal strength exceeds the fifth threshold, and the fifth threshold is less than the first threshold; or, the third information includes the sixth threshold, and the third condition Yes: the second interference intensity or the intensity of the remote interference exceeds the sixth threshold, and the sixth threshold is less than the second threshold.
  • the second network device is a centralized unit of the access network device; or, the second network device is a base station.
  • the communication device 1000 can implement the steps or processes performed by the centralized unit or the coordination network element in the method 500, the method 700, the method 800, and the method 900 according to the embodiments of the present application.
  • the communication device 1000 may include The centralized unit in the method 500, the method 700, the method 800, and the method 900 or the unit that coordinates the method executed by the network element.
  • each unit in the communication device 1000 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding processes of the method 500, the method 700, the method 800, and the method 900, respectively.
  • the communication device 1000 can implement the steps or processes performed by the distributed unit or network device (such as gNB) in the above method embodiment.
  • the distributed unit or network device such as gNB
  • it can be a distributed unit or network device.
  • the communication unit 1010 is used to: send information about the reference signal to the first network device, and the information about the reference signal includes the identification information of the interfered network device group; the communication unit 1010 is also used to: obtain information from the first network device.
  • the network equipment determines the indication information based on the information of the reference signal, the indication information is used to instruct the apparatus 1000 to perform interference cancellation; the processing unit 1020 is used to: perform interference cancellation based on the indication information.
  • the information of the reference signal includes at least one of the following: information of the strength of the reference signal, information of the interference strength, or information of the strength of the remote interference.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to send inquiry information, and the inquiry information is used to inquire about the interference state of the interfered network device group.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: receive response information for the inquiry information.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: within a preset time period, receive information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state.
  • the processing unit 1020 is further configured to resolve the interference state of the interfered network device group from the reference signal.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: when the processing unit 1020 determines that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the non-eliminated state, send notification information to the first network device, and the notification information is used to notify the first network device The interfered state of the interfered network device group is the uneliminated state.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: when the processing unit 1020 determines that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state, send notification information to the first network device, and the notification information is used to notify the first network device The interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: send notification information to the first network device when the information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state is not received within a preset time period,
  • the notification information is used to notify the first network device that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the non-eliminated state.
  • the first network device is one or more distributed units of the access network device; or, the first network device is a core network device or a network management device; or, the first network device is a base station.
  • the communication unit 1010 is configured to receive the first reference signal; the processing unit 1020 is configured to perform interference cancellation when the first condition is satisfied.
  • the first condition is: the first reference signal strength exceeds the first threshold.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: obtain the first threshold value from the first network device.
  • the first condition is that: the first interference intensity or the intensity of remote interference exceeds a second threshold.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: obtain a second threshold value from the first network device.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to send inquiry information, and the inquiry information is used to inquire about the interference state of the interfered network device group.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: the first network device receives response information for the inquiry information.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: within a preset time period, receive information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state.
  • the processing unit 1020 is further configured to: perform interference when the information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state is not received within a preset time period, and when the second condition is satisfied eliminate.
  • the processing unit 1020 is further configured to: when it is determined that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the non-cancelled state, and when the second condition is met, perform interference cancellation.
  • the second condition is: the first reference signal strength exceeds a third threshold, and the third threshold is less than the first threshold; or, the second condition is: the first interference strength or the strength of remote interference exceeds the fourth threshold, The four threshold value is smaller than the second threshold value, and the first interference intensity is determined based on the first reference signal.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: obtain a third threshold or a fourth threshold from the first network device.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: receive the second reference signal; Under the three conditions, the processing unit 1020 is also used to: perform interference cancellation.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: receive the second reference signal; when the third condition is met, the processing unit 1020 is further configured to: Interference elimination.
  • the third condition is: the second reference signal strength exceeds the fifth threshold, and the fifth threshold is less than the first threshold; or, the third condition is: the second interference strength or the strength of the remote interference exceeds the sixth threshold, The sixth threshold is less than the second threshold, and the second interference intensity is determined based on the second reference signal.
  • the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: obtain a fifth threshold or a sixth threshold from the first network device.
  • the first network device is one or more distributed units of the access network device; or, the first network device is a core network device or a network management device; or, the first network device is a base station.
  • the communication apparatus 1000 can implement the steps or processes executed by the distributed unit or network equipment in the method 500, the method 700, the method 800, and the method 900 according to the embodiments of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus 1000 may include A unit that executes the method 500, the method 700, the method 800, and the method 900 performed by the distributed unit or the network device.
  • each unit in the communication device 1000 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding processes of the method 500, the method 700, the method 800, and the method 900, respectively.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus 1100 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device can implement the units of each step executed by the centralized unit in the above embodiments.
  • the method executed by the centralized unit in method 500 or method 800 may be executed.
  • the device 1100 includes:
  • the memory 1110 is used to store programs
  • Communication interface 1120 used to communicate with other devices
  • the processor 1130 is configured to execute a program in the memory 1110.
  • the processor 1130 is configured to obtain information about reference signals from N second network devices through the communication interface 1120, where: N is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1, and the information of the reference signal includes the identification information of the interfered network device group; and based on the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices, it is sent to M of the N second network devices
  • the second network device sends information for indicating interference cancellation, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to N.
  • the processor 1130 When the program is executed, the processor 1130 is configured to obtain information about the first reference signal from N second network devices through the communication interface 1120, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and The information of a reference signal includes the identification information of the interfered network device group; and based on the information of the first reference signal of the N second network devices, the first information indicating the first condition is sent to the N second network devices , The first condition is used for N second network devices to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus 1200 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device can implement the units of each step executed by the coordination network element in the above embodiment.
  • the method executed by the coordination network element in method 700 or method 900 may be executed.
  • the device 1200 includes:
  • the memory 1210 is used to store programs
  • the communication interface 1220 is used to communicate with other devices;
  • the processor 1230 is configured to execute a program in the memory 1210.
  • the processor 1230 is configured to obtain reference signal information from N second network devices through the communication interface 1220, where: N is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1, and the information of the reference signal includes the identification information of the interfered network device group; and based on the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices, it is sent to M of the N second network devices
  • the second network device sends information for indicating interference cancellation, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to N.
  • the processor 1230 When the program is executed, the processor 1230 is configured to obtain information of the first reference signal from N second network devices through the communication interface 1220, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and The information of a reference signal includes the identification information of the interfered network device group; and based on the information of the first reference signal of the N second network devices, the first information indicating the first condition is sent to the N second network devices , The first condition is used for N second network devices to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus 1300 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device can implement the units of each step executed by the distributed unit in the above embodiments. For example, a method executed by a distributed unit in method 500 or method 800 may be executed.
  • the device 1300 includes:
  • the memory 1310 is used to store programs
  • Communication interface 1320 used to communicate with other devices
  • the processor 1330 is configured to execute a program in the memory 1310.
  • the processor 1320 is configured to send reference signal information to the first network device through the communication interface 1330, and the reference signal information includes the interfered And obtaining indication information determined by the first network device based on the information of the reference signal, the indication information being used to instruct the second network device to perform interference cancellation; and the processor 1320 is configured to be based on the indication information, Perform interference cancellation.
  • the processor 1320 When the program is executed, the processor 1320 is configured to receive the information of the first reference signal through the communication interface 1330; and the processor 1320 is configured to perform interference when the information of the first reference signal meets the first condition eliminate.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a device 1400 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device can implement the units of each step executed by the network device (such as gNB) in the above embodiment.
  • the method executed by the network device in method 700 or method 900 may be executed.
  • the device 1400 includes:
  • the memory 1410 is used to store programs
  • Communication interface 1420 used to communicate with other devices
  • the processor 1430 is configured to execute a program in the memory 1410.
  • the processor 1420 is configured to send reference signal information to the first network device through the communication interface 1430, and the reference signal information includes the interfered Identification information of the network device group; and obtaining indication information determined by the first network device based on the information of the reference signal, where the indication information is used to instruct the second network device to perform interference cancellation; and the processor 1420 is used to, based on the indication information, Perform interference cancellation.
  • the processor 1420 When the program is executed, the processor 1420 is configured to receive the information of the first reference signal through the communication interface 1430; and the processor 1420 is configured to perform interference when the information of the first reference signal meets the first condition eliminate.
  • the aforementioned communication interface (1120, 1220, 1320, 1420) may be a receiver or a transmitter, or may also be a transceiver.
  • the steps of the above method can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
  • the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability.
  • the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components .
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory in the embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electronic Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • static random access memory static random access memory
  • dynamic RAM dynamic random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • serial link DRAM SLDRAM
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the method 500, method 700, The method in any one of the embodiments shown in method 800 and method 900.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable medium that stores program code, and when the program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the method 500, method 700, The method in any one of the embodiments shown in method 800 and method 900.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a high-density digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (solid state disc, SSD)) etc.
  • component used in this specification are used to denote computer-related entities, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution.
  • the component may be, but is not limited to, a process, a processor, an object, an executable file, an execution thread, a program, and/or a computer running on a processor.
  • the application running on the computing device and the computing device can be components.
  • One or more components may reside in processes and/or threads of execution, and components may be located on one computer and/or distributed between two or more computers.
  • these components can be executed from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon.
  • a component can be based on a signal having one or more data packets (for example, data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • data packets for example, data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through signals
  • the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components can be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • each unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of this application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .

Abstract

The present application provides a communication method and a communication device, intended to solve the problem of remote interference. Said method comprises: a first network device acquiring information about reference signals from N second network devices, N being an integer greater than or equal to 1, the N second network devices performing remote interference on an interfered network device group, and the information about the reference signals including identification information about the interfered network device group; and on the basis of the information about the reference signals of the N second network devices, the first network device sending, to M second network devices among the N second network devices, information for indicating interference elimination to be performed, M being an integer greater than or equal to 1, and M being less than or equal to N.

Description

通信方法和通信装置Communication method and communication device
本申请要求于2019年02月15日提交中国专利局、申请号为201910117846.6、申请名称为“通信方法和通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the Chinese Patent Office, the application number is 201910117846.6, and the application name is "communication method and communication device" on February 15, 2019, the entire content of which is incorporated into this application by reference.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信领域,并且更具体地,涉及一种通信方法和通信装置。The present application relates to the field of communication, and more specifically, to a communication method and communication device.
背景技术Background technique
在特殊的大气条件下,电磁波能在大气层中超折射传播,就像在波导内向前传播一样,这称为大气波导现象。由于大气波导现象的原因,一定区域内的网络设备可能会受到来自于相隔很远的一定区域内网络设备信号产生的干扰。这种干扰可以称为远程干扰。Under special atmospheric conditions, electromagnetic waves can propagate in the atmosphere by super-refraction, just like propagating forward in a waveguide. This is called an atmospheric duct phenomenon. Due to the atmospheric duct phenomenon, network equipment in a certain area may be interfered by signals from network equipment in a certain area that are far away. This interference can be called long-range interference.
例如,在一些场景下,如时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)场景或者新无线(new radio,NR)场景,区域A的网络设备下行信号由于大气波导现象传播到相隔很远的区域B。由于区域A的网络设备下行信号经历远距离传输时延到达区域B时,区域B可能正在进行上行传输,这时区域A的信号会造成对区域B的干扰,从而会影响区域B的网络设备的通信性能。For example, in some scenarios, such as a time division duplex (TDD) scenario or a new radio (NR) scenario, the downlink signal of the network device in the area A propagates to the area B which is far away due to the atmospheric duct phenomenon. When the downlink signal of network equipment in area A reaches area B after long-distance transmission delay, area B may be undergoing uplink transmission. At this time, the signal in area A will cause interference to area B, which will affect the network equipment in area B. Communication performance.
如何解决这种远程干扰问题成为当前亟需解决的问题。How to solve this long-range interference problem has become a problem that needs to be solved urgently.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种通信方法和通信装置,以期解决远程干扰问题。This application provides a communication method and communication device in order to solve the problem of remote interference.
第一方面,提供了一种通信方法,包括:第一网络设备获取来自N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息,其中,N为大于1或等于1的整数,参考信号的信息包含被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息;基于N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息,第一网络设备向N个第二网络设备中的M个第二网络设备发送用于指示进行干扰消除的信息,其中,M为大于或等于1的整数,且M小于或等于N。In a first aspect, a communication method is provided, including: a first network device obtains reference signal information from N second network devices, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and the reference signal information includes the interfered The identification information of the network device group; based on the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices, the first network device sends information for indicating interference cancellation to M second network devices among the N second network devices, Wherein, M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to N.
基于上述技术方案,第一网络设备基于N个第二网络设备上报的参考信号的信息,从N个第二网络设备选择一个或多个网络设备进行干扰消除,从而既可以进行干扰消除,降低或消除对被干扰的网络设备组的干扰,又可以尽量降低对N个第二网络设备处的通信性能的影响。Based on the above technical solution, the first network device selects one or more network devices from the N second network devices to perform interference cancellation based on the information of the reference signal reported by the N second network devices, so that interference cancellation, reduction or Eliminating the interference to the interfered network device group can also minimize the impact on the communication performance at the N second network devices.
相反地,如果N个第二网络设备获知自身干扰到被干扰的网络设备组后,直接进行干扰消除,那么N个第二网络设备全都进行干扰消除,大大影响了N个第二网络设备处的通信性能。Conversely, if N second network devices learn that they have interfered with the interfered network device group and directly perform interference cancellation, then all N second network devices perform interference cancellation, which greatly affects the performance of N second network devices. Communication performance.
因此,通过第一网络设备的协商,即,基于上报的参考信号的信息,从N个第二网络设备选择一个或多个网络设备进行干扰消除,可以在降低或消除干扰的同时,也可以保证 N个第二网络设备处的通信性能。Therefore, through the negotiation of the first network device, that is, based on the reported reference signal information, one or more network devices are selected from the N second network devices for interference cancellation, which can reduce or eliminate the interference while also guaranteeing Communication performance at N second network devices.
可选地,被干扰的网络设备组具体可以为一个或多个网络设备。Optionally, the interfered network device group may specifically be one or more network devices.
可选地,N个第二网络设备对被干扰的网络设备组进行了远程干扰。Optionally, the N second network devices perform remote interference on the interfered network device group.
可选地,参考信号的信息包含被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息,即表示N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息均包含被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息,且N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息包含的被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息可以相同,也可以不同。Optionally, the information of the reference signal includes the identification information of the interfered network device group, that is, the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices includes the identification information of the interfered network device group, and the N second network The identification information of the interfered network device group contained in the information of the reference signal of the device may be the same or different.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息包含的所述被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息相同,参考信号的信息包括参考信号强度的信息,M个第二网络设备的参考信号强度超过第一阈值;或者,M个第二网络设备的参考信号强度大于或等于(N-M)个第二网络设备的参考信号强度,(N-M)个第二网络设备和M个第二网络设备中的网络设备不同。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the reference signal information of the N second network devices includes the same identification information of the interfered network device group, and the reference signal information includes the reference signal strength , The reference signal strength of M second network devices exceeds the first threshold; or, the reference signal strength of M second network devices is greater than or equal to the reference signal strength of (NM) second network devices, (NM) The second network device is different from the network devices in the M second network devices.
基于上述技术方案,第一网络设备可以选择主要干扰源来进行干扰消除,例如,选择参考信号强度较大的网络设备来进行干扰消除。Based on the above technical solution, the first network device may select the main interference source to perform interference cancellation, for example, select a network device with a larger reference signal strength to perform interference cancellation.
可选地,第一阈值可以是预先设置的,例如协议预先规定的,或者网络设备预先配置的;或者,也可以是根据实际情况动态设置的,如多个参考信号强度的平均值;或者,也可以是根据历史情况预估的,对此,本申请实施例不作限定。Optionally, the first threshold may be preset, for example, pre-defined by the protocol, or pre-configured by the network device; or, may also be dynamically set according to actual conditions, such as the average value of multiple reference signal strengths; or, It may also be estimated based on historical conditions, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息包含的被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息相同,参考信号的信息包括干扰强度的信息或受到远程干扰的强度的信息,M个第二网络设备的干扰强度或M个第二网络设备受到远程干扰的强度超过第二阈值;或者,M个第二网络设备的干扰强度大于或等于(N-M)个第二网络设备的干扰强度,或,M个第二网络设备的受到远程干扰的强度大于或等于(N-M)个第二网络设备的受到远程干扰的强度,(N-M)个第二网络设备和M个第二网络设备中的网络设备不同。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices contains the same identification information of the interfered network device group, and the information of the reference signal includes information about the interference intensity or Information on the intensity of remote interference, the interference intensity of M second network devices or the intensity of M second network devices receiving remote interference exceeds the second threshold; or, the interference intensity of M second network devices is greater than or equal to (NM ) The interference intensity of the second network device, or the intensity of the remote interference of the M second network device is greater than or equal to the intensity of the remote interference of the (NM) second network device, (NM) the second network device It is different from the network equipment in the M second network equipment.
基于上述技术方案,第一网络设备可以选择主要干扰源来进行干扰消除,例如,选择干扰强度较大的网络设备来进行干扰消除。Based on the foregoing technical solution, the first network device may select the main interference source to perform interference cancellation, for example, select a network device with a greater interference intensity to perform interference cancellation.
可选地,第二阈值可以是预先设置的,例如协议预先规定的,或者网络设备预先配置的;或者,也可以是根据实际情况动态设置的,如多个干扰强度的平均值或多个受到远程干扰的强度的平均值;或者,也可以是根据历史情况预估的,对此,本申请实施例不作限定。Optionally, the second threshold may be preset, for example, pre-defined by the protocol, or pre-configured by the network device; or, it may be dynamically set according to actual conditions, such as the average value of multiple interference intensities or multiple The average value of the intensity of the remote interference; or, it may be estimated based on historical conditions, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
可选地,干扰强度可以是第二网络设备基于参考信号计算出的干扰强度。Optionally, the interference strength may be the interference strength calculated by the second network device based on the reference signal.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第一网络设备发送询问信息,询问信息用于询问被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: the first network device sends query information, and the query information is used to query the interference status of the interfered network device group.
可选地,受干扰状态,换句话说,干扰是否消除,或者,干扰是否还存在,或换句话说,远程干扰是否消除或远程干扰是否还存在。干扰是否消除可以表示干扰是否完全消除;或者,也可以表示干扰强度是否超过预设阈值;或者,也可以表示确定干扰强度是否降低;或者,也可以表示确定干扰下降程度是否超过预设值等等。其中,预设阈值可以是预先规定的阈值,例如协议预先规定的,或者网络设备预先配置的阈值,对此,不作限定。Optionally, the interfered state, in other words, whether the interference is eliminated, or whether the interference still exists, or in other words, whether the remote interference is eliminated or whether the remote interference still exists. Whether the interference is eliminated can indicate whether the interference is completely eliminated; or, it can also indicate whether the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold; or, it can also indicate whether the interference intensity is reduced; or, it can also indicate whether the degree of interference reduction exceeds a preset value, etc. . Wherein, the preset threshold may be a predetermined threshold, for example, a threshold predetermined by a protocol or a threshold preconfigured by a network device, which is not limited.
相应地,干扰已消除,换句话说远程干扰已消除,可以表示干扰已完全消除,或者,也可以表示干扰强度未超过预设阈值,或者,也可以表示干扰强度已降低,或者,也可以 表示干扰强度下降程度超过预设值等等。干扰未消除,换句话说远程干扰未消除,可以表示干扰未完全消除,或者,也可以表示干扰强度超过预设阈值,或者,也可以表示干扰强度没有变化或者干扰强度上升,或者,也可以表示干扰强度下降程度未超过预设值等等。Correspondingly, the interference has been eliminated, in other words the remote interference has been eliminated, it can mean that the interference has been completely eliminated, or it can mean that the interference intensity has not exceeded the preset threshold, or it can mean that the interference intensity has been reduced, or it can mean The degree of interference intensity reduction exceeds a preset value and so on. The interference is not eliminated, in other words, the remote interference is not eliminated, which can mean that the interference is not completely eliminated, or it can mean that the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold, or it can mean that the interference intensity has not changed or the interference intensity has increased, or it can also mean The degree of interference intensity decline does not exceed a preset value, etc.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第一网络设备接收针对询问信息的响应信息。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementation manners of the first aspect, the method further includes: the first network device receives response information for the query information.
可选地,响应信息包括受干扰状态为干扰未消除状态的信息,或者,响应信息包括受干扰状态为干扰已消除状态。Optionally, the response information includes information that the interfered state is an interference-uncancelled state, or the response information includes that the interfered state is an interference-cancelled state.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第一网络设备接收通知消息,通知消息用于通知被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态或未消除状态。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: the first network device receives a notification message, where the notification message is used to notify the interfered network device group that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state or the uneliminated state status.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息包含的被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息相同,当第一网络设备在预设时长内未接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息时,方法还包括:第一网络设备向(N-M)个第二网络设备中的T个第二网络设备发送用于指示进行干扰消除的消息,(N-M)个第二网络设备和M个第二网络设备中的网络设备不同,其中,T为大于或等于1的整数,且T小于或等于(N-M)。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices contains the same identification information of the interfered network device group, and when the first network device is within the preset time period When the information indicating that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state is not received, the method further includes: the first network device sends to T second network devices of the (NM) second network devices A message used to instruct interference cancellation, the (NM) second network device is different from the network devices in the M second network devices, where T is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and T is less than or equal to (NM).
基于上述技术方案,可以根据在预设时长内未接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息,确定干扰未消除时,此时可以从剩余网络设备(例如记作(N-M)个第二网络设备)中选择一个或多个网络设备进行干扰消除,从而可以提高干扰消除的效率。Based on the above technical solution, it is possible to obtain information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state within a preset period of time, and when it is determined that the interference is not eliminated, the remaining network devices (for example, Denoted as (NM) second network device) select one or more network devices for interference cancellation, thereby improving the efficiency of interference cancellation.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第一网络设备在预设时长内接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: the first network device receives, within a preset time period, information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state .
基于上述技术方案,第一网络设备可以根据预设时长内,是否接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息,来确定干扰是否消除。例如,在预设时长内接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息,则确定干扰消除;又如,在预设时长内未接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息,则确定干扰未消除。从而,不仅可以准确地确认干扰是否消除,且可以节省信令开销。Based on the foregoing technical solution, the first network device may determine whether the interference is eliminated according to whether the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state is received within a preset time period. For example, if information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the canceled state is received within a preset period of time, it is determined that the interference is eliminated; another example is that no information indicating that the interference is received is received within the preset period of time. If the interference state of the network device group is the eliminated state, it is determined that the interference is not eliminated. Therefore, not only can it be accurately confirmed whether the interference is eliminated, but also the signaling overhead can be saved.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第一网络设备接收来自被干扰的网络设备组的远程干扰强度信息;第一网络设备根据远程干扰强度信息确定被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: the first network device receives remote interference strength information from the interfered network device group; the first network device determines the interfered person according to the remote interference strength information The interfered state of the network device group.
可选地,被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰强度信息,即该被干扰网络设备组受到的远程干扰强度,可以是IoT值,或者也可以是其它远程干扰强度信息。Optionally, the remote interference strength information of the interfered network device group, that is, the remote interference strength received by the interfered network device group, may be an IoT value, or may also be other remote interference strength information.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:当第一网络设备接收到来自被干扰的网络设备组的远程干扰强度信息时,第一网络设备确定被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: when the first network device receives remote interference intensity information from the interfered network device group, the first network device determines the interfered network The interfered state of the device group is not eliminated.
基于上述方案,第一网络设备可以根据是否接收到被干扰的网络设备组的远程干扰强度信息,来确定干扰是否消除。Based on the above solution, the first network device can determine whether the interference is eliminated according to whether the remote interference intensity information of the interfered network device group is received.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:当被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态时,第一网络设备向(N-M)个第二网络设备中的T个第二网 络设备发送用于指示进行干扰消除的消息,(N-M)个第二网络设备和M个第二网络设备中的网络设备不同,其中,T为大于或等于1的整数,且T小于或等于(N-M)。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: when the interfered state of the interfered network device group is in the non-eliminated state, the first network device sends the (NM) second network device The T second network devices in the send a message for instructing interference cancellation, the (NM) second network device is different from the network devices in the M second network devices, where T is an integer greater than or equal to 1, And T is less than or equal to (NM).
基于上述技术方案,第一网络设备确定干扰未消除时,则可以从剩余网络设备(例如记作(N-M)个第二网络设备)中选择一个或多个网络设备进行干扰消除,从而可以提高干扰消除的效率。Based on the above technical solution, when the first network device determines that the interference is not eliminated, it can select one or more network devices from the remaining network devices (for example, denoted as (NM) second network device) for interference cancellation, thereby improving the interference Elimination efficiency.
可选地,受干扰状态为未消除状态,换句话说远程干扰未消除,可以表示干扰未完全消除,或者,也可以表示干扰强度超过预设阈值,或者,也可以表示干扰强度没有变化或者干扰强度上升,或者,也可以表示干扰强度下降程度未超过预设值等等。Optionally, the interfered state is the un-cancelled state. In other words, the remote interference is not eliminated, which can mean that the interference is not completely eliminated, or it can mean that the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold, or it can mean that the interference intensity has not changed or the interference The intensity increases, or, it can also mean that the degree of interference intensity does not exceed a preset value, and so on.
可选地,确定受干扰的状态为未消除状态时,可以是通过响应消息确定,即响应消息中携带受干扰状态为未消除状态的信息;或者,也可以通过通知消息确定,即通知消息中携带受干扰状态为未消除状态的信息;或者,也可以通过预设时长内未接收到干扰消除的信息来确定等等,对此,不作限定。Optionally, when determining that the interfered state is the non-eliminated state, it can be determined through a response message, that is, the response message carries the information that the interfered state is the uneliminated state; or, it can also be determined through a notification message, that is, in the notification message. Carry the information that the interfered state is the non-cancelled state; or, it can also be determined by not receiving the interference-cancelled information within a preset time period, etc., which is not limited.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,第一网络设备为接入网设备的一个或多个集中式单元,第二网络设备为接入网设备的分布式单元;或者,第一网络设备为核心网设备或网络管理设备,第二网络设备为基站;或者,第一网络设备为N个第二网络设备中的一个或多个,第二网络设备为基站。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the first network device is one or more centralized units of the access network device, and the second network device is a distributed unit of the access network device; or, The first network device is a core network device or a network management device, and the second network device is a base station; or, the first network device is one or more of N second network devices, and the second network device is a base station.
第二方面,提供了一种通信方法,包括:第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送参考信号的信息,参考信号的信息包含被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息;第二网络设备获取来自第一网络设备基于参考信号的信息确定的指示信息,指示信息用于指示所述第二网络设备进行干扰消除;基于指示信息,第二网络设备进行干扰消除。In a second aspect, a communication method is provided, including: a second network device sends information about a reference signal to a first network device, where the information about the reference signal includes identification information of the interfered network device group; and the second network device obtains information from the first network device. A network device determines indication information based on the information of the reference signal, where the indication information is used to instruct the second network device to perform interference cancellation; based on the indication information, the second network device performs interference cancellation.
基于上述技术方案,第二网络设备接收到指示信息后再进行干扰消除,换句话说,第二网络设备如果没有接收到指示信息则不进行干扰消除。第一网络设备可以基于多个第二网络设备上报的参考信号的信息,从多个第二网络设备选择部分网络设备进行干扰消除,从而既可以进行干扰消除,降低或消除对被干扰的网络设备组的干扰,又可以尽量降低对第二网络设备处的通信性能的影响。Based on the above technical solution, the second network device performs interference cancellation after receiving the instruction information. In other words, the second network device does not perform interference cancellation if it does not receive the instruction information. The first network device can select some network devices from the multiple second network devices to perform interference cancellation based on the information of the reference signal reported by the multiple second network devices, so that interference cancellation can be performed, and the interference to the network device can be reduced or eliminated. Group interference can also minimize the impact on the communication performance of the second network device.
相反地,如果第二网络设备获知自身干扰到被干扰的网络设备组后,直接进行干扰消除,那么会大大影响了第二网络设备处的通信性能。Conversely, if the second network device learns that it has interfered with the interfered network device group and directly performs interference cancellation, the communication performance at the second network device will be greatly affected.
因此,通过第一网络设备的指示来进行干扰消除,可以在降低或消除干扰的同时,也可以保证第二网络设备处的通信性能。Therefore, the interference cancellation is performed through the instruction of the first network device, which can reduce or eliminate the interference while ensuring the communication performance at the second network device.
可选地,被干扰的网络设备组具体可以为一个或多个网络设备。Optionally, the interfered network device group may specifically be one or more network devices.
可选地,第二网络设备对被干扰的网络设备组进行了远程干扰。Optionally, the second network device remotely interferes with the interfered network device group.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,参考信号的信息包括以下至少一项:参考信号强度的信息、干扰强度的信息、或者受到远程干扰的强度的信息。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the information of the reference signal includes at least one of the following: information about the strength of the reference signal, information about the interference strength, or information about the strength of the remote interference.
可选地,干扰强度可以是第二网络设备基于参考信号计算出的干扰强度。Optionally, the interference strength may be the interference strength calculated by the second network device based on the reference signal.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第二网络设备发送询问信息,询问信息用于询问对被干扰的网络设备组的干扰是否消除。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: the second network device sends an inquiry message, and the inquiry message is used to inquire whether the interference to the interfered network device group is eliminated.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第二网络设备接收针对询问信息的响应信息。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementation manners of the second aspect, the method further includes: the second network device receives response information for the query information.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第二网络设备接收参考 信号,并从参考信号中解决被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: the second network device receives the reference signal, and resolves the interference status of the interfered network device group from the reference signal.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,当被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态时,方法还包括:第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送通知信息,通知信息用于通知第一网络设备被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, when the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state, the method further includes: the second network device sends notification information to the first network device, The notification information is used to notify the first network device that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,当被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态时,方法还包括:第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送通知信息,通知信息用于通知第一网络设备被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementation manners of the second aspect, when the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the non-eliminated state, the method further includes: the second network device sends notification information to the first network device, The notification information is used to notify the first network device that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the non-eliminated state.
可选地,第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送通知信息,或者,也可以理解为,第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送请求干扰消除的请求信息,对此,本申请不作限定。Optionally, the second network device sends notification information to the first network device, or it can also be understood that the second network device sends request information requesting interference cancellation to the first network device, which is not limited in this application.
可选地,受干扰状态为未消除状态,换句话说远程干扰未消除,可以表示干扰未完全消除,或者,也可以表示干扰强度超过预设阈值,或者,也可以表示干扰强度没有变化或者干扰强度上升,或者,也可以表示干扰强度下降程度未超过预设值等等。Optionally, the interfered state is the un-cancelled state. In other words, the remote interference is not eliminated, which can mean that the interference is not completely eliminated, or it can mean that the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold, or it can mean that the interference intensity has not changed or the interference The intensity increases, or, it can also mean that the degree of interference intensity does not exceed a preset value, and so on.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,当第一网络设备在预设时长内未接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息时,方法还包括:第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送通知信息,通知信息用于通知第一网络设备被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, when the first network device does not receive the information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state within the preset time period, The method further includes: the second network device sends notification information to the first network device, where the notification information is used to notify the first network device that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the non-eliminated state.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第二网络设备在预设时长内接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: the second network device receives, within a preset time period, information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state .
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第二网络设备接收来自被干扰的网络设备组的远程干扰强度信息;第二网络设备根据远程干扰强度信息确定被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: the second network device receives remote interference strength information from the interfered network device group; the second network device determines the interfered person according to the remote interference strength information The interfered state of the network device group.
可选地,被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰强度信息,即该被干扰网络设备组受到的远程干扰强度,可以是IoT值,或者也可以是其它远程干扰强度信息。Optionally, the remote interference strength information of the interfered network device group, that is, the remote interference strength received by the interfered network device group, may be an IoT value, or may also be other remote interference strength information.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:当第二网络设备接收到来自被干扰的网络设备组的远程干扰强度信息时,第二网络设备确定被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: when the second network device receives remote interference intensity information from the interfered network device group, the second network device determines the interfered network The interfered state of the device group is not eliminated.
基于上述方案,第二网络设备可以根据是否接收到被干扰的网络设备组的远程干扰强度信息,来确定干扰是否消除。Based on the foregoing solution, the second network device can determine whether the interference is eliminated according to whether the remote interference intensity information of the interfered network device group is received.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,第一网络设备为接入网设备的一个或多个集中式单元,第二网络设备为接入网设备的分布式单元;或者,第一网络设备为核心网设备或网络管理设备,第二网络设备为基站;或者,第一网络设备为基站,第二网络设备为基站。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the first network device is one or more centralized units of the access network device, and the second network device is a distributed unit of the access network device; or, The first network device is a core network device or a network management device, and the second network device is a base station; or, the first network device is a base station, and the second network device is a base station.
第三方面,提供了一种通信方法,包括:第二网络设备接收第一参考信号;当满足第一条件时,第二网络设备进行干扰消除。In a third aspect, a communication method is provided, including: a second network device receives a first reference signal; when the first condition is met, the second network device performs interference cancellation.
基于上述技术方案,第二网络设备获取到参考信号(例如记作第一参考信号)后,根据是否满足一定的条件(例如记作第一条件),来决定是否进行干扰消除。例如,满足该条件时,进行干扰消除;不满足该条件时,不进行干扰消除。从而既可以进行干扰消除,降低或消除对被干扰的网络设备组的干扰,又可以尽量降低对第二网络设备处的通信性能的影响。Based on the above technical solution, after the second network device obtains the reference signal (for example, recorded as the first reference signal), it determines whether to perform interference cancellation according to whether a certain condition (for example, recorded as the first condition) is satisfied. For example, when this condition is met, interference cancellation is performed; when this condition is not met, interference cancellation is not performed. Therefore, interference cancellation can be performed to reduce or eliminate the interference to the interfered network device group, and the impact on the communication performance of the second network device can be minimized.
相反地,如果第二网络设备获知自身干扰到被干扰的网络设备组后,直接进行干扰消除,那么会大大影响了第二网络设备处的通信性能。Conversely, if the second network device learns that it has interfered with the interfered network device group and directly performs interference cancellation, the communication performance at the second network device will be greatly affected.
因此,第二网络设备通过获取的第一参考信号以及第一条件来判断是否要进行干扰消除,可以在降低或消除干扰的同时,也可以保证第二网络设备处的通信性能。Therefore, the second network device determines whether to perform interference cancellation based on the acquired first reference signal and the first condition, which can reduce or eliminate the interference while ensuring the communication performance at the second network device.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,第一条件是:第一参考信号强度超过第一阈值。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementation manners of the third aspect, the first condition is: the first reference signal strength exceeds the first threshold.
基于上述技术方案,第二网络设备可以根据参考信号强度(例如记作第一参考信号强度)以及第一阈值,来决定是否进行干扰消除。例如,参考信号强度超过第一阈值时,进行干扰消除;参考信号强度未超过第一阈值时,不进行干扰消除。因此,通过参考信号强度相对较大的网络设备来进行干扰消除,可以使得主要干扰源进行干扰消除,从而提高干扰消除的效率。Based on the above technical solution, the second network device may decide whether to perform interference cancellation according to the reference signal strength (for example, recorded as the first reference signal strength) and the first threshold. For example, when the strength of the reference signal exceeds the first threshold, interference cancellation is performed; when the strength of the reference signal does not exceed the first threshold, interference cancellation is not performed. Therefore, by referring to network devices with relatively large signal strength to perform interference cancellation, the main interference source can perform interference cancellation, thereby improving the efficiency of interference cancellation.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第二网络设备获取来自第一网络设备的第一阈值。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementation manners of the third aspect, the method further includes: the second network device obtains the first threshold value from the first network device.
基于上述技术方案,该第一阈值可以是第一网络设备发送给第二网络设备的。Based on the foregoing technical solution, the first threshold may be sent by the first network device to the second network device.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,第一条件是:第一干扰强度超过第二阈值,或,受到远程干扰的强度超过第二阈值。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the first condition is: the first interference intensity exceeds the second threshold, or the intensity of the remote interference exceeds the second threshold.
可选地,第一干扰强度可以是基于第一参考信号确定的,或者,第一干扰强度也可以是检测到的远程干扰。Optionally, the first interference intensity may be determined based on the first reference signal, or the first interference intensity may also be detected remote interference.
基于上述技术方案,第二网络设备可以根据干扰强度(例如记作第一干扰强度)以及第二阈值,来决定是否进行干扰消除。例如,干扰强度或受到远程干扰的强度超过第二阈值时,进行干扰消除;干扰强度或受到远程干扰的强度未超过第二阈值时,不进行干扰消除。因此,通过干扰强度相对较大的网络设备来进行干扰消除,可以使得主要干扰源进行干扰消除,从而提高干扰消除的效率。Based on the above technical solution, the second network device can decide whether to perform interference cancellation according to the interference intensity (for example, recorded as the first interference intensity) and the second threshold. For example, when the intensity of interference or the intensity of remote interference exceeds the second threshold, interference cancellation is performed; when the intensity of interference or the intensity of remote interference does not exceed the second threshold, interference cancellation is not performed. Therefore, by using network equipment with relatively large interference intensity to perform interference cancellation, the main interference source can perform interference cancellation, thereby improving the efficiency of interference cancellation.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第二网络设备获取来自第一网络设备的第二阈值。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementation manners of the third aspect, the method further includes: the second network device obtains the second threshold value from the first network device.
基于上述技术方案,该第二阈值可以是第一网络设备发送给第二网络设备的。Based on the foregoing technical solution, the second threshold may be sent by the first network device to the second network device.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第二网络设备发送询问信息,询问信息用于询问被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the method further includes: the second network device sends inquiry information, and the inquiry information is used to inquire about the interference status of the interfered network device group.
可选地,受干扰状态包括干扰是否消除,或者,干扰是否还存在,或换句话说,远程干扰是否消除或远程干扰是否还存在。干扰是否消除可以表示干扰是否完全消除;或者,也可以表示干扰强度是否超过预设阈值;或者,也可以表示确定干扰强度是否降低等等。其中,预设阈值可以是预先规定的阈值,例如协议预先规定的,或者网络设备预先配置的阈值,对此,不作限定。Optionally, the interfered state includes whether the interference is eliminated, or whether the interference still exists, or in other words, whether the remote interference is eliminated or whether the remote interference still exists. Whether the interference is eliminated may indicate whether the interference is completely eliminated; or, it may also indicate whether the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold; or, it may also indicate whether the interference intensity is reduced, and so on. Wherein, the preset threshold may be a predetermined threshold, for example, a threshold predetermined by a protocol or a threshold preconfigured by a network device, which is not limited.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第二网络设备接收针对询问信息的响应信息。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementation manners of the third aspect, the method further includes: the second network device receives response information for the query information.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第二网络设备在预设时长内接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the method further includes: the second network device receives, within a preset time period, information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state .
基于上述技术方案,第二网络设备可以根据预设时长内,是否接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息,来确定干扰是否消除。例如,在预设时 长内接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息,则确定干扰消除;又如,在预设时长内未接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息,则确定干扰未消除。从而,不仅可以准确地确认干扰是否消除,且可以节省信令开销。Based on the foregoing technical solution, the second network device can determine whether the interference is eliminated according to whether the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state is received within a preset time period. For example, if information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the canceled state is received within a preset period of time, it is determined that the interference is eliminated; another example is that no information indicating that the interference is received is received within the preset period of time. If the interference state of the network device group is the eliminated state, it is determined that the interference is not eliminated. Therefore, not only can it be accurately confirmed whether the interference is eliminated, but also the signaling overhead can be saved.
可选地,第二网络设备对被干扰的网络设备组进行了远程干扰。Optionally, the second network device remotely interferes with the interfered network device group.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:当第二网络设备在预设时长内未接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息时,以及当满足第二条件时,第二网络设备进行干扰消除。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementation manners of the third aspect, the method further includes: when the second network device does not receive within a preset time period indicating that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state And when the second condition is met, the second network device performs interference cancellation.
基于上述技术方案,在预设时长内未接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息时,第二网络设备可以确定干扰未消除,此时第二网络设备可以根据第一参考信号的信息与第二条件,再一次判断是否要进行干扰消除。如,当第二网络设备根据第一参考信号的信息与第一条件确定不进行干扰消除,那么在确定干扰未消除时,第二网络设备进一步根据第一参考信号的信息与第二条件确定是否进行干扰消除。Based on the above technical solution, when the information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state is not received within the preset time period, the second network device can determine that the interference is not eliminated, and the second network device According to the information of the first reference signal and the second condition, it can be judged again whether to perform interference cancellation. For example, when the second network device determines not to perform interference cancellation according to the information of the first reference signal and the first condition, then when it is determined that the interference is not eliminated, the second network device further determines whether to cancel the interference according to the information of the first reference signal and the second condition. Perform interference cancellation.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第二网络设备接收来自被干扰的网络设备组的远程干扰强度信息;第二网络设备根据远程干扰强度信息确定被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the method further includes: the second network device receives remote interference strength information from the interfered network device group; the second network device determines the interfered person according to the remote interference strength information The interfered state of the network device group.
可选地,被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰强度信息,即该被干扰网络设备组受到的远程干扰强度,可以是IoT值,或者也可以是其它远程干扰强度信息。Optionally, the remote interference strength information of the interfered network device group, that is, the remote interference strength received by the interfered network device group, may be an IoT value, or may also be other remote interference strength information.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:当第二网络设备接收到来自被干扰的网络设备组的远程干扰强度信息时,第二网络设备确定被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the method further includes: when the second network device receives remote interference intensity information from the interfered network device group, the second network device determines the interfered network The interfered state of the device group is not eliminated.
基于上述方案,第二网络设备可以根据是否接收到被干扰的网络设备组的远程干扰强度信息,来确定干扰是否消除。Based on the foregoing solution, the second network device can determine whether the interference is eliminated according to whether the remote interference intensity information of the interfered network device group is received.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:当被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态时,以及当满足第二条件时,第二网络设备进行干扰消除。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the method further includes: when the interfered state of the interfered network device group is in the non-eliminated state, and when the second condition is met, the second network device performs Interference elimination.
基于上述技术方案,第二网络设备确定干扰未消除时,第二网络设备可以根据第一参考信号的信息与第二条件,再一次判断是否要进行干扰消除。如,当第二网络设备根据第一参考信号的信息与第一条件确定不进行干扰消除,那么在确定干扰未消除时,第二网络设备进一步根据第一参考信号的信息与第二条件确定是否进行干扰消除。Based on the foregoing technical solution, when the second network device determines that the interference is not eliminated, the second network device may again determine whether to perform interference cancellation based on the information of the first reference signal and the second condition. For example, when the second network device determines not to perform interference cancellation according to the information of the first reference signal and the first condition, then when it is determined that the interference is not eliminated, the second network device further determines whether to cancel the interference according to the information of the first reference signal and the second condition. Perform interference cancellation.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,第二条件是:第一参考信号强度超过第三阈值,第三阈值小于第一阈值;或,第二条件是:第一干扰强度超过第四阈值,或,受到远程干扰的强度超过所述第四阈值,第四阈值小于第二阈值。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the second condition is: the first reference signal strength exceeds the third threshold, and the third threshold is less than the first threshold; or, the second condition is: the first interference strength The fourth threshold is exceeded, or the intensity of the remote interference exceeds the fourth threshold, and the fourth threshold is less than the second threshold.
基于上述技术方案,第三阈值小于第一阈值,第四阈值小于第二阈值,从而可以提高干扰消除的效率。Based on the above technical solution, the third threshold is smaller than the first threshold, and the fourth threshold is smaller than the second threshold, thereby improving the efficiency of interference cancellation.
可选地,第一干扰强度可以是基于第一参考信号确定的,或者,第一干扰强度也可以是检测到的远程干扰。Optionally, the first interference intensity may be determined based on the first reference signal, or the first interference intensity may also be detected remote interference.
可选地,第一阈值、第二阈值、第三阈值、第四阈值,均是为第一参考信号分配的,如可以预先为第一参考信号分配第一阈值、第二阈值、第三阈值、第四阈值;或者,也可以先为第一参考信号分配第一阈值、第二阈值,当确定干扰未消除时,再为第一参考信号 分配第三阈值、第四阈值。Optionally, the first threshold, the second threshold, the third threshold, and the fourth threshold are all allocated for the first reference signal. For example, the first threshold, the second threshold, and the third threshold can be allocated for the first reference signal in advance. , The fourth threshold; alternatively, the first threshold and the second threshold may be allocated to the first reference signal first, and when it is determined that the interference is not eliminated, the third threshold and the fourth threshold are then allocated to the first reference signal.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第二网络设备获取来自第一网络设备的第三阈值或第四阈值。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementation manners of the third aspect, the method further includes: the second network device obtains the third threshold or the fourth threshold from the first network device.
基于上述技术方案,该第三阈值或第四阈值可以是第一网络设备发送给第二网络设备的。Based on the foregoing technical solution, the third threshold or the fourth threshold may be sent by the first network device to the second network device.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:当第二网络设备在预设时长内未接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息时,第二网络设备接收第二参考信号;当满足第三条件时,第二网络设备进行干扰消除。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementation manners of the third aspect, the method further includes: when the second network device does not receive within a preset time period indicating that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state When the third condition is met, the second network device performs interference cancellation.
基于上述技术方案,在预设时长内未接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息时,可以确定干扰未消除,此时第二网络设备可以基于接收到的第二参考信号与第三条件,判断是否要进行干扰消除。可选地,第二参考信号和第一参考信号可以相同,也可以不同,对此不作限定。Based on the above technical solution, when the information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the canceled state is not received within a preset period of time, it can be determined that the interference is not canceled, and the second network device may be based on the received The second reference signal and the third condition are used to determine whether to perform interference cancellation. Optionally, the second reference signal and the first reference signal may be the same or different, which is not limited.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:当被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态时,第二网络设备接收第二参考信号;当满足第三条件时,第二网络设备进行干扰消除。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the method further includes: when the interfered state of the interfered network device group is an uncancelled state, the second network device receives the second reference signal; Under three conditions, the second network device performs interference cancellation.
基于上述技术方案,在预设时长内未接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息时,可以确定干扰未消除,此时第二网络设备可以基于接收到的第二参考信号与第三条件,判断是否要进行干扰消除。可选地,第二参考信号和第一参考信号可以相同,也可以不同,对此不作限定。Based on the above technical solution, when the information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the canceled state is not received within a preset period of time, it can be determined that the interference is not canceled, and the second network device may be based on the received The second reference signal and the third condition are used to determine whether to perform interference cancellation. Optionally, the second reference signal and the first reference signal may be the same or different, which is not limited.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,第三条件是:第二参考信号强度超过第五阈值,第五阈值小于第一阈值;或,第三条件是:第二干扰强度超过第六阈值,或,受到远程干扰的强度超过所述第六阈值,第六阈值小于第二阈值。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the third condition is: the second reference signal strength exceeds the fifth threshold, and the fifth threshold is less than the first threshold; or, the third condition is: the second interference strength The sixth threshold is exceeded, or the intensity of the remote interference exceeds the sixth threshold, and the sixth threshold is less than the second threshold.
基于上述技术方案,第五阈值小于第一阈值,第六阈值小于第二阈值,从而可以提高干扰消除的效率。Based on the above technical solution, the fifth threshold is smaller than the first threshold, and the sixth threshold is smaller than the second threshold, thereby improving the efficiency of interference cancellation.
可选地,第二干扰强度可以是基于第二参考信号确定的,或者,第二干扰强度也可以是检测到的远程干扰。Optionally, the second interference intensity may be determined based on the second reference signal, or the second interference intensity may also be detected remote interference.
可选地,第一阈值、第二阈值是为第一参考信号分配的,如可以预先为第一参考信号分配第一阈值、第二阈值;当确定干扰未消除时,再为第二参考信号分配第五阈值、第六阈值。Optionally, the first threshold and the second threshold are allocated for the first reference signal. For example, the first threshold and the second threshold can be allocated for the first reference signal in advance; when it is determined that the interference is not eliminated, the second reference signal Assign the fifth and sixth thresholds.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第二网络设备获取来自第一网络设备的第五阈值或第六阈值。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementation manners of the third aspect, the method further includes: the second network device obtains the fifth threshold or the sixth threshold from the first network device.
基于上述技术方案,该第五阈值或第六阈值可以是第一网络设备发送给第二网络设备的。Based on the foregoing technical solution, the fifth threshold or the sixth threshold may be sent by the first network device to the second network device.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,第一网络设备为接入网设备的一个或多个集中式单元,第二网络设备为接入网设备的分布式单元;或者,第一网络设备为核心网设备或网络管理设备,第二网络设备为基站;或者,第一网络设备为基站,第二网络设备为基站。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the first network device is one or more centralized units of the access network device, and the second network device is a distributed unit of the access network device; or, The first network device is a core network device or a network management device, and the second network device is a base station; or, the first network device is a base station, and the second network device is a base station.
第四方面,提供了一种通信方法,包括:第一网络设备获取来自N个第二网络设备的第一参考信号的信息,其中,N为大于1或等于1的整数,第一参考信号的信息包含被干 扰的网络设备组的标识信息;基于N个第二网络设备的第一参考信号的信息,第一网络设备向N个第二网络设备发送用于指示第一条件的第一信息,第一条件用于N个第二网络设备判断是否要进行干扰消除。In a fourth aspect, a communication method is provided, including: a first network device obtains information about a first reference signal from N second network devices, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and the value of the first reference signal The information includes the identification information of the interfered network device group; based on the information of the first reference signal of the N second network devices, the first network device sends the first information indicating the first condition to the N second network devices, The first condition is used for N second network devices to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
基于上述技术方案,第一网络设备可以基于N个第二网络设备上报的参考信号的信息,为该N个第二网络设备发送用于指示第一条件的信息,使得N个第二网络设备可以根据参考信号的信息以及第一条件,来判断是否进行干扰消除。例如,满足该第一条件时,进行干扰消除;不满足该第一条件时,不进行干扰消除。从而既可以进行干扰消除,降低或消除对被干扰的网络设备组的干扰,又可以尽量降低对N个第二网络设备处的通信性能的影响。Based on the above technical solution, the first network device can send information indicating the first condition for the N second network devices based on the information of the reference signal reported by the N second network devices, so that the N second network devices can According to the information of the reference signal and the first condition, it is determined whether to perform interference cancellation. For example, when the first condition is met, interference cancellation is performed; when the first condition is not met, interference cancellation is not performed. Therefore, interference cancellation can be performed to reduce or eliminate the interference to the interfered network device group, and the impact on the communication performance of the N second network devices can also be minimized.
相反地,如果N个第二网络设备获知自身干扰到被干扰的网络设备组后,直接进行干扰消除,那么会大大影响了N个第二网络设备处的通信性能。Conversely, if the N second network devices learn that they have interfered with the interfered network device group and directly perform interference cancellation, the communication performance at the N second network devices will be greatly affected.
因此,通过向N个第二网络设备指示该第一条件,使得N个第二网络设备通过获取的第一参考信号以及第一条件来判断是否要进行干扰消除,可以在降低或消除干扰的同时,也可以保证第二网络设备处的通信性能。Therefore, by instructing the first condition to the N second network devices, the N second network devices can determine whether to perform interference cancellation through the acquired first reference signal and the first condition, which can reduce or eliminate the interference at the same time , Can also guarantee the communication performance at the second network device.
可选地,被干扰的网络设备组具体可以为一个或多个网络设备。Optionally, the interfered network device group may specifically be one or more network devices.
可选地,N个第二网络设备对被干扰的网络设备组进行了远程干扰。Optionally, the N second network devices perform remote interference on the interfered network device group.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,第一信息包括第一阈值;第一条件是:第一参考信号强度超过第一阈值。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementation manners of the fourth aspect, the first information includes a first threshold; the first condition is: the strength of the first reference signal exceeds the first threshold.
基于上述技术方案,第一网络设备可以向N个第二网络设备发送第一阈值,使得N个第二网络设备可以根据参考信号强度(例如记作第一参考信号强度)以及第一阈值,来决定是否进行干扰消除。例如,参考信号强度超过第一阈值时,进行干扰消除;参考信号强度未超过第一阈值时,不进行干扰消除。因此,通过参考信号强度相对较大的网络设备来进行干扰消除,可以使得主要干扰源进行干扰消除,从而提高干扰消除的效率。Based on the above technical solution, the first network device can send the first threshold to the N second network devices, so that the N second network devices can use the reference signal strength (for example, denoted as the first reference signal strength) and the first threshold value. Decide whether to perform interference cancellation. For example, when the strength of the reference signal exceeds the first threshold, interference cancellation is performed; when the strength of the reference signal does not exceed the first threshold, interference cancellation is not performed. Therefore, by referring to network devices with relatively large signal strength to perform interference cancellation, the main interference source can perform interference cancellation, thereby improving the efficiency of interference cancellation.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,第一信息包括第二阈值;第一条件是:第一干扰强度超过第二阈值,或,受到远程干扰的强度超过第二阈值。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the first information includes a second threshold; the first condition is: the first interference intensity exceeds the second threshold, or the intensity of remote interference exceeds the second threshold.
基于上述技术方案,第一网络设备可以向N个第二网络设备发送第二阈值,使得N个第二网络设备可以根据干扰强度(例如记作第一干扰强度)或受到远程干扰的强度超过所述第二阈值,以及第二阈值,来决定是否进行干扰消除。例如,干扰强度超过第二阈值时,进行干扰消除;干扰强度未超过第二阈值时,不进行干扰消除。因此,通过干扰强度相对较大的网络设备来进行干扰消除,可以使得主要干扰源进行干扰消除,从而提高干扰消除的效率。Based on the above technical solution, the first network device can send the second threshold to the N second network devices, so that the N second network devices can exceed the total interference intensity (for example, the first interference intensity) or the intensity of the remote interference. The second threshold and the second threshold are used to determine whether to perform interference cancellation. For example, when the interference intensity exceeds the second threshold, interference cancellation is performed; when the interference intensity does not exceed the second threshold, interference cancellation is not performed. Therefore, by using network equipment with relatively large interference intensity to perform interference cancellation, the main interference source can perform interference cancellation, thereby improving the efficiency of interference cancellation.
可选地,干扰强度(例如记作第一干扰强度)可以是第二网络设备基于参考信号计算出的干扰强度。Optionally, the interference strength (for example, recorded as the first interference strength) may be the interference strength calculated by the second network device based on the reference signal.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第一网络设备发送询问信息,询问信息用于询问被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: the first network device sends inquiry information, and the inquiry information is used to inquire about the interference status of the interfered network device group.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第一网络设备接收针对询问信息的响应信息。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementation manners of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: the first network device receives response information for the inquiry information.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第一网络设备接收通知信息,通知信息用于通知所述被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态或干扰已消 除状态。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: the first network device receives notification information, and the notification information is used to notify that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the non-eliminated state or The interference has been eliminated.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第一网络设备在预设时长内接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: the first network device receives, within a preset time period, information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state .
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:当第一网络设备在预设时长内未接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息时,第一网络设备向N个第二网络设备发送用于指示第二条件的第二信息,第二条件用于N个第二网络设备判断是否要进行干扰消除。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementation manners of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: when the first network device does not receive within a preset time period indicating that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state When the first network device sends the second information indicating the second condition to the N second network devices, the second condition is used by the N second network devices to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
基于上述技术方案,在预设时长内未接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息时,第一网络设备可以确定干扰未消除,此时第一网络设备可以再给N个第二网络设备发送第二条件,使得N个第二网络设备根据第一参考信号的信息与第二条件确定是否进行干扰消除。Based on the above technical solution, when the information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state is not received within the preset time period, the first network device may determine that the interference is not eliminated, and the first network device The second condition may be sent to the N second network devices, so that the N second network devices determine whether to perform interference cancellation according to the information of the first reference signal and the second condition.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:第一网络设备接收来自被干扰的网络设备组的远程干扰强度信息;第一网络设备根据远程干扰强度信息确定被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: the first network device receives remote interference strength information from the interfered network device group; the first network device determines the interfered person according to the remote interference strength information The interfered state of the network device group.
可选地,被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰强度信息,即该被干扰网络设备组受到的远程干扰强度,可以是IoT值,或者也可以是其它远程干扰强度信息。Optionally, the remote interference strength information of the interfered network device group, that is, the remote interference strength received by the interfered network device group, may be an IoT value, or may also be other remote interference strength information.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:当第一网络设备接收到来自被干扰的网络设备组的远程干扰强度信息时,第一网络设备确定被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: when the first network device receives remote interference intensity information from the interfered network device group, the first network device determines the interfered network The interfered state of the device group is not eliminated.
基于上述方案,第一网络设备可以根据是否接收到被干扰的网络设备组的远程干扰强度信息,来确定干扰是否消除。Based on the above solution, the first network device can determine whether the interference is eliminated according to whether the remote interference intensity information of the interfered network device group is received.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:当被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态时,第一网络设备向N个第二网络设备发送用于指示第二条件的第二信息,第二条件用于N个第二网络设备判断是否要进行干扰消除。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementation manners of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: when the interfered state of the interfered network device group is in the non-eliminated state, the first network device sends the data to the N second network devices. For the second information indicating the second condition, the second condition is used for N second network devices to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
基于上述技术方案,第一网络设备确定干扰未消除时,可以再给N个第二网络设备发送第二条件,使得N个第二网络设备根据第一参考信号的信息与第二条件确定是否进行干扰消除。Based on the above technical solution, when the first network device determines that the interference is not eliminated, it can send the second condition to the N second network devices, so that the N second network devices determine whether to proceed according to the information of the first reference signal and the second condition. Interference elimination.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,第二信息包括第三阈值,以及第二条件是:第一参考信号强度超过第三阈值,第三阈值小于第一阈值;或,第二信息包括第四阈值,以及第二条件是:第一干扰强度或受到远程干扰的强度超过第四阈值,第四阈值小于第二阈值。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the second information includes a third threshold, and the second condition is: the first reference signal strength exceeds the third threshold, and the third threshold is less than the first threshold; or, The second information includes a fourth threshold, and the second condition is that the first interference intensity or the intensity of remote interference exceeds the fourth threshold, and the fourth threshold is less than the second threshold.
基于上述技术方案,第三阈值小于第一阈值,第四阈值小于第二阈值。也就是说,第一网络设备确定干扰未消除时,第一网络设备可以向N个第二网络设备发送小于第一阈值的第三阈值、小于第二阈值的第四阈值,使得N个第二网络设备可以根据第一参考信号强度与第三阈值确定是否进行干扰消除,或者,使得N个第二网络设备可以根据第一干扰强度或受到远程干扰的强度与第四阈值确定是否进行干扰消除。Based on the above technical solution, the third threshold is less than the first threshold, and the fourth threshold is less than the second threshold. That is, when the first network device determines that the interference is not eliminated, the first network device may send a third threshold that is less than the first threshold and a fourth threshold that is less than the second threshold to N second network devices, so that N second network devices The network device may determine whether to perform interference cancellation according to the first reference signal strength and the third threshold, or the N second network devices may determine whether to perform interference cancellation according to the first interference strength or the strength of remote interference received and the fourth threshold.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,当第一网络设备在预设时长内未接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息时,方法还包括:第一网络设备获取来自N个第二网络设备的第二参考信号的信息;基于N个第二网络设备的 第二参考信号的信息,第一网络设备向N个第二网络设备发送用于指示第三条件的第三信息,第三条件用于N个第二网络设备判断是否要进行干扰消除。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, when the first network device does not receive the information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state within the preset time period, The method further includes: the first network device obtains the information of the second reference signal from the N second network devices; based on the information of the second reference signal of the N second network devices, the first network device sends the information to the N second network devices Send third information for indicating a third condition, where the third condition is used by N second network devices to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
基于上述技术方案,在预设时长内未接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息时,第一网络设备可以确定干扰未消除,此时第一网络设备可以基于接收到的第二参考信息确定第三条件,使得第二网络设备可以基于接收到的第二参考信号与第三条件,判断是否要进行干扰消除。可选地,第二参考信号和第一参考信号可以相同,也可以不同,对此不作限定。Based on the above technical solution, when the information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state is not received within the preset time period, the first network device may determine that the interference is not eliminated, and the first network device The third condition may be determined based on the received second reference information, so that the second network device may determine whether to perform interference cancellation based on the received second reference signal and the third condition. Optionally, the second reference signal and the first reference signal may be the same or different, which is not limited.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,方法还包括:当被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态时,方法还包括:第一网络设备获取来自N个第二网络设备的第二参考信号的信息;基于N个第二网络设备的第二参考信号的信息,第一网络设备向N个第二网络设备发送用于指示第三条件的第三信息,第三条件用于N个第二网络设备判断是否要进行干扰消除。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementation manners of the fourth aspect, the method further includes: when the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the non-cancelled state, the method further includes: the first network device obtains information from the Nth 2. Information of the second reference signal of the network device; based on the information of the second reference signal of the N second network devices, the first network device sends third information indicating the third condition to the N second network devices, The three conditions are used for N second network devices to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
基于上述技术方案,干扰未消除时,第一网络设备可以基于接收到的第二参考信息确定第三条件,使得第二网络设备可以基于接收到的第二参考信号与第三条件,判断是否要进行干扰消除。可选地,第二参考信号和第一参考信号可以相同,也可以不同,对此不作限定。Based on the above technical solution, when the interference is not eliminated, the first network device can determine the third condition based on the received second reference information, so that the second network device can determine whether to use the received second reference signal and the third condition. Perform interference cancellation. Optionally, the second reference signal and the first reference signal may be the same or different, which is not limited.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,第三信息包括第五阈值,以及第三条件是:第二参考信号强度超过第五阈值,第五阈值小于第一阈值;或,第三信息包括第六阈值,以及第三条件是:第二干扰强度或受到远程干扰的强度超过第六阈值,第六阈值小于第二阈值。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the third information includes a fifth threshold, and the third condition is: the second reference signal strength exceeds the fifth threshold, and the fifth threshold is less than the first threshold; or, The third information includes a sixth threshold, and the third condition is: the second interference intensity or the intensity of remote interference exceeds the sixth threshold, and the sixth threshold is less than the second threshold.
基于上述技术方案,第五阈值小于第一阈值,第六阈值小于第二阈值,从而可以提高干扰消除的效率。Based on the above technical solution, the fifth threshold is smaller than the first threshold, and the sixth threshold is smaller than the second threshold, thereby improving the efficiency of interference cancellation.
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,第一网络设备为接入网设备的一个或多个集中式单元,第二网络设备为接入网设备的分布式单元;或者,第一网络设备为核心网设备或网络管理设备,第二网络设备为基站;或者,第一网络设备为N个第二网络设备中的一个或多个,第二网络设备为基站。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some implementations of the fourth aspect, the first network device is one or more centralized units of the access network device, and the second network device is a distributed unit of the access network device; or, The first network device is a core network device or a network management device, and the second network device is a base station; or, the first network device is one or more of N second network devices, and the second network device is a base station.
第五方面,提供了一种通信装置,所述装置为集中式单元,具有实现上述第一方面或第四方面的方法功能。这些功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元。In a fifth aspect, a communication device is provided. The device is a centralized unit and has the method function of the first aspect or the fourth aspect. These functions can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above functions.
第六方面,提供了一种通信装置,所述装置为核心网设备,具有实现上述第一方面或第四方面的方法功能。这些功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元。In a sixth aspect, a communication device is provided, the device is a core network device and has the method function of the first aspect or the fourth aspect. These functions can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above functions.
第七方面,提供了一种通信装置,所述装置为网络管理设备,具有实现上述第一方面或第四方面的方法功能。这些功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元。In a seventh aspect, a communication device is provided. The device is a network management device and has the function of implementing the method of the first aspect or the fourth aspect. These functions can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above functions.
第八方面,提供了一种通信装置,所述装置为基站,具有实现上述第一方面或第四方面的方法功能。这些功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元。In an eighth aspect, a communication device is provided, the device is a base station, and has the method function of the foregoing first aspect or fourth aspect. These functions can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above functions.
第九方面,提供了一种通信装置,所述装置为分布式单元,具有实现上述第二方面或 第三方面的方法功能。这些功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元。In a ninth aspect, a communication device is provided. The device is a distributed unit and has the method function of the second or third aspect. These functions can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above functions.
第十方面,提供了一种通信装置,所述装置为基站,具有实现上述第二方面或第三方面的方法功能。这些功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元。In a tenth aspect, a communication device is provided. The device is a base station and has the method function of the second aspect or the third aspect. These functions can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above functions.
第十一方面,提供了一种通信装置,该装置为集中式单元,该装置包括存储器、通信接口以及处理器,其中,该存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令,处理器与存储器、通信接口耦合,当处理器执行所述计算机程序或指令时,使该装置执行上述第一方面或第四方面的方法。In an eleventh aspect, a communication device is provided. The device is a centralized unit. The device includes a memory, a communication interface, and a processor. The memory is used to store computer programs or instructions, and the processor is coupled to the memory and the communication interface. When the processor executes the computer program or instruction, the device executes the method of the first aspect or the fourth aspect.
第十二方面,提供了一种通信装置,该装置为核心网设备,该装置包括存储器、通信接口以及处理器,其中,该存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令,处理器与存储器、通信接口耦合,当处理器执行所述计算机程序或指令时,使该装置执行上述第一方面或第四方面的方法。In a twelfth aspect, a communication device is provided. The device is a core network device. The device includes a memory, a communication interface, and a processor, where the memory is used to store computer programs or instructions, and the processor is coupled to the memory and the communication interface. When the processor executes the computer program or instruction, the device executes the method of the first aspect or the fourth aspect.
第十三方面,提供了一种通信装置,该装置为网络管理设备,该装置包括存储器、通信接口以及处理器,其中,该存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令,处理器与存储器、通信接口耦合,当处理器执行所述计算机程序或指令时,使该装置执行上述第一方面或第四方面的方法。In a thirteenth aspect, a communication device is provided. The device is a network management device. The device includes a memory, a communication interface, and a processor. The memory is used to store computer programs or instructions, and the processor is coupled to the memory and the communication interface. When the processor executes the computer program or instruction, the device executes the method of the first aspect or the fourth aspect.
第十四方面,提供了一种通信装置,该装置为基站,该装置包括存储器、通信接口以及处理器,其中,该存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令,处理器与存储器、通信接口耦合,当处理器执行所述计算机程序或指令时,使该装置执行上述第一方面或第四方面的方法。In a fourteenth aspect, a communication device is provided. The device is a base station. The device includes a memory, a communication interface, and a processor. The memory is used to store computer programs or instructions. The processor is coupled with the memory and the communication interface. When the processor executes the computer program or instruction, the device executes the method of the first aspect or the fourth aspect.
第十五方面,提供了一种通信装置,该装置为分布式单元,该装置包括存储器、通信接口以及处理器,其中,该存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令,处理器与存储器、通信接口耦合,当处理器执行所述计算机程序或指令时,使该装置执行上述第二方面或第三方面的方法。In a fifteenth aspect, a communication device is provided. The device is a distributed unit. The device includes a memory, a communication interface, and a processor. The memory is used to store computer programs or instructions, and the processor is coupled to the memory and the communication interface. When the processor executes the computer program or instruction, the device executes the method of the second aspect or the third aspect.
第十六方面,提供了一种通信装置,该装置为基站,该装置包括存储器、通信接口以及处理器,其中,该存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令,处理器与存储器、通信接口耦合,当处理器执行所述计算机程序或指令时,使该装置执行上述第二方面或第三方面的方法。According to a sixteenth aspect, a communication device is provided, which is a base station, and includes a memory, a communication interface, and a processor. The memory is used to store computer programs or instructions. The processor is coupled with the memory and the communication interface. When the processor executes the computer program or instruction, the device executes the method of the second aspect or the third aspect.
第十七方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码,当所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面或第四方面的方法。In a seventeenth aspect, a computer program product is provided, the computer program product comprising: computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the method of the first aspect or the fourth aspect.
第十八方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码,当所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第二方面或第三方面的方法。In an eighteenth aspect, a computer program product is provided, the computer program product comprising: computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the method of the second aspect or the third aspect.
第十九方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,当该计算机程序被运行时,实现上述第一方面或第四方面的方法。In a nineteenth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed, the method of the first aspect or the fourth aspect is implemented.
第二十方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,当该计算机程序被运行时,实现上述第二方面或第三方面的方法。In a twentieth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed, the method of the second aspect or the third aspect described above is implemented.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1是适用于本申请实施例的一种应用场景的示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario applicable to an embodiment of the present application;
图2是适用于本申请实施例的另一种应用场景的示意图;FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of another application scenario applicable to an embodiment of the present application;
图3是适用于本申请实施例的再一种应用场景的示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of another application scenario applicable to an embodiment of the present application;
图4是远程干扰管理的一示意性流程图;Figure 4 is a schematic flow chart of remote interference management;
图5是本申请一实施例的通信方法的示意性交互图;FIG. 5 is a schematic interaction diagram of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application;
图6是适用于本申请一实施例的通信方法的一示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a communication method applicable to an embodiment of the present application;
图7是本申请又一实施例的通信方法的示意性交互图;FIG. 7 is a schematic interaction diagram of a communication method according to another embodiment of the present application;
图8是本申请另一实施例的通信方法的示意性交互图;FIG. 8 is a schematic interaction diagram of a communication method according to another embodiment of the present application;
图9是本申请再一实施例的通信方法的示意性交互图;FIG. 9 is a schematic interaction diagram of a communication method according to still another embodiment of the present application;
图10是本申请实施例的通信装置的示意性框图;FIG. 10 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图11是本申请一实施例的通信装置的示意性结构图;FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图12是本申请又一实施例的通信装置的示意性结构图;FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to another embodiment of the present application;
图13是本申请另一实施例的通信装置的示意性结构图;FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to another embodiment of the present application;
图14是本申请再一实施例的通信装置的示意性结构图。FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to still another embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below in conjunction with the drawings.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:第五代(5th generation,5G)系统、新无线(new radio,NR)、全球移动通信(global system for mobile communications,GSM)系统、码分多址(code division multiple access,CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(general packet radio service,GPRS)、长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system,UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access,WiMAX)通信系统等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of this application can be applied to various communication systems, for example: the fifth generation (5G) system, new radio (NR), global system for mobile communications (GSM) system , Code division multiple access (CDMA) system, wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA) system, general packet radio service (GPRS), long term evolution (long term evolution) , LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (TDD), universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS), global interconnected microwave access ( worldwide interoperability for microwave access, WiMAX) communication systems, etc.
图1为适用于本申请实施例的一种应用场景的示意图。如图1所示,终端130接入到无线网络,以通过无线网络获取外网(例如因特网)的服务,或者通过无线网络与其它终端通信。该无线网络包括RAN110和核心网(CN)120,其中RAN110用于将终端130接入到无线网络,CN120用于对终端进行管理并提供与外网通信的网关。Fig. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario suitable for an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 1, the terminal 130 accesses a wireless network to obtain services from an external network (such as the Internet) through the wireless network, or communicate with other terminals through the wireless network. The wireless network includes a RAN110 and a core network (CN) 120. The RAN110 is used to connect the terminal 130 to the wireless network, and the CN120 is used to manage the terminal and provide a gateway for communication with the external network.
其中,终端,又称之为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台(mobile station,MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)等,是一种向用户提供语音/数据连通性的设备,例如,具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或车载设备等。目前,一些终端的举例为:手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device,MID)、可穿戴设备,虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程手术(remote medical surgery)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、或智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等,或者,也可以为5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中 的终端设备等,本申请实施例对此并不限定。Among them, the terminal, also known as user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), mobile terminal (MT), etc., is a device that provides voice/data connectivity to users. For example, handheld devices with wireless connectivity, or vehicle-mounted devices. At present, some examples of terminals are: mobile phones (mobile phones), tablets, notebook computers, palmtop computers, mobile internet devices (MID), wearable devices, virtual reality (VR) devices, and augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving (self-driving), wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, and smart grid (smart grid) The wireless terminal in the transportation safety (transportation safety), the wireless terminal in the smart city (smart city), or the wireless terminal in the smart home (smart home), etc., or it can be the terminal equipment in the 5G network Or terminal equipment in a public land mobile network (PLMN) that will evolve in the future, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
其中,网络设备是无线网络中的设备,例如将终端接入到无线网络的无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)节点。目前,一些RAN节点的举例为:gNB、传输接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved NodeB,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(base band unit,BBU),或无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wifi)接入点(access point,AP)等。在一种网络结构中,网络设备可以包括集中单元(centralized unit,CU)节点、或分布单元(distributed unit,DU)节点、或包括CU节点和DU节点的RAN设备。Among them, the network device is a device in a wireless network, for example, a radio access network (RAN) node that connects a terminal to the wireless network. At present, some examples of RAN nodes are: gNB, transmission reception point (TRP), evolved Node B (evolved Node B, eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (Node B) B, NB), base station controller (BSC), base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (baseband unit) , BBU), or wireless fidelity (Wifi) access point (AP), etc. In a network structure, a network device may include a centralized unit (CU) node, or a distributed unit (DU) node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node.
图2为适用于本申请实施例的又一种应用场景的示意图。Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram of another application scenario applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
接入和移动管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)实体:主要用于移动性管理和接入管理等,可以用于实现移动性管理实体(mobility management entity,MME)功能中除会话管理之外的其它功能,例如,合法监听、或接入授权(或鉴权)等功能。Access and mobility management function (AMF) entities: mainly used for mobility management and access management, etc., and can be used to implement mobility management entity (mobility management entity, MME) functions except for session management Other functions, such as lawful interception, or access authorization (or authentication) functions.
如图2所示,gNB1可以通过第一通信接口与AMF1相连,gNB2可以通过第二通信接口与AMF2相连。可选地,第一通信接口和第二通信接口可以用NG表示。本申请对第一通信接口第二通信接口的表示方式不作限定,上述通信接口也可以采用其它表式方式。可选地,gNB1、gNB2可以连接同一AMF,也可以连接不同的AMF。例如,gNB1、gNB2可以属于不同厂商,分别对应不同的AMF。As shown in Figure 2, gNB1 can be connected to AMF1 through a first communication interface, and gNB2 can be connected to AMF2 through a second communication interface. Optionally, the first communication interface and the second communication interface may be denoted by NG. The present application does not limit the representation mode of the first communication interface and the second communication interface, and the foregoing communication interface may also adopt other expression modes. Optionally, gNB1 and gNB2 can be connected to the same AMF or different AMFs. For example, gNB1 and gNB2 can belong to different manufacturers and correspond to different AMFs.
图2中的AMF也可以替换为操作维护管理(operation administration and maintenance,OAM)。gNB1可以通过第一通信接口与OAM相连,gNB2可以通过第二通信接口与OAM相连。可选地,第一通信接口可以用OM1表示,第二通信接口可以用OM2表示。本申请对第一通信接口第二通信接口的表示方式不作限定,上述通信接口也可以采用其它表式方式。可选地,gNB1、gNB2可以连接同一OAM,也可以连接不同的OAM。例如,gNB1、gNB2可以属于不同厂商,分别对应不同的OAM。The AMF in Fig. 2 can also be replaced with operation administration and maintenance (OAM). gNB1 can be connected to OAM through the first communication interface, and gNB2 can be connected to OAM through the second communication interface. Optionally, the first communication interface may be represented by OM1, and the second communication interface may be represented by OM2. The present application does not limit the representation mode of the first communication interface and the second communication interface, and the foregoing communication interface may also adopt other expression modes. Optionally, gNB1 and gNB2 can be connected to the same OAM or different OAMs. For example, gNB1 and gNB2 may belong to different manufacturers, and correspond to different OAMs.
应理解,上述AMF实体可以理解为核心网中用于实现上述功能的网元,其可以是独立的设备,也可以集成于同一设备中实现上述功能,本申请对此不做限定。It should be understood that the foregoing AMF entity may be understood as a network element used to implement the foregoing functions in the core network, and it may be an independent device or integrated in the same device to implement the foregoing functions, which is not limited in this application.
还应理解,上述的接口名称只是一个示例,具体实现中接口的名称可能为其他的名称,本申请对此不作具体限定。It should also be understood that the aforementioned interface name is only an example, and the name of the interface in a specific implementation may be other names, and this application does not specifically limit this.
还应理解,本申请实施例中的第一网络设备可以对应于上述AMF或OAM,第二网络设备可以对应于上述gNB1、gNB2。It should also be understood that the first network device in the embodiment of the present application may correspond to the foregoing AMF or OAM, and the second network device may correspond to the foregoing gNB1 and gNB2.
图3为适用于本申请实施例的另一种应用场景的示意图。Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of another application scenario suitable for an embodiment of the present application.
CU和DU之间通过通信接口相连。在本申请实施例中,CU和DU之间的通信接口可以称为F1接口,换句话说,CU与DU之间采用F1接口相连。一个CU可以与一个或多个DU相连,换句话说,多个DU可以由一个CU集中控制。或者,在具体实现时,考虑到系统的稳定性,一个DU也可以与多个CU连接。应理解,图3所示的接口名称只是一个示例,具体实现中接口的名称可能为其他的名称,本申请对此不作具体限定。CU and DU are connected through a communication interface. In the embodiment of the present application, the communication interface between the CU and the DU may be referred to as an F1 interface. In other words, the F1 interface is used to connect between the CU and the DU. One CU can be connected to one or more DUs. In other words, multiple DUs can be centrally controlled by one CU. Or, in a specific implementation, considering the stability of the system, one DU may also be connected to multiple CUs. It should be understood that the interface name shown in FIG. 3 is only an example, and the name of the interface in a specific implementation may be other names, and this application does not specifically limit this.
CU具有无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)或者部分RRC控制功能,包含 现有基站的所有的协议层功能或者部分协议层功能;比如只包含RRC功能或者部分RRC功能,或者包含RRC功能或者业务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)层功能,或者包含RRC/分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层功能,或者包含RRC/PDCP以及部分无线链路层控制协议(radio link control,RLC)层功能;或者包含RRC/PDCP/媒体介入控制(media access control,MAC)层,甚至部分或者全部物理层PHY功能,也不排除其它任何可能性。The CU has radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) or part of the RRC control function, including all the protocol layer functions or part of the protocol layer functions of the existing base station; for example, it only includes the RRC function or part of the RRC function, or includes the RRC function or service Data adaptation protocol (service data adaptation protocol, SDAP) layer functions, or include RRC/packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer functions, or include RRC/PDCP and part of the radio link layer control protocol (radio link) Control, RLC) layer functions; or include the RRC/PDCP/media access control (MAC) layer, or even part or all of the physical layer PHY functions, and other possibilities are not excluded.
DU具有除CU具有的协议层功能之外的现有基站的全部协议层功能,即RRC/SDAP/PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY的部分协议层功能单元,比如包含部分RRC功能和PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY等协议层功能,或者包含PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY等协议层功能,或者包含RLC/MAC/PHY等协议层功能或者包含部分RLC/MAC/PHY功能,或者只包含全部或者部分PHY功能;需要注意的是这里提及的各个协议层的功能可能发生变化,均在本申请保护的范围内。例如,DU具有现有基站的全部协议层功能。The DU has all the protocol layer functions of the existing base station except the protocol layer functions of the CU, that is, part of the protocol layer function units of RRC/SDAP/PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY, such as part of the RRC function and PDCP/RLC/ Protocol layer functions such as MAC/PHY, or protocol layer functions such as PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY, or protocol layer functions such as RLC/MAC/PHY, or part of RLC/MAC/PHY functions, or only all or part of PHY Function; It should be noted that the functions of each protocol layer mentioned here may change, and they are all within the protection scope of this application. For example, DU has all the protocol layer functions of existing base stations.
示例的,PDCP及以上协议层的功能设置在CU,PDCP以下的协议层,例如RLC和MAC等的功能设置在DU。当然,这种协议层的划分仅仅是一种举例,还可以在其它协议层划分,例如在RLC层划分,将RLC层及以上协议层的功能设置在CU,RLC层以下协议层的功能设置在DU。或者,在某个协议层中划分,例如将RLC层的部分功能和RLC层以上的协议层的功能设置在CU,将RLC层的剩余功能和RLC层以下的协议层的功能设置在DU。此外,也可以按其它方式划分,例如按时延划分,将处理时间需要满足时延要求的功能设置在DU,不需要满足该时延要求的功能设置在CU。此外,射频装置可以拉远,不放在DU中,也可以集成在DU中,或者部分拉远部分集成在DU中,在此不作任何限制。For example, the functions of the PDCP and above protocol layers are set in the CU, and the functions of the protocol layers below PDCP, such as RLC and MAC, are set in the DU. Of course, this type of protocol layer division is just an example, it can also be divided in other protocol layers, for example, in the RLC layer, the functions of the RLC layer and above protocol layers are set in the CU, and the functions of the protocol layers below the RLC layer are set in DU. Or, in a certain protocol layer, for example, part of the functions of the RLC layer and the functions of the protocol layer above the RLC layer are set in the CU, and the remaining functions of the RLC layer and the functions of the protocol layer below the RLC layer are set in the DU. In addition, it can also be divided in other ways, for example, by time delay, and functions that need to meet the delay requirement for processing time are set in the DU, and functions that do not need to meet the delay requirement are set in the CU. In addition, the radio frequency device can be remote, not placed in the DU, can also be integrated in the DU, or part of the remote part is integrated in the DU, and there is no restriction here.
又例如,在5G网络中,新型的中继节点也有新的技术进展,例如,中继节点仅部署有层2(例如,包括无线链路控制(resource link control,RLC)层、MAC层等)和层1(例如,包括PHY层)的协议栈架构,而未部署层2以上的全部协议栈功能,例如全部RRC层功能。因此,宿主基站产生的数据或信令,需要由中继节点转发给终端设备。For another example, in 5G networks, new types of relay nodes also have new technological developments. For example, relay nodes are only deployed with layer 2 (e.g., including radio link control (resource link control, RLC) layer, MAC layer, etc.) And the protocol stack architecture of layer 1 (for example, including the PHY layer), but not all protocol stack functions above layer 2, such as all RRC layer functions. Therefore, the data or signaling generated by the donor base station needs to be forwarded by the relay node to the terminal device.
应理解,本申请实施例中的第一网络设备可以对应于CU-DU架构中的CU,也可以对应于上述宿主基站,第二网络设备可以对应于CU-DU架构中的DU,也可以对应于上述中继节点。It should be understood that the first network device in the embodiment of the present application may correspond to the CU in the CU-DU architecture, or may correspond to the above-mentioned donor base station, and the second network device may correspond to the DU in the CU-DU architecture, or may correspond to In the above-mentioned relay node.
还应理解,上述图1至图3仅是示例性说明,不应对本申请构成任何限定。It should also be understood that the foregoing Figs. 1 to 3 are only exemplary descriptions and should not constitute any limitation to the application.
为了便于理解本申请实施例,下面首先简单介绍本申请实施例涉及的几个概念。To facilitate the understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the following briefly introduces several concepts involved in the embodiments of the present application.
1、远程干扰(remote interference,RI)1. Remote interference (RI)
在特殊的大气条件下,电磁波能在大气层中超折射传播,就像在波导内向前传播一样,这称为大气波导现象。由于大气波导现象的原因,一定区域内的网络设备(例如gNB)可能会受到来自于相隔很远的一定区域内网络设备(例如gNB)信号产生的干扰。例如,在时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)场景下,区域A的网络设备下行信号由于大气波导现象传播到相隔很远的区域B。区域A到区域B的距离可达300公里。由于区域A的网络设备下行信号经历远距离传输时延到达区域B时,区域B可能正在进行上行传输,这时区域A的信号会造成对区域B的干扰。这种干扰可以称为远程干扰。Under special atmospheric conditions, electromagnetic waves can propagate in the atmosphere by super-refraction, just like propagating forward in a waveguide. This is called an atmospheric duct phenomenon. Due to the atmospheric duct phenomenon, network devices (such as gNB) in a certain area may be interfered by signals from network devices (such as gNB) in a certain area that are far apart. For example, in a time division duplex (TDD) scenario, the downlink signal of the network device in area A propagates to area B, which is far apart due to the atmospheric duct phenomenon. The distance from area A to area B can reach 300 kilometers. When the downlink signal of the network equipment in the area A reaches the area B after a long-distance transmission delay, the area B may be undergoing uplink transmission. At this time, the signal in the area A will cause interference to the area B. This interference can be called long-range interference.
在下文实施例中,为区分,将受到干扰的一个或多个网络设备记为被干扰网络设备组, 将干扰的一个或多个网络设备记为干扰网络设备组。应理解,被干扰网络设备组具体可以为一个或多个网络设备,干扰网络设备组具体可以为一个或多个网络设备。例如区域B内的受到区域A信号的干扰的网络设备记为被干扰网络设备组,区域A内干扰被干扰网络设备的网络设备记为干扰网络设备组。In the following embodiments, to distinguish, one or more network devices that are interfered are recorded as the interfered network device group, and one or more network devices that are interfered are recorded as the interfered network device group. It should be understood that the interfered network device group may specifically be one or more network devices, and the interfered network device group may specifically be one or more network devices. For example, a network device in area B that is interfered by a signal in area A is recorded as the interfered network device group, and a network device in area A that interferes with the interfered network device is recorded as an interfering network device group.
应理解,被干扰网络设备组、干扰网络设备组仅是为区分作的命名,并不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定。It should be understood that the interfered network device group and the interfered network device group are only named for distinguishing, and do not limit the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application.
其中,被干扰网络设备组可能具有CU-DU架构,即被干扰网络设备组具体可以为一个或多个DU,该一个或多个DU可以由一个CU集中控制。干扰网络设备组可能具有CU-DU架构,即干扰网络设备组具体可以为一个或多个DU,该一个或多个DU可以由一个CU集中控制。Among them, the interfered network device group may have a CU-DU architecture, that is, the interfered network device group may specifically be one or more DUs, and the one or more DUs may be centrally controlled by one CU. The interfering network device group may have a CU-DU architecture, that is, the interfering network device group may specifically be one or more DUs, and the one or more DUs may be centrally controlled by one CU.
2、参考信号(reference signal,RS)2. Reference signal (RS)
受到远程干扰的被干扰网络设备组可以通过发送参考信号的方式来通知干扰网络设备组产生了远程干扰。例如,被干扰网络设备组可以通过空口持续发送特征参考信号序列,来通知干扰网络设备组产生了远程干扰。该参考信号中携带被干扰网络设备组的标识信息,从而使得干扰网络设备组知道被干扰网络设备组的地址。The interfered network device group that is subject to remote interference may notify the interfering network device group that the remote interference has occurred by sending a reference signal. For example, the interfered network device group may continuously send the characteristic reference signal sequence through the air interface to notify the interfering network device group that the remote interference has occurred. The reference signal carries identification information of the interfered network device group, so that the interfered network device group knows the address of the interfered network device group.
3、干扰热燥比(interference over thermal,IoT)3. Interference over thermal (IoT)
干扰热燥比可以用于衡量网络设备受到干扰的大小,一般采用‘比热燥大几倍’的方式描述干扰。网络设备在检测上行远程干扰的过程中,通常以IoT为主要测量指标来判断上行远程干扰情况。The interference heat and dryness ratio can be used to measure the amount of interference that the network equipment is subjected to. Generally, the interference is described as'several times larger than heat and dryness. In the process of detecting uplink long-range interference, network equipment usually uses IoT as the main measurement index to judge the situation of uplink long-range interference.
4、远程干扰管理(remote interference management,RIM)4. Remote interference management (remote interference management, RIM)
远程干扰管理能够解决远程干扰问题。图4示出了远程干扰管理的一种流程示意图。Remote interference management can solve the problem of remote interference. Figure 4 shows a schematic flow diagram of remote interference management.
S410,干扰网络设备组对被干扰网络设备组造成了远程干扰。S410: The interfering network device group causes remote interference to the interfered network device group.
S420,被干扰网络设备组发送参考信号,相应地,干扰网络设备组接收来自被干扰网络设备组的参考信号。S420: The interfered network device group sends the reference signal, and accordingly, the interfered network device group receives the reference signal from the interfered network device group.
干扰网络设备组可以一直监控参考信号,当收到参考信号后,干扰网络设备组可以确定自身对被干扰网络设备组产生了干扰。The interfering network device group can always monitor the reference signal. After receiving the reference signal, the interfering network device group can determine that it has caused interference to the interfered network device group.
S430,干扰网络设备组实施消除远程干扰的措施,并向被干扰网络设备组发送第一通知消息。S430: The interfering network device group implements measures to eliminate remote interference, and sends a first notification message to the interfered network device group.
该第一通知消息用于通知干扰网络设备组收到被干扰网络设备组的参考信号。The first notification message is used to notify the interfering network device group that the reference signal of the interfered network device group has been received.
S440,干扰网络设备组结束实施消除远程干扰的措施,并向被干扰网络设备组发送第二通知消息。S440: The interfering network device group ends implementing measures to eliminate remote interference, and sends a second notification message to the interfered network device group.
该第二通知消息用于通知参考信号消失,且干扰网络设备组可以停止监控参考信号。换句话说,干扰网络设备组在接收不到参考信号后,结束实施消除远程干扰的措施,并可以向被干扰网络设备组发送用于通知参考信号消失的第二通知消息。The second notification message is used to notify that the reference signal disappears, and the interfering network device group can stop monitoring the reference signal. In other words, after failing to receive the reference signal, the interfering network device group ends implementing measures to eliminate remote interference, and may send a second notification message for notifying the disappearance of the reference signal to the interfered network device group.
应理解,上述第一通信消息和第二通知消息仅是为区分作的命名,不对本申请造成限定。It should be understood that the above-mentioned first communication message and second notification message are merely naming for distinguishing, and do not limit the application.
S450,被干扰网络设备组停止发送参考信号。S450: The interfered network device group stops sending the reference signal.
一种方式中,干扰网络设备组在收到参考信号后会单独采取措施来消除远程干扰,换句话说,干扰网络设备组获知自身对被干扰网络设备组产生了干扰,则单独采取措施来消 除远程干扰。In one method, the interfering network device group will take separate measures to eliminate the remote interference after receiving the reference signal. In other words, the interfering network device group will take separate measures to eliminate the interference when it learns that it has caused interference to the interfered network device group. Remote interference.
如果干扰网络设备组单独采取措施来消除远程干扰,会造成干扰网络设备组处的所有网络设备或者过多的网络设备参与消除远程干扰,造成了干扰网络设备组处不必要的小区性能损失。If the interfering network device group takes separate measures to eliminate remote interference, it will cause all network devices in the interfering network device group or too many network devices to participate in the elimination of remote interference, resulting in unnecessary cell performance loss at the interfering network device group.
鉴于此,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,通过CU、AMF或OAM等协调或者网络设备自身决定是否进行干扰消除,使得干扰网络设备组处较少的、或最有效的网络设备进行干扰消除,从而不仅可以实现干扰消除,而且可以降低对干扰网络设备组处通信性能的影响。In view of this, the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, through the coordination of CU, AMF, or OAM, or the network device itself decides whether to perform interference cancellation, so that the network device with fewer or most effective interference network devices in the group of network devices performs interference cancellation In this way, not only can the interference be eliminated, but also the influence on the communication performance of the interfering network device group can be reduced.
为了便于理解本申请实施例,在介绍本申请实施例之前,先作出以下几点说明。In order to facilitate the understanding of the embodiments of the present application, before introducing the embodiments of the present application, the following descriptions are made.
本申请实施例中,“预先定义”可以通过在设备(例如,包括终端设备和/或网络设备)中预先保存相应的代码、表格或其他可用于指示相关信息的方式来实现,本申请对于其具体的实现方式不做限定。比如预先定义可以是指协议中定义的。In the embodiments of this application, "pre-definition" can be realized by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other methods that can be used to indicate related information in the device (for example, including terminal devices and/or network devices). The specific implementation method is not limited. For example, pre-defined may refer to the definition in the agreement.
本申请实施例中涉及的“保存”,可以是指的保存在一个或者多个存储器中。所述一个或者多个存储器,可以是单独的设置,也可以是集成在编码器或者译码器,处理器、或通信装置中。所述一个或者多个存储器,也可以是一部分单独设置,一部分集成在译码器、处理器、或通信装置中。存储器的类型可以是任意形式的存储介质,本申请并不对此限定。The "saving" mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may refer to storing in one or more memories. The one or more memories may be provided separately, or integrated in an encoder or decoder, a processor, or a communication device. The one or more memories may also be partly provided separately, and partly integrated in the decoder, processor, or communication device. The type of the memory may be any form of storage medium, which is not limited in this application.
本申请实施例中,“协议”可以指通信领域的标准协议,例如可以包括LTE协议、NR协议或应用于未来的通信系统中的相关协议,本申请对此不做限定。In the embodiments of the present application, "protocol" may refer to a standard protocol in the communication field, for example, it may include an LTE protocol, an NR protocol, or a related protocol applied to a future communication system, which is not limited in this application.
本申请实施例中,第一、第二等仅为便于区分不同的对象,而不应对本申请构成任何限定。In the embodiments of the present application, the first, the second, etc. are only convenient for distinguishing different objects, and should not constitute any limitation to the present application.
本申请实施例中,“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“多个”是指两个或两个以上,其它量词与之类似。此外,对于单数形式“a”,“an”和“the”出现的元素(element),除非上下文另有明确规定,否则其不意味着“一个或仅一个”,而是意味着“一个或多于一个”。例如,“a device”意味着对一个或多个这样的device。再者,至少一个(at least one of).......”意味着后续关联对象中的一个或任意组合,例如“A,B和C中的至少一个”包括A,B,C,AB,AC,BC,或ABC。In the embodiments of the present application, "and/or" describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three types of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone These three situations. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects are in an "or" relationship. "Multiple" refers to two or more, and other measure words are similar. In addition, for elements in the singular form "a", "an" and "the", unless the context clearly dictates otherwise, it does not mean "one or only one", but means "one or more At one". For example, "a device" means to one or more such devices. Furthermore, at least one (at least one of)..." means one or any combination of subsequent associated objects, for example, "at least one of A, B and C" includes A, B, C, AB, AC, BC, or ABC.
图5是本申请实施例的通信方法500的流程示意图。该方法涉及集中式单元和分布式单元。如图5所示,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,该方法包括:FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method 500 according to an embodiment of the present application. The method involves centralized units and distributed units. As shown in Figure 5, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which includes:
S510,第一DU和第二DU接收来自被干扰网络设备组的参考信号。S510: The first DU and the second DU receive reference signals from the interfered network device group.
N个DU接收来自被干扰网络设备组的参考信号,该N个DU均对被干扰网络设备组造成了远程干扰,也就是说,被干扰网络设备组通过空口发送参考信号,该N个DU接收到该参考信号,其中,N为大于1或等于1的整数。图5中为便于说明,仅列举了第一DU和第二DU进行说明,第一DU和第二DU属于N个DU中的任意两个DU。该N个DU可以由一个CU控制。N DUs receive the reference signal from the interfered network equipment group. The N DUs cause long-range interference to the interfered network equipment group. That is to say, the interfered network equipment group sends the reference signal through the air interface, and the N DUs receive To the reference signal, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1. For ease of description, FIG. 5 only lists the first DU and the second DU for description, and the first DU and the second DU belong to any two DUs among the N DUs. The N DUs can be controlled by one CU.
其中,被干扰网络设备组具体可以为K个网络设备,该K个网络设备均受到了N个DU的远程干扰;或者,被干扰网络设备组具有CU-DU架构,即被干扰网络设备组具体可以为K个DU,K为大于1或等于1的整数。Among them, the interfered network device group may specifically be K network devices, and the K network devices are all subject to the remote interference of N DUs; or, the interfered network device group has a CU-DU architecture, that is, the interfered network device group is specific There can be K DUs, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
被干扰网络设备组发送参考信号时,可以在参考信号中携带被干扰网络设备组的标识(identity,ID),该N个DU可以解析出该标识。When the interfered network device group sends the reference signal, the reference signal may carry the identity (ID) of the interfered network device group, and the N DUs can parse the identity.
通过使得N个DU获知被干扰网络设备组的标识,可以使得N个DU获知自身对哪些网络设备造成了远程干扰。By enabling the N DUs to learn the identity of the interfered network device group, the N DUs can learn which network devices they have caused remote interference to.
可选地,N个DU接收来自被干扰网络设备组的参考信号后,可以基于该参考信号计算干扰强度。Optionally, after the N DUs receive the reference signal from the interfered network device group, the interference intensity may be calculated based on the reference signal.
其中,干扰强度例如可以包括:基于参考信号计算出的受到来自被干扰网络设备组的干扰强度信息;和/或,该N个DU本身受到来自被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰而测到的远程干扰强度的测量值,如IoT值。下文均用干扰强度表示。Wherein, the interference intensity may include, for example, the interference intensity information calculated based on the reference signal from the interfered network device group; and/or, the N DUs themselves received remote interference from the interfered network device group and the remote The measured value of the interference intensity, such as the IoT value. The following are all expressed by interference intensity.
结合图3可知,DU可以通过F1接口向CU上报信息。在本申请实施例中,该N个DU可以向CU上报参考信号的信息,以便CU能够选择进行干扰消除的DU,避免该N个DU单独进行干扰消除,造成该N个DU处不必要的通信性能损失。As shown in Figure 3, the DU can report information to the CU through the F1 interface. In the embodiment of the present application, the N DUs can report the information of the reference signal to the CU, so that the CU can select the DU for interference cancellation, so as to prevent the N DUs from performing interference cancellation alone, causing unnecessary communication at the N DUs Performance loss.
应理解,在本申请实施例中,进行干扰消除,也可以称为进行远程干扰消除,均是为了消除N个DU对被干扰网络设备组造成的远程干扰。下文为简洁,均称为进行干扰消除。It should be understood that, in the embodiments of the present application, performing interference cancellation, which may also be referred to as performing remote interference cancellation, is to eliminate the remote interference caused by N DUs to the interfered network device group. The following is succinct, all referred to as performing interference cancellation.
S520、第一DU和第二DU向CU上报参考信号的信息。S520: The first DU and the second DU report the information of the reference signal to the CU.
N个DU向CU上报参考信号的信息,图5中为便于说明,仅列举了第一DU和第二DU作为示例性说明。The N DUs report the information of the reference signal to the CU. In FIG. 5, for convenience of description, only the first DU and the second DU are listed as an example.
其中,N个DU上报的参考信号的信息中携带被干扰网络设备组的标识,从而CU通过携带的被干扰网络设备组的标识,可以确定携带相同标识的DU有哪些,换句话说,可以确定干扰相同网络设备的DU有哪些。Among them, the reference signal information reported by the N DUs carries the identity of the interfered network device group, so that the CU can determine which DU carries the same identity by carrying the identity of the interfered network device group, in other words, it can determine What are the DUs that interfere with the same network equipment?
可选地,N个DU上报的参考信号的信息中包括:参考信号强度和/或干扰强度。Optionally, the reference signal information reported by the N DUs includes: reference signal strength and/or interference strength.
其中,参考信号强度例如可以用参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power,RSRP)表示。Wherein, the reference signal strength may be represented by, for example, reference signal receiving power (RSRP).
其中,干扰强度例如可以包括:基于参考信号计算出的受到被干扰网络设备组的干扰强度信息,和/或,N个DU本身受到来自被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰而测到的远程干扰强度的测量值。具体地,参考S510中的描述,不再赘述。The interference intensity may include, for example, the interference intensity information calculated based on the reference signal of the interfered network device group, and/or the measured remote interference strength of the N DUs themselves subjected to the remote interference from the interfered network device group Measured value. Specifically, refer to the description in S510, which will not be repeated.
N个DU上报的参考信号的信息可以通过F1AP消息传送,也就是说,N个DU通过F1AP消息向CU发送参考信号的信息。The information of the reference signal reported by the N DUs may be transmitted through the F1AP message, that is, the N DUs send the information of the reference signal to the CU through the F1AP message.
N个DU上报的参考信号的信息,可以携带在已有消息中。或者,针对N个DU上报的参考信号的信息,也可以定义新的class 2 element procedure,例如可以用RIM RS Indication来表示,该RIM RS Indication中包含参考信号的信息,例如可以用RIM RS INDICATION message来表示,如下表1所示。应理解,RIM RS Indication、RIM RS INDICATION message仅是一种命名方式,不做限定。The information of the reference signal reported by the N DUs may be carried in an existing message. Or, for the information of the reference signal reported by N DUs, a new class 2 element procedure can also be defined, for example, it can be represented by RIM RS Indication, and the RIM RS Indication contains the information of the reference signal, for example, RIM RS INDICATION message , As shown in Table 1 below. It should be understood that RIM RS Indication and RIM RS INDICATION message are only a naming method and are not limited.
表1Table 1
Elementary ProcedureElementary Procedure MessageMessage
RIM RS IndicationRIM RS Indication RIM RS INDICATION messageRIM RS INDICATION message
CU接收到N个DU上报的参考信号的信息后,可以选择进行干扰消除的DU。After the CU receives the reference signal information reported by the N DUs, it can select the DU for interference cancellation.
S530、CU选择进行干扰消除的DU。S530. The CU selects a DU for interference cancellation.
N个DU向CU上报参考信号的信息,该上报的参考信号的信息中携带的被干扰网络设备组的标识可能相同,也可能不相同。CU分别在携带相同标识的DU中选择一个或多个DU进行干扰消除。The N DUs report the information of the reference signal to the CU, and the identity of the interfered network device group carried in the reported information of the reference signal may be the same or different. The CU respectively selects one or more DUs from the DUs carrying the same identifier for interference cancellation.
CU可以通过以下任一实现方式,选择进行干扰消除的DU。The CU can select a DU for interference cancellation through any of the following implementation methods.
实现方式1,CU可以基于当前上报的参考信号的信息,分别在携带相同标识的DU中选择进行干扰消除的DU。Implementation manner 1: The CU may select DUs for interference cancellation among DUs carrying the same identifier based on the information of the currently reported reference signal.
以N个DU携带的标识相同为例进行示例性说明。CU在上报的N个DU中任意选择N1个DU进行干扰消除,其中,N1小于N,且N1为大于1或等于1的整数。Take the same identifier carried by N DUs as an example for illustrative description. The CU arbitrarily selects N1 DUs among the reported N DUs for interference cancellation, where N1 is less than N, and N1 is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1.
实现方式2,CU可以基于当前上报的参考信号的信息,结合历史干扰消除过程(例如,上一次干扰消除过程),分别在携带相同标识的DU中选择进行干扰消除的DU。Implementation manner 2: The CU may select DUs for interference cancellation among DUs carrying the same identifier in combination with the historical interference cancellation process (for example, the last interference cancellation process) based on the information of the currently reported reference signal.
以N个DU携带的标识相同为例进行示例性说明。假设在历史干扰消除过程中,N个DU中的N2个DU进行了干扰消除,则CU在上报的N个DU中选择N2个DU进行干扰消除,其中,N2小于或等于N,且N2为大于1或等于1的整数。其中,CU选择的DU与历史干扰消除过程中的DU可以完全相同,也可以部分相同,也可以完全不同,对此不作限定。Take the same identifier carried by N DUs as an example for illustrative description. Assuming that in the historical interference cancellation process, N2 DUs out of N DUs are used for interference cancellation, the CU selects N2 DUs from the reported N DUs for interference cancellation, where N2 is less than or equal to N, and N2 is greater than 1 or an integer equal to 1. Among them, the DU selected by the CU and the DU in the historical interference cancellation process may be completely the same, partly the same, or completely different, which is not limited.
实现方式3,CU可以基于当前上报的参考信号的信息,结合历史上报的参考信号的信息,分别在携带相同标识的DU中选择进行干扰消除的DU。Implementation manner 3, the CU may select DUs for interference cancellation among DUs carrying the same identifier based on the information of the currently reported reference signal and combined with the information of the historically reported reference signal.
以N个DU携带的标识相同为例进行示例性说明。例如,历史上报的参考信息中包括参考信号强度和/或干扰强度,CU可以结合历史上报的参考信号的信息,确定参考信号强度和/或干扰强度,基于该参考信号强度和/或干扰强度,从N个DU中选择进行干扰消除的DU。Take the same identifier carried by N DUs as an example for illustrative description. For example, the historically reported reference information includes the reference signal strength and/or interference strength, and the CU may combine the historically reported reference signal information to determine the reference signal strength and/or interference strength, based on the reference signal strength and/or interference strength, Select a DU for interference cancellation from N DUs.
实现方式4,CU可以基于当前上报的参考信号的信息中包括的参考信号强度和/或干扰强度,分别在携带相同标识的DU中选择进行干扰消除的DU。Implementation manner 4, based on the reference signal strength and/or interference strength included in the currently reported reference signal information, the CU may select DUs for interference cancellation from DUs carrying the same identifier.
以N个DU携带的标识相同为例进行示例性说明。例如,N个DU上报的参考信号的信息中包括参考信号强度和/或干扰强度,CU可以基于该参考信号强度和/或干扰强度,从N个DU中选择进行干扰消除的DU。Take the same identifier carried by N DUs as an example for illustrative description. For example, the reference signal information reported by the N DUs includes reference signal strength and/or interference strength, and the CU may select a DU for interference cancellation from the N DUs based on the reference signal strength and/or interference strength.
上述仅示例性地列举了几种可能的实现方式,本申请实施例并未限定于此,任何可以使得CU从N个DU中选择一个或多个DU进行干扰消除的实现方式都落入本申请实施例的保护范围。The foregoing only exemplarily lists several possible implementations, and the embodiments of this application are not limited to this. Any implementation that enables the CU to select one or more DUs from N DUs for interference cancellation falls into this application. The scope of protection of the embodiment.
在上述几种实现方式中,当CU基于参考信号强度和/或干扰强度选择目标DU时,可以通过以下任意一种方法选择:In the above several implementation manners, when the CU selects the target DU based on the reference signal strength and/or interference strength, it can be selected by any of the following methods:
方法1,选择参考信号强度较大的; Method 1. Choose the one with higher reference signal strength;
方法2,选择参考信号强度超过第一阈值的;Method 2: Select the reference signal whose strength exceeds the first threshold;
方法3,选择干扰强度较大的;Method 3, choose the one with greater interference intensity;
方法4,选择干扰强度超过第二阈值的。Method 4, select the interference intensity that exceeds the second threshold.
关于上述方法1至方法4,在后面具体介绍。The above methods 1 to 4 will be described in detail later.
CU选择进行干扰消除的DU后,向该进行干扰消除的DU发送指示信息,用于指示该DU进行干扰消除。仍以第一DU和第二DU为例,假设S530中,CU选择第一DU进行干扰消除,方法500还包括S540:After selecting a DU for interference cancellation, the CU sends instruction information to the DU for interference cancellation, which is used to instruct the DU to perform interference cancellation. Still taking the first DU and the second DU as an example, assuming that in S530, the CU selects the first DU for interference cancellation, the method 500 further includes S540:
S540,CU向第一DU发送指示信息,该指示信息用于指示第一DU进行干扰消除。S540. The CU sends indication information to the first DU, where the indication information is used to instruct the first DU to perform interference cancellation.
图5中为便于说明,仅列举了CU向第一DU发送用于指示进行干扰消息的指示信息。应理解,在S540中,CU向选择出的需要进行干扰消除的每个DU发送指示信息。For ease of description, FIG. 5 only lists the indication information that the CU sends to the first DU to indicate the interference message. It should be understood that, in S540, the CU sends indication information to each DU selected for interference cancellation.
DU进行干扰消除的方法有很多,对此本申请不作限定。例如,DU可以通过减少下行功率来消除或降低对被干扰网络设备组造成的远程干扰;又如,DU可以通过在产生干扰的频域(例如频带等等)、时域(例如子帧等等)、或空域(例如波束或波束集等)上停止发送数据等等,来消除或降低对被干扰网络设备组造成的远程干扰。应理解,任何可以减少N个DU对被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰所采取的措施都落入本申请的保护范围。There are many methods for DU interference cancellation, which are not limited in this application. For example, the DU can eliminate or reduce the long-range interference caused to the interfered network equipment group by reducing the downlink power; another example, the DU can be used in the frequency domain (such as frequency band, etc.) and time domain (such as subframes, etc.) where interference is generated. ), or in the airspace (such as beams or beam sets, etc.) to stop sending data, etc., to eliminate or reduce the long-range interference caused to the interfered network device group. It should be understood that any measures that can be taken to reduce the remote interference of N DUs to the interfered network device group fall within the protection scope of this application.
可选地,CU还可以确定N个DU对被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰是否消除。Optionally, the CU may also determine whether the remote interference of the N DUs to the interfered network device group is eliminated.
S550、CU确定远程干扰是否消除。S550. The CU determines whether the remote interference is eliminated.
在本申请实施例中,远程干扰是否消除,换句话说,远程干扰是否还存在,换句话说,干扰是否消除或干扰是否还存在。远程干扰是否消除可以表示远程干扰是否完全消除;或者,也可以表示干扰强度是否超过预设阈值;或者,也可以表示干扰强度是否降低;或者,也可以表示干扰下降程度是否大于预设值等等。对此,本申请实施例不作限定,下文均用远程干扰是否消除来表示。其中,预设阈值或预设值可以是预先规定的阈值,例如协议预先规定的,或者网络设备预先配置的阈值或者预设值,对此,不作限定。In the embodiments of the present application, whether the remote interference is eliminated, in other words, whether the remote interference still exists, in other words, whether the interference is eliminated or whether the interference still exists. Whether the remote interference is eliminated can indicate whether the remote interference is completely eliminated; or, it can also indicate whether the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold; or, it can also indicate whether the interference intensity is reduced; or, it can also indicate whether the degree of interference reduction is greater than a preset value, etc. . In this regard, the embodiment of the present application does not limit it, and the following is used to indicate whether the remote interference is eliminated. The preset threshold or preset value may be a preset threshold, for example, a predetermined threshold or a preset value configured by a network device, which is not limited.
相应地,在本申请实施例中,远程干扰已消除,换句话说干扰已消除,可以表示远程干扰已完全消除,或者,也可以表示干扰强度未超过预设阈值,或者,也可以表示干扰强度已降低,或者,也可以表示干扰强度下降程度超过预设值等等。对此,本申请实施例不作限定,下文均用远程干扰已消除来表示。Correspondingly, in the embodiments of the present application, the remote interference has been eliminated, in other words the interference has been eliminated, it can mean that the remote interference has been completely eliminated, or it can also mean that the interference intensity does not exceed the preset threshold, or it can also mean the interference intensity Already reduced, or, it can also mean that the degree of interference intensity has decreased beyond a preset value, and so on. In this regard, the embodiment of the present application does not make a limitation, and the following is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated.
相应地,在本申请实施例中,远程干扰未消除,换句话说干扰未消除,可以表示远程干扰未完全消除,或者,也可以表示干扰强度超过预设阈值,或者,也可以表示干扰强度没有变化或者干扰强度上升,或者,也可以表示干扰强度下降程度未超过预设值等等。对此,本申请实施例不作限定,下文均用远程干扰未消除来表示。Correspondingly, in the embodiments of the present application, the remote interference is not eliminated, in other words, the interference is not eliminated, which may indicate that the remote interference is not completely eliminated, or it may indicate that the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold, or it may also indicate that the interference intensity is not eliminated. Change or increase in interference intensity, or it can also mean that the degree of interference intensity decline does not exceed a preset value, and so on. In this regard, the embodiment of the present application does not make a limitation, and the following is used to indicate that the remote interference is not eliminated.
一种可能的情况,CU确定远程干扰消除。In a possible situation, the CU determines remote interference cancellation.
在该情况下,进行干扰消除的DU保持当前配置,或者进行干扰消除的DU保持当前的通信资源配置,直到RIM流程结束。关于RIM流程,参考图4的描述,此处不再赘述。In this case, the DU performing interference cancellation keeps the current configuration, or the DU performing interference cancellation keeps the current communication resource configuration until the RIM process ends. Regarding the RIM process, refer to the description of FIG. 4, which will not be repeated here.
又一种可能的情况,CU确定远程干扰未消除。In another possible situation, the CU determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
在该情况下,CU可以执行S530,即CU在剩余DU中选择一个或多个DU来继续进行干扰消除,然后还可以继续执行S540、S550直到确定远程干扰已消除。其中,剩余DU为N个DU中没有进行干扰消除的DU,如第二DU。In this case, the CU can perform S530, that is, the CU selects one or more DUs from the remaining DUs to continue interference cancellation, and then can continue to perform S540 and S550 until it is determined that the remote interference has been eliminated. Among them, the remaining DU is a DU without interference cancellation among the N DUs, such as the second DU.
或者,在该情况下,N个DU可以执行S510,即重新接收参考信号,然后再上报给CU,CU可以执行S530,即CU在剩余DU中或者上报的全部DU中选择一个或多个DU来继续进行干扰消除,然后还可以继续执行S540、S550直到确定远程干扰已消除。Or, in this case, N DUs can perform S510, that is, re-receive the reference signal, and then report to the CU, and the CU can perform S530, that is, the CU selects one or more DUs from the remaining DUs or all the reported DUs. Continue to perform interference cancellation, and then continue to perform S540 and S550 until it is determined that the remote interference has been eliminated.
或者,在该情况下,进行干扰消除的DU还可以进一步降低下行功率或者停止通信,直到CU确定远程干扰已消除。Or, in this case, the DU performing interference cancellation may further reduce downlink power or stop communication until the CU determines that the remote interference has been eliminated.
下文中,关于CU确定远程干扰消除或CU确定远程干扰未消除后的动作,不再赘述。In the following, the actions after the CU determines that the remote interference is eliminated or the CU determines that the remote interference is not eliminated will not be repeated.
CU可以通过以下任一方式,来确定远程干扰是否消除。The CU can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated by any of the following methods.
方式A:CU询问被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰状态,并接收被干扰网络设备组回复 的响应消息;Method A: CU inquires about the remote interference status of the interfered network device group, and receives the response message from the interfered network device group;
方式B:CU询问被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰状态,根据在预设时长内是否收到回复的响应消息来确定远程干扰是否消除;Method B: The CU asks about the remote interference status of the interfered network equipment group, and determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the response message is received within a preset time period;
方式C:CU根据在预设时长内是否收到通知消息来确定远程干扰是否消除;Method C: The CU determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the notification message is received within the preset time period;
方式D:CU根据被干扰网络设备组发送的远程干扰强度信息来确定远程干扰是否消除。Method D: The CU determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to the remote interference intensity information sent by the interfered network device group.
下面详细介绍上述方式A、方式B、方式C、方式D。The following describes the above-mentioned method A, method B, method C, and method D in detail.
方式A:CU询问被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰状态,并接收被干扰网络设备组回复的响应消息。Method A: The CU inquires about the remote interference status of the interfered network device group, and receives a response message from the interfered network device group.
基于被干扰网络设备组的标识,CU或者N个DU可以向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息,该询问消息用于询问N个DU对被干扰网络设备组造成的远程干扰是否消除,例如,通过回退(backhaul)信令向被干扰网络设备组询问远程干扰状态。其中,N个DU向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息,可以理解为,N个DU内的任意一个或多个DU向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息;或者,也可以理解为,N个DU内的具有协调功能的DU向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息;或者,也可以理解为,N个DU内的具有代表性的DU向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息;或者,也可以理解为,进行干扰消除的DU中的一个或多个DU向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息。Based on the identity of the interfered network device group, the CU or N DUs can send an inquiry message to the interfered network device group. The inquiry message is used to inquire whether the remote interference caused by the N DU to the interfered network device group is eliminated, for example, by Backhaul signaling inquires about the remote interference status to the interfered network equipment group. Among them, N DUs send inquiry messages to the interfered network equipment group, which can be understood as any one or more of the N DUs sending inquiry messages to the interfered network equipment group; or, it can also be understood as N DUs The DU with the coordination function in the DU sends an inquiry message to the interfered network device group; or, it can also be understood as that a representative DU in the N DU sends an inquiry message to the interfered network device group; or, it can also be understood as , One or more of the DUs performing interference cancellation send an inquiry message to the interfered network device group.
下文以CU向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息为例进行示例性说明。In the following, an exemplary description is given by taking the CU sending an inquiry message to the interfered network device group as an example.
CU向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息,可以是在CU指示DU进行干扰消除后询问,或者,也可以在DU干扰消除处理后询问,或者,也可以是在CU选择进行干扰消除的DU后就询问,对此,本申请实施例不作限定。The CU sends an inquiry message to the interfered network device group. It can be inquired after the CU instructs the DU to perform interference cancellation, or after the DU interference cancellation processing, or after the CU selects the DU for interference cancellation Inquiry, this embodiment of the application does not limit this.
CU向被干扰网络设备组发送的询问消息可以通过NGAP消息传送,如图6所示,CU向AMF发送询问消息,AMF再向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息。该询问消息可以携带在已有消息中,如通过已有NGAP消息中的信元Request RI status IE来请求被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰状态。或者,该询问消息也可以为重新定义的NGAP消息,该重新定义的NGAP消息中包含信元Request RI status IE。应理解,信元Request RI status IE仅是一种命名方式,不做限定。The inquiry message sent by the CU to the interfered network device group can be transmitted through the NGAP message. As shown in Figure 6, the CU sends the inquiry message to the AMF, and the AMF then sends the inquiry message to the interfered network device group. The inquiry message can be carried in an existing message, such as requesting the remote interference status of the interfered network device group through the information element Request RI status IE in the existing NGAP message. Alternatively, the inquiry message may also be a redefined NGAP message, and the redefined NGAP message includes the information element Request RI status IE. It should be understood that the information element Request RI status IE is only a naming method and is not limited.
应理解,上述仅是以AMF进行了示例性说明,本申请并未限定于此,任何可以实现任何可以实现AMF功能的方案都落入本申请实施例的保护范围。It should be understood that the foregoing is only an example of AMF, and this application is not limited to this. Any solution that can implement any AMF function falls within the protection scope of the embodiments of this application.
重新定义的NGAP消息例如可以用RAN RI STATUS REQUEST message和AMF RI STATUS REQUEST message来表示。其中,RAN RI STATUS REQUEST message为CU到AMF的消息,RAN RI STATUS REQUEST message中包含信元Request RI status IE。其中,AMF RI STATUS REQUEST message为AMF到被干扰网络设备组的消息,AMF RI STATUS REQUEST message中包含信元Request RI status IE。The redefined NGAP message can be represented by, for example, RAN RI STATUS REQUEST message and AMF RI STATUS REQUEST message. Among them, RAN RI STATUS REQUEST message is the message from CU to AMF, and RAN RI STATUS REQUEST message contains the information element Request RI status IE. Among them, AMF RI STATUS REQUEST message is the message from AMF to the interfered network device group, and AMF RI STATUS REQUEST message contains the information element Request RI status IE.
应理解,上述各个消息的命名仅是一种命名方式,不做限定。It should be understood that the naming of each message mentioned above is only a naming method, and is not limited.
被干扰网络设备组接收到询问消息后,向CU回复响应消息。该响应消息用于指示远程干扰已消除,或者,该响应消息用于指示远程干扰未消除。CU根据该响应消息可以确定远程干扰是否消除。After receiving the inquiry message, the interfered network device group replies with a response message to the CU. The response message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, or the response message is used to indicate that the remote interference has not been eliminated. The CU can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated according to the response message.
一种可能的实现方式,该响应消息可以通过空口发送的参考信号的消息来传送。即被 干扰网络设备组可以向DU发送参考信号的消息,在该参考信号的消息中通过t个比特(bit)来指示DU远程干扰是否消除,DU再通知CU远程干扰是否消除。其中,t为大于1或等于1的整数。假设t等于1,则可以用‘1’表示远程干扰未消除,用‘0’表示远程干扰已消除;或者,也可以用‘1’表示远程干扰已消除,用‘0’表示远程干扰未消除。In a possible implementation manner, the response message may be transmitted through a reference signal message sent through the air interface. That is, the interfered network equipment group can send a reference signal message to the DU. In the reference signal message, t bits are used to indicate whether the DU remote interference is eliminated, and the DU then informs the CU whether the remote interference is eliminated. Wherein, t is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1. Assuming that t is equal to 1, you can use '1' to indicate that the remote interference has not been eliminated, and use '0' to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated; alternatively, you can also use '1' to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, and '0' to indicate that the remote interference has not been eliminated .
又一种可能的实现方式,该响应消息可以通过NGAP消息传送,如图6所示,被干扰网络设备组向AMF发送响应消息,AMF再向CU发送响应消息。例如,可以通过已有NGAP消息中的信元RI status IE来指示干扰是否消除。又如,也可以通过重新定义的NGAP消息来指示远程干扰是否消除,重新定义的NGAP消息如可以用RAN RI STATUS message和AMF RI STATUS message来表示。其中,RAN RI STATUS message为被干扰网络设备组到AMF的消息,RAN RI STATUS message中包含信元RI status IE。其中,AMF RI STATUS message为AMF到CU的消息,AMF RI STATUS message中包含信元RI status IE。In another possible implementation manner, the response message may be transmitted through an NGAP message. As shown in FIG. 6, the interfered network device group sends a response message to the AMF, and the AMF sends a response message to the CU. For example, the information element RI status IE in the existing NGAP message can be used to indicate whether the interference is eliminated. For another example, the redefined NGAP message can also be used to indicate whether the remote interference is eliminated. For example, the redefined NGAP message can be represented by RAN RI STATUS message and AMF RI STATUS message. Among them, RAN RI STATUS message is the message from the interfered network device group to the AMF, and the RAN RI STATUS message contains the information element RI status IE. Among them, AMF RI STATUS message is the message from AMF to CU, and AMF RI STATUS message contains the cell RI status IE.
基于方式A,CU可以通过向被干扰网络设备组询问远程干扰状态,并根据被干扰网络设备组回复的响应消息,方便快速地确认远程干扰是否消除。Based on method A, the CU can ask the interfered network device group about the remote interference status, and according to the response message returned by the interfered network device group, conveniently and quickly confirm whether the remote interference is eliminated.
方式B:CU询问被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰状态,根据在预设时长内是否收到回复的响应消息来确定远程干扰是否消除。Method B: The CU asks about the remote interference status of the interfered network device group, and determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the reply message is received within a preset time period.
基于被干扰网络设备组的标识,CU或者N个DU可以向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息,用于询问DU对被干扰网络设备组造成的远程干扰是否消除,例如,通过回退信令向被干扰网络设备组询问远程干扰状态。关于CU或者N个DU向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息,可参考方式A中的描述,此处不再赘述。Based on the identity of the interfered network device group, the CU or N DUs can send an inquiry message to the interfered network device group to inquire whether the remote interference caused by the DU to the interfered network device group is eliminated, for example, through fallback signaling to The interfered network device group asks about the remote interference status. Regarding the CU or N DUs sending inquiry messages to the interfered network device group, refer to the description in Method A, which will not be repeated here.
对于CU来说,如果在预设时长内CU接收到响应消息,且该响应消息用于指示远程干扰已消除,则CU确定远程干扰已消除;如果在预设时长内CU未接收到响应消息,则CU确定远程干扰未消除。例如,CU向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息后,CU以预设时长为时间长度启动定时器,如果在定时器运行阶段CU接收到响应消息,且该响应消息用于指示远程干扰已消除,则CU确定远程干扰已消除;如果在定时器结束时CU还未接收到响应消息,则CU确定远程干扰未消除。For the CU, if the CU receives a response message within the preset time period, and the response message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, the CU determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; if the CU does not receive the response message within the preset time period, Then the CU determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated. For example, after the CU sends an inquiry message to the interfered network device group, the CU starts the timer with the preset duration as the time length. If the CU receives a response message during the timer operation phase, and the response message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, The CU determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; if the CU has not received the response message when the timer expires, the CU determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
或者,对于DU来说,如果在预设时长内DU接收到响应消息,且该响应消息用于指示远程干扰已消除,则DU确定远程干扰已消除,并通知CU远程干扰已消除;如果在预设时长内DU未接收到响应消息,则DU确定远程干扰未消除,并通知CU远程干扰未消除。例如,DU向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息后,以预设时长为时间长度启动定时器,如果在定时器运行阶段DU接收到响应消息,且该响应消息用于指示远程干扰已消除,则DU确定远程干扰已消除;如果在定时器结束时DU还未接收到响应消息,则DU确定远程干扰未消除。Or, for the DU, if the DU receives a response message within a preset period of time, and the response message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, the DU determines that the remote interference has been eliminated and informs the CU that the remote interference has been eliminated; If the DU does not receive a response message within the time period, the DU determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated, and informs the CU that the remote interference has not been eliminated. For example, after the DU sends an inquiry message to the interfered network device group, it starts the timer with the preset duration as the time length. If the DU receives a response message during the timer operation phase, and the response message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, then The DU determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; if the DU has not received a response message when the timer expires, the DU determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
其中,预设时长可以是预先设置的时长,例如协议预先规定的,或者网络设备预先配置的;或者,也可以是根据实际情况动态设置的时长;或者,也可以是根据历史情况预估的时长,对此,本申请实施例不作限定。Among them, the preset duration may be a preset duration, such as pre-defined by the protocol or pre-configured by the network device; or it may be a duration dynamically set according to actual conditions; or it may be a duration estimated based on historical conditions In this regard, the embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
其中,关于响应消息的形式,可以参考方式A中的描述,此处不再赘述。For the form of the response message, refer to the description in Method A, which will not be repeated here.
对于被干扰网络设备组来说,接收到询问消息后,如果被干扰网络设备组检测到远程干扰消除,则可以立即向DU或CU回复响应消息,且该响应消息用于指示远程干扰已消除;如果被干扰网络设备组检测到远程干扰未消除,则不回复响应消息。For the interfered network device group, after receiving the inquiry message, if the interfered network device group detects that the remote interference is eliminated, it can immediately reply to the DU or CU with a response message, and the response message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated; If the interfered network device group detects that the remote interference has not been eliminated, it does not reply with a response message.
其中,被干扰网络设备组可以在接收到询问消息后检测远程干扰是否消除;或者,被干扰网络设备组可以在接收到询问消息后周期性的检测远程干扰是否消除;或者,被干扰网络设备组可以在接收到询问消息后不定期地的检测远程干扰是否消除;或者,被干扰网络设备组可以周期性地或不定期地的检测远程干扰是否消除,对此,本申请实施例不作限定。Among them, the interfered network equipment group can detect whether the remote interference is eliminated after receiving the inquiry message; or the interfered network equipment group may periodically detect whether the remote interference is eliminated after receiving the inquiry message; or the interfered network equipment group After receiving the inquiry message, it may be detected irregularly whether the remote interference is eliminated; or the interfered network device group may periodically or irregularly detect whether the remote interference is eliminated, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
基于方式B,通过向被干扰网络设备组询问干扰状态,并根据预设时长内是否收到被干扰网络设备组回复的响应消息,CU可以准确地确认干扰是否消除,且可以节省信令开销。Based on method B, by inquiring the interference status from the interfered network device group, and according to whether the response message from the interfered network device group is received within a preset period of time, the CU can accurately confirm whether the interference is eliminated, and can save signaling overhead.
方式C:CU根据在预设时长内是否收到通知消息来确定远程干扰是否消除。Method C: The CU determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the notification message is received within a preset time period.
与方式B相比,方式C中,DU或CU不需要向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息。Compared with method B, in method C, the DU or CU does not need to send an inquiry message to the interfered network device group.
对于CU来说,如果在预设时长内CU接收到通知消息,且该通知消息用于指示远程干扰已消除,则CU确定远程干扰已消除;如果在预设时长内CU未接收到通知消息,则CU确定远程干扰未消除。例如,CU指示DU开始进行干扰消除时,CU以预设时长为时间长度启动定时器,如果在定时器运行阶段CU接收到通知消息,且该通知消息用于指示远程干扰已消除,则CU确定远程干扰已消除;如果在定时器结束时CU还未接收到通知消息,则CU确定远程干扰未消除。For the CU, if the CU receives a notification message within the preset time period, and the notification message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, the CU determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; if the CU does not receive the notification message within the preset time period, Then the CU determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated. For example, when the CU instructs the DU to start interference cancellation, the CU starts the timer with the preset duration as the length of time. If the CU receives a notification message during the timer operation phase and the notification message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, the CU determines The remote interference has been eliminated; if the CU has not received the notification message at the end of the timer, the CU determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
或者,对于DU来说,如果在预设时长内DU接收到通知消息,且该通知消息用于指示远程干扰已消除,则DU确定远程干扰已消除,并通知CU干扰已消除;如果在预设时长内DU未接收到通知消息,则DU确定远程干扰未消除,并通知CU干扰未消除。例如,DU开始进行干扰消除时,以预设时长为时间长度启动定时器,如果在定时器运行阶段DU接收到通知消息,且该通知消息用于指示远程干扰已消除,则DU确定远程干扰已消除;如果在定时器结束时DU还未接收到通知消息,则DU确定远程干扰未消除。Or, for the DU, if the DU receives a notification message within a preset time period, and the notification message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, the DU determines that the remote interference has been eliminated and informs the CU that the interference has been eliminated; If the DU does not receive the notification message within the time period, the DU determines that the remote interference is not eliminated, and notifies the CU that the interference is not eliminated. For example, when the DU starts to cancel the interference, it starts the timer with the preset duration as the time length. If the DU receives a notification message during the timer running phase and the notification message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, the DU determines that the remote interference has been eliminated. Elimination; if the DU has not received the notification message at the end of the timer, the DU determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
其中,预设时长可以是预先设置的时长,例如协议预先规定的,或者网络设备预先配置的;或者,也可以是根据实际情况动态设置的时长;或者,也可以是根据历史情况预估的时长,对此,本申请实施例不作限定。Among them, the preset duration may be a preset duration, such as pre-defined by the protocol or pre-configured by the network device; or it may be a duration dynamically set according to actual conditions; or it may be a duration estimated based on historical conditions In this regard, the embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
其中,关于通知消息的形式,可以参考方式A中关于响应消息的描述,此处不再赘述。For the form of the notification message, please refer to the description of the response message in Method A, which will not be repeated here.
对于被干扰网络设备组来说,可以周期性地或不定期地检测远程干扰是否消除,如果被干扰网络设备组检测到远程干扰消除,则可以立即向DU或CU发送远程干扰已消除的通知消息,该通知消息可以通过backhaul发送,也可以在空口发送的参考信号中携带;如果被干扰网络设备组检测到远程干扰未消除,则可以不发送通知消息,或者,也可以在空口发送的参考信号中携带远程干扰未消除的消息。For the interfered network device group, it can periodically or irregularly detect whether the remote interference is eliminated. If the interfered network device group detects that the remote interference has been eliminated, it can immediately send a notification message that the remote interference has been eliminated to the DU or CU , The notification message can be sent through backhaul or carried in the reference signal sent on the air interface; if the interfered network equipment group detects that the remote interference is not eliminated, the notification message may not be sent, or the reference signal sent on the air interface It carries messages that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
基于方式C,DU或CU可以根据预设时长内是否收到被干扰网络设备组的通知消息,可以准确地确认远程干扰是否消除,且可以节省信令开销。Based on method C, the DU or CU can accurately confirm whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the notification message of the interfered network device group is received within the preset time period, and can save signaling overhead.
方式D:CU根据被干扰网络设备组发送的远程干扰强度信息来确定远程干扰是否消除。Method D: The CU determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to the remote interference intensity information sent by the interfered network device group.
其中,被干扰网络设备组发送的远程干扰强度信息,即该被干扰网络设备组受到的远程干扰强度,可以是IoT值,或者也可以是其它远程干扰强度信息。该远程干扰强度信息可以携带在被干扰网络设备组发送的参考信号中,也可以是被干扰网络设备组专门发送的,或者,也可以是携带在如方式A所述的响应消息中。关于远程干扰强度信息的形式, 不作限定。The remote interference intensity information sent by the interfered network device group, that is, the remote interference intensity received by the interfered network device group, may be an IoT value or other remote interference strength information. The remote interference intensity information may be carried in the reference signal sent by the interfered network equipment group, or may be specially sent by the interfered network equipment group, or may be carried in the response message as described in way A. There is no limitation on the form of the remote interference intensity information.
对于CU来说,可以根据是否接收到远程干扰强度信息来确定干扰是否消除,或者,也可以根据接收到的远程干扰强度信息确定干扰是否消除。例如,如果CU接收到该远程干扰强度信息,则CU确定远程干扰未消除;如果CU未接收到该远程干扰强度信息,则CU确定远程干扰消除。又如,如果CU在预设时长内接收到该远程干扰强度信息,则CU确定远程干扰未消除;如果CU在预设时长内未接收到该远程干扰强度信息,则CU确定远程干扰消除。For the CU, whether the interference is eliminated can be determined according to whether the remote interference intensity information is received, or it can also be determined whether the interference is eliminated according to the received remote interference intensity information. For example, if the CU receives the remote interference intensity information, the CU determines that the remote interference is not eliminated; if the CU does not receive the remote interference intensity information, the CU determines that the remote interference is eliminated. For another example, if the CU receives the remote interference intensity information within the preset time period, the CU determines that the remote interference is not eliminated; if the CU does not receive the remote interference intensity information within the preset time period, the CU determines that the remote interference intensity information is eliminated.
或者,对于DU来说,可以根据是否接收到远程干扰强度信息来确定干扰是否消除,或者,也可以根据接收到的远程干扰强度信息确定干扰是否消除。例如,如果DU接收到该远程干扰强度信息,则DU确定远程干扰未消除;如果DU未接收到该远程干扰强度信息,则DU确定远程干扰消除。又如,如果DU在预设时长内接收到该远程干扰强度信息DU,则DU确定远程干扰未消除;如果DU在预设时长内未接收到该远程干扰强度信息,则DU确定远程干扰消除。Alternatively, for the DU, whether the interference is eliminated can be determined according to whether the remote interference intensity information is received, or it can also be determined whether the interference is eliminated according to the received remote interference intensity information. For example, if the DU receives the remote interference intensity information, the DU determines that the remote interference is not eliminated; if the DU does not receive the remote interference intensity information, the DU determines that the remote interference is eliminated. For another example, if the DU receives the remote interference intensity information DU within the preset time period, the DU determines that the remote interference is not eliminated; if the DU does not receive the remote interference intensity information within the preset time period, the DU determines that the remote interference intensity information is eliminated.
其中,预设时长可以是预先设置的时长,例如协议预先规定的,或者网络设备预先配置的;或者,也可以是根据实际情况动态设置的时长;或者,也可以是根据历史情况预估的时长,对此,本申请实施例不作限定。Among them, the preset duration may be a preset duration, such as pre-defined by the protocol or pre-configured by the network device; or it may be a duration dynamically set according to actual conditions; or it may be a duration estimated based on historical conditions In this regard, the embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
对于被干扰网络设备组来说,可以周期性地或不定期地检测远程干扰是否消除,并向DU或CU发送远程干扰强度信息。或者,如果被干扰网络设备组检测到远程干扰消除,则可以立即向DU或CU发送远程干扰强度信息,该远程干扰强度信息可以在空口发送的参考信号中携带,或者,也可以是携带在如方式A所述的响应消息中;如果被干扰网络设备组检测到远程干扰未消除,则可以不发送远程干扰强度信息,或者,也可以在空口发送的参考信号中携带远程干扰未消除的消息。For the interfered network equipment group, it can periodically or irregularly detect whether the remote interference is eliminated, and send the remote interference intensity information to the DU or CU. Or, if the interfered network equipment group detects remote interference cancellation, it can immediately send remote interference strength information to the DU or CU. The remote interference strength information can be carried in the reference signal sent by the air interface, or it can be carried in In the response message in mode A; if the interfered network device group detects that the remote interference is not eliminated, the remote interference strength information may not be sent, or the reference signal sent by the air interface may also carry the message that the remote interference is not eliminated.
上述仅示例性地列举了四种方式,CU可以基于上述任意一种方式确定远程干扰是否消除。本申请实施例并未限定于此,任何可以使得CU确定远程干扰是否消除的方式都落入本申请实施例的保护范围。The foregoing only exemplarily lists four methods, and the CU can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated based on any of the foregoing methods. The embodiment of the present application is not limited to this, and any manner that enables the CU to determine whether the remote interference is eliminated falls within the protection scope of the embodiment of the present application.
下面详细介绍上述方法1至方法4。The methods 1 to 4 above are described in detail below.
方法1,选择参考信号强度较大的。 Method 1. Choose the one with higher reference signal strength.
选择参考信号强度较大的,也可以理解为,进行干扰消除的DU的参考信号强度均大于剩余DU的参考信号强度。假设N个DU上报的参考信号的信息中的被干扰网络设备组的标识相同,剩余DU为N个DU中除进行干扰消除的DU以外的DU。Choosing the one with a higher reference signal strength can also be understood as the reference signal strength of the DU performing interference cancellation is greater than the reference signal strength of the remaining DUs. Assuming that the identity of the interfered network device group in the information of the reference signal reported by the N DUs is the same, and the remaining DUs are DUs other than the DU for interference cancellation among the N DUs.
例如N个DU包括DU1、DU2、DU3、DU4、DU5、DU6,且DU1、DU2、DU3、DU4、DU5、DU6上报的参考信号的信息中被干扰网络设备组的标识均相同,且DU1、DU2、DU3的参考信号强度均大于DU4、DU5、DU6的参考信号强度,则进行干扰消除的DU包括DU1、DU2、DU3,换句话说,CU可以选择DU1、DU2、DU3进行干扰消除。For example, N DUs include DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6, and the identities of the interfered network device groups in the reference signal information reported by DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6 are all the same, and DU1, DU2 The reference signal strength of DU3 is greater than the reference signal strength of DU4, DU5, and DU6, and the DUs for interference cancellation include DU1, DU2, and DU3. In other words, the CU can select DU1, DU2, and DU3 for interference cancellation.
方法2,选择参考信号强度超过第一阈值的。Method 2: Select the reference signal whose strength exceeds the first threshold.
其中,第一阈值可以是预先设置的,例如协议预先规定的,或者网络设备预先配置的;或者,也可以是根据实际情况动态设置的,如多个参考信号强度的平均值;或者,也可以是根据历史情况预估的,对此,本申请实施例不作限定。Wherein, the first threshold may be preset, for example, pre-defined by the protocol, or pre-configured by the network device; or it may be dynamically set according to the actual situation, such as the average value of multiple reference signal strengths; or It is estimated based on historical conditions, which is not limited in the embodiments of this application.
例如N个DU包括DU1、DU2、DU3、DU4、DU5、DU6,且DU1、DU2、DU3、 DU4、DU5、DU6上报的参考信号的信息中被干扰网络设备组的标识均相同。例如,第一阈值可以是DU1、DU2、DU3、DU4、DU5、DU6上报的参考信号强度的平均值,参考信号强度超过该第一阈值的DU为进行干扰消除的DU。又如,第一阈值可以是DU1、DU2、DU3、DU4、DU5、DU6上报的参考信号强度的总和与系数t的乘积,其中t大于0,且t小于1,参考信号强度超过该第一阈值的DU为进行干扰消除的DU。For example, the N DUs include DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6, and the identity of the interfered network device group in the reference signal information reported by DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6 are all the same. For example, the first threshold may be the average value of the reference signal strength reported by DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6, and the DU whose reference signal strength exceeds the first threshold is the DU for interference cancellation. For another example, the first threshold may be the product of the sum of the reference signal strengths reported by DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6 and the coefficient t, where t is greater than 0 and t is less than 1, and the reference signal strength exceeds the first threshold The DU is the DU for interference cancellation.
方法3,选择干扰强度较大的。Method 3, choose the one with greater interference intensity.
选择干扰强度较大的,也可以理解为,进行干扰消除的DU的干扰强度均大于剩余DU的干扰强度。Choosing a larger interference intensity can also be understood as that the interference intensity of the DU that performs interference cancellation is greater than the interference intensity of the remaining DUs.
例如N个DU包括DU1、DU2、DU3、DU4、DU5、DU6,且DU1、DU2、DU3、DU4、DU5、DU6上报的参考信号的信息中被干扰网络设备组的标识均相同,且DU1、DU2、DU3的干扰强度均大于DU4、DU5、DU6的干扰强度,则进行干扰消除的DU包括DU1、DU2、DU3,换句话说,CU可以选择DU1、DU2、DU3进行干扰消除。For example, N DUs include DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6, and the identities of the interfered network device groups in the reference signal information reported by DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6 are all the same, and DU1, DU2 , The interference intensity of DU3 is greater than the interference intensity of DU4, DU5, and DU6, the DUs for interference cancellation include DU1, DU2, and DU3. In other words, the CU can select DU1, DU2, and DU3 for interference cancellation.
方法4,选择干扰强度超过第二阈值的。Method 4, select the interference intensity that exceeds the second threshold.
其中,第二阈值可以是预先设置的,例如协议预先规定的,或者网络设备预先配置的;或者,也可以是根据实际情况动态设置的,如多个干扰强度的平均值;或者,也可以是根据历史情况预估的,对此,本申请实施例不作限定。Wherein, the second threshold can be preset, for example, pre-defined by the protocol, or pre-configured by the network device; or it can be dynamically set according to the actual situation, such as the average value of multiple interference intensities; or, it can be Estimated based on historical conditions, this is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
例如第二DU包括DU1、DU2、DU3、DU4、DU5、DU6,且DU1、DU2、DU3、DU4、DU5、DU6上报的参考信号的信息中被干扰网络设备组的标识均相同。例如,第二阈值可以是DU1、DU2、DU3、DU4、DU5、DU6上报的干扰强度的平均值,干扰强度超过该第二阈值的DU为目标DU。又如,第二阈值可以是DU1、DU2、DU3、DU4、DU5、DU6上报的干扰强度的总和与系数t的乘积,其中t大于0,且t小于1,干扰强度超过该第二阈值的DU为目标DU。For example, the second DU includes DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6, and the identities of the interfered network device groups in the reference signal information reported by DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6 are all the same. For example, the second threshold may be the average value of the interference intensity reported by DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6, and the DU whose interference intensity exceeds the second threshold is the target DU. For another example, the second threshold may be the product of the sum of the interference intensities reported by DU1, DU2, DU3, DU4, DU5, and DU6 and the coefficient t, where t is greater than 0 and t is less than 1, and the interference intensity exceeds the second threshold. For the target DU.
基于上述四种方法,可以使得CU选择出主要干扰源,从而使得主要干扰源采取干扰消除措施,不仅降低远程干扰效果明显,且避免了DU处的不必要的小区性能损失。Based on the above four methods, the CU can select the main interference source, so that the main interference source takes interference elimination measures, which not only reduces the effect of long-range interference, but also avoids unnecessary cell performance loss at the DU.
应理解,上述方法仅是示例性说明,本申请并未限定于此,例如,任何基于上述四种方法的变形均属于本申请的保护范围。It should be understood that the above method is only an exemplary description, and this application is not limited thereto. For example, any modification based on the above four methods belongs to the protection scope of this application.
图7是本申请实施例的通信方法700的流程示意图。该方法涉及AMF或OAM、以及gNB。如图7所示,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,该方法包括:FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method 700 according to an embodiment of the present application. This method involves AMF or OAM, and gNB. As shown in Figure 7, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which includes:
S710、第一gNB和第二gNB接收来自被干扰网络设备组的参考信号。S710. The first gNB and the second gNB receive reference signals from the interfered network device group.
N个gNB接收来自被干扰网络设备组的参考信号,该N个gNB均对被干扰网络设备组造成了远程干扰,也就是说,被干扰网络设备组通过空口发送参考信号,该N个gNB接收到该参考信号,其中,N为大于1或等于1的整数。图7中为便于说明,仅列举了第一gNB和第二gNB进行说明,第一gNB和第二gNB属于N个gNB中的任意两个gNB。N gNBs receive the reference signal from the interfered network equipment group, and the N gNBs all cause long-range interference to the interfered network equipment group, that is, the interfered network equipment group sends the reference signal through the air interface, and the N gNB receives To the reference signal, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1. For ease of description, FIG. 7 only lists the first gNB and the second gNB for description. The first gNB and the second gNB belong to any two gNBs of the N gNBs.
此外,在本实施例中,干扰网络设备组不具有CU-DU架构,例如,干扰网络设备组为gNB,或者也可以为其它网络设备,此处为便于说明,以gNB为例进行介绍。In addition, in this embodiment, the interfering network device group does not have a CU-DU architecture. For example, the interfering network device group is gNB, or it may be other network devices. For ease of description, gNB is used as an example for introduction.
关于被干扰网络设备组参考方法500的描述,此处为简洁,不再赘述。The description of the method 500 with reference to the interfered network device group is succinct here and will not be repeated here.
被干扰网络设备组发送参考信号时,在参考信号中携带被干扰网络设备组的标识(identity,ID),该N个gNB可以解析出该标识。When the interfered network device group sends the reference signal, the reference signal carries the identity (ID) of the interfered network device group, and the N gNBs can resolve the identity.
通过使得N个gNB获知被干扰网络设备组的标识,可以使得N个gNB获知自身对哪 些网络设备造成了远程干扰。By enabling the N gNBs to learn the identity of the interfered network device group, the N gNBs can learn which network devices they cause remote interference to.
可选地,N个gNB接收来自被干扰网络设备组的参考信号后,可以基于该参考信号计算干扰强度。关于该干扰强度,可参考方法500中的描述,此处不再赘述。Optionally, after N gNBs receive the reference signal from the interfered network device group, the interference intensity may be calculated based on the reference signal. Regarding the interference intensity, please refer to the description in the method 500, which is not repeated here.
在本申请实施例中,N个gNB可以向协调网元上报参考信号的信息,以便协调网元能够选择进行干扰消除的gNB,避免N个gNB单独进行干扰消除,造成N个gNB处不必要的通信性能损失。In the embodiment of this application, N gNBs can report reference signal information to the coordinating network element, so that the coordinating network element can select the gNB for interference cancellation, avoiding N gNBs from performing interference cancellation alone, which causes unnecessary interference at the N gNBs. Communication performance loss.
应理解,在本申请实施例中,进行干扰消除,也可以称为进行远程干扰消除,均是为了消除N个gNB对被干扰网络设备组造成的远程干扰。下文为简洁,均称为进行干扰消除。It should be understood that, in the embodiments of the present application, interference cancellation, which can also be referred to as remote interference cancellation, is to eliminate the remote interference caused by N gNBs to the interfered network device group. The following is succinct, all referred to as performing interference cancellation.
其中,协调网元仅是一种用于表示其功能做的命名,其命名不对本申请实施例的保护范围造成限定。协调网元例如可以为AMF;或者,协调网元还可以为OAM;或者,协调网元还可以为N个gNB中的一个或多个gNB,该一个或多个gNB可以是具有协调功能的gNB,或该一个或多个gNB可以是具有代表性的gNB,对此不作限定。下文统一以协调网元为例进行示例性说明,应理解,下文中的协调网元均可用AMF或OAM或gNB代替。Among them, the coordination network element is only a naming used to indicate its function, and its naming does not limit the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application. The coordination network element may be, for example, AMF; or, the coordination network element may also be OAM; or, the coordination network element may also be one or more gNBs among N gNBs, and the one or more gNBs may be gNBs with coordination functions. , Or the one or more gNBs may be representative gNBs, which is not limited. The following uniformly takes the coordination network element as an example for exemplification. It should be understood that the coordination network elements below can all be replaced by AMF, OAM, or gNB.
S720、第一gNB和第二gNB向协调网元上报参考信号的信息。S720. The first gNB and the second gNB report the information of the reference signal to the coordination network element.
N个gNB向协调网元上报参考信号的信息,图7中为便于说明,仅列举了第一gNB和第二gNB作为示例性说明。The N gNBs report the information of the reference signal to the coordination network element. In FIG. 7 for convenience of description, only the first gNB and the second gNB are listed as examples.
其中,N个gNB上报的参考信号的信息中携带被干扰网络设备组的标识,从而协调网元通过携带的被干扰网络设备组的标识,可以确定携带相同标识的gNB有哪些,换句话说,可以确定远程干扰同一个被干扰网络设备组的gNB有哪些。Among them, the reference signal information reported by the N gNBs carries the identity of the interfered network device group, so that the coordinated network element can determine which gNB carries the same identity by carrying the identity of the interfered network device group. In other words, It is possible to determine which gNBs are remotely interfering with the same interfered network device group.
可选地,N个gNB上报的参考信号的信息中包括:参考信号强度和/或干扰强度。关于参考信号强度和干扰强度,可参考方法500中的描述,此处不再赘述。Optionally, the information of the reference signals reported by the N gNBs includes: reference signal strength and/or interference strength. Regarding the reference signal strength and the interference strength, please refer to the description in the method 500, which will not be repeated here.
N个gNB上报的参考信号的信息可以通过NGAP消息传送。假设协调网元为AMF,N个gNB向AMF发送参考信号的信息。N个gNB上报的参考信号的信息,可以携带在已有消息中。或者,针对N个gNB上报的参考信号的信息,也可以定义新的class 2 element procedure,例如可以用RIM RS Indication来表示,该RIM RS Indication中包含参考信号的信息,例如可以用RIM RS INDICATION message来表示,如上述表1所示。应理解,RIM RS Indication、RIM RS INDICATION message仅是一种命名方式,不做限定。The information of the reference signals reported by the N gNBs may be transmitted through NGAP messages. Assuming that the coordination network element is AMF, N gNBs send reference signal information to AMF. The information of the reference signal reported by the N gNBs may be carried in an existing message. Or, for the information of the reference signal reported by N gNBs, a new class 2 element procedure can also be defined, for example, it can be represented by RIM RS Indication, and the RIM RS Indication contains reference signal information, for example, RIM RS INDICATION message , As shown in Table 1 above. It should be understood that RIM RS Indication and RIM RS INDICATION message are only a naming method and are not limited.
协调网元接收到N个gNB上报的参考信号的信息后,可以从N个gNB中选择进行干扰消除的gNB。After the coordination network element receives the information of the reference signal reported by the N gNBs, it can select a gNB for interference cancellation from the N gNBs.
S730、协调网元选择进行干扰消除的gNB。S730. The coordination network element selects a gNB for interference cancellation.
N个gNB向协调网元上报参考信号的信息,该上报的参考信号的信息中携带的被干扰网络设备组的标识可以相同,也可以不相同。协调网元分别在携带相同标识的gNB中选择一个或多个gNB进行干扰消除。The N gNBs report the information of the reference signal to the coordination network element, and the identity of the interfered network device group carried in the information of the reported reference signal may be the same or different. The coordination network element respectively selects one or more gNBs from the gNBs carrying the same identifier for interference cancellation.
协调网元可以通过以下任一实现方式,选择进行干扰消除的gNB。The coordination network element can select a gNB for interference cancellation through any of the following implementation methods.
实现方式1,协调网元可以基于当前上报的参考信号的信息,分别在携带相同标识的gNB中选择进行干扰消除的gNB。Implementation manner 1: The coordination network element may select the gNB for interference cancellation among the gNBs carrying the same identifier based on the information of the currently reported reference signal.
以N个gNB携带的标识相同为例进行示例性说明。协调网元在上报的N个gNB中选择N1个gNB进行干扰消除,其中,N1小于或等于N,且N1为大于1或等于1的整数。Take the same identifier carried by N gNBs as an example for illustration. The coordination network element selects N1 gNBs from the reported N gNBs for interference cancellation, where N1 is less than or equal to N, and N1 is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
实现方式2,协调网元可以基于当前上报的参考信号的信息,结合历史干扰消除过程(例如,上一次干扰消除过程),分别在携带相同标识的gNB中选择进行干扰消除的gNB。Implementation manner 2: The coordination network element can select the gNB for interference cancellation from the gNB carrying the same identifier in combination with the historical interference cancellation process (for example, the last interference cancellation process) based on the information of the currently reported reference signal.
以N个gNB携带的标识相同为例进行示例性说明。假设在历史干扰消除过程中,N个gNB中的N2个gNB进行了干扰消除,则协调网元在上报的N个gNB中选择N2个gNB进行干扰消除,其中,N2小于或等于N,且N2为大于1或等于1的整数。其中,协调网元选择的gNB与历史干扰消除过程中的gNB可以完全相同,也可以部分相同,也可以完全不同,对此不作限定。Take the same identifier carried by N gNBs as an example for illustration. Assuming that in the historical interference cancellation process, N2 gNBs out of the N gNBs perform interference cancellation, the coordination network element selects N2 gNBs from the reported N gNBs for interference cancellation, where N2 is less than or equal to N, and N2 Is an integer greater than or equal to 1. Among them, the gNB selected by the coordination network element and the gNB in the historical interference cancellation process may be completely the same, partly the same, or completely different, which is not limited.
实现方式3,协调网元可以基于当前上报的参考信号的信息,结合历史上报的参考信号的信息,分别在携带相同标识的gNB中选择进行干扰消除的gNB。Implementation manner 3, the coordination network element can select the gNB for interference cancellation among the gNBs carrying the same identifier based on the information of the currently reported reference signal, combined with the information of the historically reported reference signal.
以N个gNB携带的标识相同为例进行示例性说明。例如,历史上报的参考信息中包括参考信号强度和/或干扰强度,协调网元可以结合历史上报的参考信号的信息,确定参考信号强度和/或干扰强度,基于该参考信号强度和/或干扰强度,从N个gNB中选择进行干扰消除的gNB。Take the same identifier carried by N gNBs as an example for illustration. For example, historically reported reference information includes reference signal strength and/or interference strength, and the coordination network element may combine historically reported reference signal information to determine the reference signal strength and/or interference strength, based on the reference signal strength and/or interference Intensity, select a gNB for interference cancellation from N gNBs.
实现方式4,协调网元可以基于当前上报的参考信号的信息中包括的参考信号强度和/或干扰强度,分别在携带相同标识的gNB中选择进行干扰消除的gNB。Implementation manner 4, the coordination network element may select a gNB for interference cancellation among gNBs carrying the same identifier based on the reference signal strength and/or interference strength included in the currently reported reference signal information.
以N个gNB携带的标识相同为例进行示例性说明。例如,S720中,N个gNB上报的参考信号的信息中包括参考信号强度和/或干扰强度,协调网元可以基于该参考信号强度和/或干扰强度,从N个gNB中选择进行干扰消除的gNB。Take the same identifier carried by N gNBs as an example for illustration. For example, in S720, the reference signal information reported by N gNBs includes the reference signal strength and/or interference strength, and the coordination network element may select from N gNBs for interference cancellation based on the reference signal strength and/or interference strength. gNB.
上述仅示例性地列举了几种可能的实现方式,本申请实施例并未限定于此,任何可以使得协调网元从N个gNB中选择一个或多个gNB进行干扰消除的实现方式都落入本申请实施例的保护范围。The foregoing only exemplarily lists several possible implementations, and the embodiments of this application are not limited to this. Any implementation that enables the coordination network element to select one or more gNBs from N gNBs for interference cancellation falls into The protection scope of the embodiments of this application.
在上述几种实现方式中,当协调网元基于参考信号强度和/或干扰强度选择进行干扰消除的gNB时,可以通过以下任意一种方法选择:In the above several implementation manners, when the coordination network element selects the gNB for interference cancellation based on the reference signal strength and/or interference strength, it can be selected by any of the following methods:
方法1,选择参考信号强度较大的; Method 1. Choose the one with higher reference signal strength;
方法2,选择参考信号强度超过第一阈值的;Method 2: Select the reference signal whose strength exceeds the first threshold;
方法3,选择干扰强度较大的;Method 3, choose the one with greater interference intensity;
方法4,选择干扰强度超过第二阈值的。Method 4, select the interference intensity that exceeds the second threshold.
关于上述方法1至方法4,具体可参考方法500中的描述,此处不再赘述。Regarding the foregoing method 1 to method 4, please refer to the description in method 500 for details, which will not be repeated here.
协调网元选择进行干扰消除的gNB后,向选择的gNB发送指示信息,用于指示进行该gNB进行干扰消除。仍以第一gNB和第二gNB为例,假设S730中,协调网元选择第一gNB进行干扰消除,方法700还包括S740:After the coordination network element selects a gNB for interference cancellation, it sends indication information to the selected gNB for instructing the gNB to perform interference cancellation. Still taking the first gNB and the second gNB as examples, it is assumed that in S730, the coordination network element selects the first gNB for interference cancellation, and the method 700 further includes S740:
S740,协调网元向第一gNB发送指示信息,该指示信息用于指示第一gNB进行干扰消除。S740. The coordination network element sends instruction information to the first gNB, where the instruction information is used to instruct the first gNB to perform interference cancellation.
图7中为便于说明,仅列举了协调网元向第一gNB发送用于指示进行干扰消息的指示信息。应理解,在S740中,协调网元向选择出的需要进行干扰消除的每个gNB发送指示信息。For ease of description, FIG. 7 only lists the indication information that the coordination network element sends to the first gNB to indicate the interference message. It should be understood that in S740, the coordination network element sends indication information to each gNB selected for interference cancellation.
gNB进行干扰消除的方法有很多,对此本申请不作限定。例如,gNB可以通过减少下行功率来消除或降低对被干扰网络设备组造成的远程干扰;又如,gNB可以通过在产生干扰的频域(例如频带等等)、时域(例如子帧等等)、或空域(例如波束或波束集等) 上停止发送数据等等,来消除或降低对被干扰网络设备组造成的远程干扰。应理解,任何可以减少N个gNB对被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰所采取的措施都落入本申请的保护范围。There are many methods for gNB to perform interference cancellation, which are not limited in this application. For example, gNB can eliminate or reduce the long-range interference caused to the interfered network equipment group by reducing the downlink power; another example, gNB can be used in the frequency domain (such as frequency band, etc.) and time domain (such as subframes, etc.) where interference occurs. ), or in the airspace (such as beams or beam sets, etc.) to stop sending data, etc., to eliminate or reduce the remote interference caused to the interfered network device group. It should be understood that any measures that can be taken to reduce the remote interference of N gNBs to the interfered network device group fall within the protection scope of this application.
可选地,协调网元还可以确定N个gNB对被干扰网络设备组的干扰是否消除。Optionally, the coordination network element may also determine whether the interference of the N gNBs to the interfered network device group is eliminated.
S750、协调网元确定远程干扰是否消除。S750. Coordinate the network element to determine whether the remote interference is eliminated.
在本申请实施例中,远程干扰是否消除,换句话说,远程干扰是否还存在,换句话说,干扰是否消除或干扰是否还存在。远程干扰是否消除可以表示远程干扰是否完全消除;或者,也可以表示干扰强度是否超过预设阈值;或者,也可以表示干扰强度是否降低;或者,也可以表示干扰下降程度是否大于预设值等等。对此,本申请实施例不作限定,下文均用远程干扰是否消除来表示。其中,预设阈值或预设值可以是预先规定的阈值,例如协议预先规定的,或者网络设备预先配置的阈值或者预设值,对此,不作限定。In the embodiments of the present application, whether the remote interference is eliminated, in other words, whether the remote interference still exists, in other words, whether the interference is eliminated or whether the interference still exists. Whether the remote interference is eliminated can indicate whether the remote interference is completely eliminated; or, it can also indicate whether the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold; or, it can also indicate whether the interference intensity is reduced; or, it can also indicate whether the interference reduction degree is greater than a preset value, etc. . In this regard, the embodiment of the present application does not limit it, and the following is used to indicate whether the remote interference is eliminated. The preset threshold or the preset value may be a preset threshold, for example, a predetermined threshold or a preset value pre-configured by a protocol or a network device, which is not limited.
相应地,在本申请实施例中,远程干扰已消除,换句话说干扰已消除,可以表示远程干扰已完全消除,或者,也可以表示干扰强度未超过预设阈值,或者,也可以表示干扰强度已降低,或者,也可以表示干扰强度下降程度超过预设值等等。对此,本申请实施例不作限定,下文均用远程干扰已消除来表示。Correspondingly, in the embodiments of the present application, the remote interference has been eliminated, in other words the interference has been eliminated, it can mean that the remote interference has been completely eliminated, or it can also mean that the interference intensity does not exceed the preset threshold, or it can also mean the interference intensity Already reduced, or, it can also mean that the degree of interference intensity has decreased beyond a preset value, and so on. In this regard, the embodiment of the present application does not make a limitation, and the following is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated.
相应地,在本申请实施例中,远程干扰未消除,换句话说干扰未消除,可以表示远程干扰未完全消除,或者,也可以表示干扰强度超过预设阈值,或者,也可以表示干扰强度没有变化或者干扰强度上升,或者,也可以表示干扰强度下降程度未超过预设值等等。对此,本申请实施例不作限定,下文均用远程干扰未消除来表示。Correspondingly, in the embodiments of the present application, the remote interference is not eliminated, in other words, the interference is not eliminated, which may indicate that the remote interference is not completely eliminated, or it may indicate that the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold, or it may also indicate that the interference intensity is not eliminated. Change or increase in interference intensity, or it can also mean that the degree of interference intensity decline does not exceed a preset value, and so on. In this regard, the embodiment of the present application does not make a limitation, and the following is used to indicate that the remote interference is not eliminated.
协调网元确定远程干扰是否消除,或者,gNB也可以确定远程干扰是否消除。当协调网元为OAM时,gNB确定远程干扰是否消除即可,或者,gNB也可以将确定远程干扰是否消除的结果上报给OAM,便于OAM确定远程干扰是否消除;当协调网元为AMF时,AMF确定远程干扰是否消除即可,或者,AMF也可以将确定远程干扰是否消除的结果发送给gNB,便于gNB确定远程干扰是否消除。The coordination network element determines whether the remote interference is eliminated, or the gNB can also determine whether the remote interference is eliminated. When the coordination network element is OAM, gNB can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated, or gNB can also report the result of determining whether the remote interference is eliminated to OAM, so that OAM can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated; when the coordination network element is AMF, The AMF can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated, or the AMF may also send the result of determining whether the remote interference is eliminated to the gNB, so that the gNB can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated.
下面以gNB确定远程干扰是否消除为例进行示例性说明。The following is an example of determining whether the long-range interference is eliminated by the gNB as an example.
一种可能的情况,gNB确定远程干扰消除。In one possible situation, gNB determines remote interference cancellation.
在该情况下,进行干扰消除的gNB保持当前配置,或者进行干扰消除的gNB保持当前的通信资源配置,直到RIM流程结束。关于RIM流程,参考图4的描述,此处不再赘述。In this case, the gNB performing interference cancellation keeps the current configuration, or the gNB performing interference cancellation keeps the current communication resource configuration until the RIM process ends. Regarding the RIM process, refer to the description of FIG. 4, which will not be repeated here.
又一种可能的情况,gNB确定远程干扰未消除。In another possible situation, the gNB determines that the remote interference is not eliminated.
在该情况下,协调网元可以执行S730,即协调网元在剩余gNB中选择一个或多个gNB来继续进行干扰消除,然后还可以继续执行S740、S750直到确定远程干扰已消除。其中,剩余gNB为N个gNB中没有进行干扰消除的gNB。In this case, the coordination network element can perform S730, that is, the coordination network element selects one or more gNBs from the remaining gNB to continue interference cancellation, and then can continue to perform S740 and S750 until it is determined that the remote interference has been eliminated. Among them, the remaining gNB is the gNB for which interference cancellation is not performed among the N gNBs.
或者,在该情况下,N个gNB可以执行S710,即重新接收参考信号,然后再上报给协调网元,协调网元可以执行S530,即协调网元在剩余gNB中或者上报的全部gNB中选择一个或多个gNB来继续进行干扰消除,然后还可以继续执行S740、S750直到确定远程干扰已消除。Or, in this case, N gNBs can perform S710, that is, re-receive the reference signal, and then report to the coordinating network element, and the coordinating network element can perform S530, that is, the coordinating network element can select among the remaining gNBs or all the reported gNBs One or more gNBs continue to perform interference cancellation, and then S740 and S750 can be continued until it is determined that the remote interference has been eliminated.
或者,在该情况下,进行干扰消除的gNB还可以进一步降低下行功率或者停止通信,直到确定远程干扰已消除。Or, in this case, the gNB performing interference cancellation may further reduce the downlink power or stop communication until it is determined that the remote interference has been eliminated.
gNB可以通过以下任一方式,来确定远程干扰是否消除。The gNB can use any of the following methods to determine whether the remote interference is eliminated.
方式A:gNB询问被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰状态,并接收被干扰网络设备组回复的响应消息;Method A: gNB inquires about the remote interference status of the interfered network device group, and receives the response message from the interfered network device group;
方式B:gNB询问被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰状态,根据在预设时长内是否收到回复的响应消息来确定远程干扰是否消除;Method B: gNB asks about the remote interference status of the interfered network device group, and determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the response message is received within a preset time period;
方式C:gNB根据在预设时长内是否收到通知消息来确定远程干扰是否消除;Method C: gNB determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the notification message is received within the preset time period;
方式D:gNB根据被干扰网络设备组发送的远程干扰强度信息来确定远程干扰是否消除。Method D: The gNB determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to the remote interference intensity information sent by the interfered network device group.
下面详细介绍上述方式A、方式B、方式C、方式D。The following describes the above-mentioned method A, method B, method C, and method D in detail.
方式A:gNB询问被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰状态,并接收被干扰网络设备组回复的响应消息。Method A: gNB inquires about the remote interference status of the interfered network device group, and receives a response message from the interfered network device group.
基于被干扰网络设备组的标识,gNB向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息,或者,协调网元可以向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息,该询问消息用于询问N个gNB对被干扰网络设备组造成的远程干扰是否还存在,例如,通过回退信令向被干扰网络设备组询问远程干扰状态。下文用gNB向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息为例进行示例性说明。gNB向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息,可以是在协调网元指示需要进行干扰消除的gNB进行干扰消除后询问,或者,也可以是在进行干扰消除的gNB干扰消除处理完后询问,或者,也可以是在协调网元选择需要进行干扰消除的gNB后就询问,对此,本申请实施例不作限定。Based on the identity of the interfered network equipment group, the gNB sends an inquiry message to the interfered network equipment group, or the coordinating network element may send an inquiry message to the interfered network equipment group, and the inquiry message is used to inquire about N gNBs about the interfered network equipment Whether the remote interference caused by the group still exists, for example, by inquiring the remote interference status to the interfered network device group through fallback signaling. The following uses gNB to send an inquiry message to the interfered network device group as an example for exemplification. The gNB sends an inquiry message to the interfered network equipment group, which can be inquired after the gNB that needs interference cancellation instructed by the coordination network element to perform interference cancellation, or it can be inquired after the interference cancellation processing of the gNB that performs interference cancellation is completed, or, It may also be inquired after the coordination network element selects the gNB that needs to perform interference cancellation, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
其中,gNB向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息,可以理解为,N个gNB内的任意一个或多个gNB向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息;或者,也可以理解为,N个gNB内的具有协调功能的gNB向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息;或者,也可以理解为,N个gNB内的具有代表性的gNB向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息。下文用gNB向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息为例进行示例性说明。Among them, the gNB sending an inquiry message to the interfered network device group can be understood as that any one or more gNBs in the N gNB send an inquiry message to the interfered network device group; or, it can also be understood as the information in the N gNB The gNB with the coordination function sends an inquiry message to the interfered network device group; or, it can also be understood that a representative gNB among the N gNBs sends an inquiry message to the interfered network device group. The following uses gNB to send an inquiry message to the interfered network device group as an example for exemplification.
gNB向被干扰网络设备组发送的询问消息可以通过NGAP消息传送。假设协调网元为AMF,gNB向AMF发送询问消息,AMF再向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息。该询问消息可以携带在已有消息中,如通过已有NGAP消息中的信元Request RI status IE来请求被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰状态。或者,该询问消息也可以为重新定义的NGAP消息,该重新定义的NGAP消息中包含信元Request RI status IE。应理解,信元Request RI status IE仅是一种命名方式,不做限定。The inquiry message sent by the gNB to the interfered network device group can be transmitted through NGAP messages. Assuming that the coordinating network element is AMF, gNB sends an inquiry message to AMF, and AMF sends an inquiry message to the interfered network device group. The inquiry message can be carried in an existing message, such as requesting the remote interference status of the interfered network device group through the information element Request RI status IE in the existing NGAP message. Alternatively, the inquiry message may also be a redefined NGAP message, and the redefined NGAP message includes the information element Request RI status IE. It should be understood that the information element Request RI status IE is only a naming method and is not limited.
重新定义的NGAP消息例如可以用RAN RI STATUS REQUEST message和AMF RI STATUS REQUEST message来表示。其中,RAN RI STATUS REQUEST message为gNB到AMF的消息,RAN RI STATUS REQUEST message中包含信元Request RI status IE。其中,AMF RI STATUS REQUEST message为AMF到被干扰网络设备组的消息,AMF RI STATUS REQUEST message中包含信元Request RI status IE。The redefined NGAP message can be represented by, for example, RAN RI STATUS REQUEST message and AMF RI STATUS REQUEST message. Among them, RAN RI STATUS REQUEST message is the message from gNB to AMF, and RAN RI STATUS REQUEST message contains the information element Request RI status IE. Among them, AMF RI STATUS REQUEST message is the message from AMF to the interfered network device group, and AMF RI STATUS REQUEST message contains the information element Request RI status IE.
应理解,上述各个消息的命名仅是一种命名方式,不做限定。It should be understood that the naming of each message mentioned above is only a naming method, and is not limited.
被干扰网络设备组接收到询问消息后,向协调网元或gNB回复响应消息。该响应消息用于指示远程干扰已消除,或者,该响应消息用于指示远程干扰未消除。协调网元或gNB通过收到的响应消息,可以确定远程干扰是否消除。After receiving the inquiry message, the interfered network device group returns a response message to the coordination network element or gNB. The response message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, or the response message is used to indicate that the remote interference has not been eliminated. The coordination network element or gNB can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated through the received response message.
一种可能的实现方式,该响应消息可以通过空口发送的参考信号的消息来传送。即被干扰网络设备组可以向gNB发送参考信号的消息,在该参考信号的消息中通过t个比特(bit)来指示远程干扰是否消除,其中,t为大于1或等于1的整数。假设t等于1,则可以用‘1’表示远程干扰未消除,用‘0’表示远程干扰已消除;或者,也可以用‘1’表示远程干扰已消除,用‘0’表示远程干扰未消除。In a possible implementation manner, the response message may be transmitted through a reference signal message sent through the air interface. That is, the interfered network device group may send a reference signal message to the gNB, and t bits are used in the reference signal message to indicate whether the remote interference is eliminated, where t is an integer greater than or equal to 1. Assuming that t is equal to 1, you can use '1' to indicate that the remote interference has not been eliminated, and use '0' to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated; alternatively, you can also use '1' to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, and '0' to indicate that the remote interference has not been eliminated .
又一种可能的实现方式,该响应消息可以通过NGAP消息传送。假设协调网元为AMF,被干扰网络设备组向AMF发送响应消息,AMF可以向gNB发送响应消息。例如,可以通过已有NGAP消息中的信元RI status IE来指示远程干扰是否消除。又如,也可以通过重新定义的NGAP消息来指示远程干扰是否消除,重新定义的NGAP消息如可以用RAN RI STATUS message和AMF RI STATUS message来表示。其中,RAN RI STATUS message为被干扰网络设备组到AMF的消息,RAN RI STATUS message中包含信元RI status IE。其中,AMF RI STATUS message为AMF到gNB的消息,AMF RI STATUS message中包含信元RI status IE。In yet another possible implementation manner, the response message may be transmitted through NGAP messages. Assuming that the coordinating network element is AMF, the interfered network device group sends a response message to AMF, and AMF can send a response message to gNB. For example, the information element RI status IE in the existing NGAP message can be used to indicate whether the remote interference is eliminated. For another example, the redefined NGAP message can also be used to indicate whether the remote interference is eliminated. For example, the redefined NGAP message can be represented by RAN RI STATUS message and AMF RI STATUS message. Among them, RAN RI STATUS message is the message from the interfered network device group to the AMF, and the RAN RI STATUS message contains the information element RI status IE. Among them, AMF RI STATUS message is the message from AMF to gNB, and AMF RI STATUS message contains the cell RI status IE.
应理解,协调网元为AMF时,被干扰网络设备组向AMF发送响应消息,AMF可以根据该响应消息确定远程干扰是否消除,AMF可以不向gNB再发送响应消息。当协调网元为OAM时,gNB向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息,且gNB接收来自被干扰网络设备组的响应消息,并且,gNB将接收到的响应消息上报给OAM,便于OAM确定远程干扰是否消除。It should be understood that when the coordinating network element is the AMF, the interfered network device group sends a response message to the AMF, and the AMF can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated according to the response message, and the AMF may not send a response message to the gNB again. When the coordinating network element is OAM, gNB sends an inquiry message to the interfered network device group, and gNB receives the response message from the interfered network device group, and gNB reports the received response message to OAM so that OAM can determine the remote interference Whether to eliminate.
基于方式A,gNB可以通过向被干扰网络设备组询问远程干扰状态,并根据被干扰网络设备组回复的响应消息,方便快速地确认远程干扰是否消除。Based on method A, the gNB can query the interfered network device group about the remote interference status, and according to the response message returned by the interfered network device group, it is convenient and quick to confirm whether the remote interference is eliminated.
方式B:gNB询问被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰状态,根据在预设时长内是否收到回复的响应消息来确定远程干扰是否消除。Method B: The gNB asks about the remote interference status of the interfered network device group, and determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the reply message is received within a preset time period.
基于被干扰网络设备组的标识,gNB向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息,或者,协调网元可以向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息,该询问消息用于询问N个gNB对被干扰网络设备组造成的远程干扰是否还存在,例如,通过回退信令向被干扰网络设备组询问远程干扰状态。关于gNB向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息,可参考方式A中的描述,此处不再赘述。Based on the identity of the interfered network equipment group, the gNB sends an inquiry message to the interfered network equipment group, or the coordinating network element may send an inquiry message to the interfered network equipment group, and the inquiry message is used to inquire about N gNBs about the interfered network equipment Whether the remote interference caused by the group still exists, for example, by inquiring the remote interference status to the interfered network device group through fallback signaling. Regarding the gNB sending the inquiry message to the interfered network device group, please refer to the description in Method A, which will not be repeated here.
对于gNB来说,如果在预设时长内gNB接收到响应消息,且该响应消息用于指示远程干扰已消除,则gNB确定远程干扰已消除;如果在预设时长内gNB未接收到响应消息,则gNB确定远程干扰未消除。例如,gNB向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息后,以预设时长为时间长度启动定时器,如果在定时器运行阶段gNB接收到响应消息,且该响应消息用于指示远程干扰已消除,则gNB确定远程干扰已消除;如果在定时器结束时gNB还未接收到响应消息,则gNB确定远程干扰未消除。For gNB, if the gNB receives a response message within the preset time period and the response message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, the gNB determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; if the gNB does not receive the response message within the preset time period, Then the gNB determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated. For example, after the gNB sends an inquiry message to the interfered network device group, it starts the timer with the preset duration as the time length. If the gNB receives a response message during the timer operation phase, and the response message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, then The gNB determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; if the gNB has not received a response message when the timer expires, the gNB determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
或者,对于协调网元来说,如果在预设时长内协调网元接收到响应消息,且该响应消息用于指示远程干扰已消除,则协调网元确定远程干扰已消除;如果在预设时长内协调网元未接收到响应消息,则协调网元确定远程干扰未消除。例如,协调网元向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息后,以预设时长为时间长度启动定时器,如果在定时器运行阶段协调网元接收到响应消息,且该响应消息用于指示远程干扰已消除,则协调网元确定远程干扰已消除;如果在定时器结束时协调网元还未接收到响应消息,则协调网元确定远程干扰未消 除。Or, for the coordination network element, if the coordination network element receives a response message within a preset time period, and the response message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, the coordination network element determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; If the internal coordination network element does not receive the response message, the coordination network element determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated. For example, after the coordinating network element sends an inquiry message to the interfered network device group, it starts a timer with the preset duration as the time length. If the coordinating network element receives a response message during the timer operation phase, and the response message is used to indicate remote interference If it has been eliminated, the coordination network element determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; if the coordination network element has not received a response message at the end of the timer, the coordination network element determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
其中,预设时长可以是预先设置的时长,例如协议预先规定的,或者网络设备预先配置的;或者,也可以是根据实际情况动态设置的时长;或者,也可以是根据历史情况预估的时长,对此,本申请实施例不作限定。Among them, the preset duration may be a preset duration, such as pre-defined by the protocol or pre-configured by the network device; or it may be a duration dynamically set according to actual conditions; or it may be a duration estimated based on historical conditions In this regard, the embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
其中,关于响应消息的形式,可以参考方式A中的描述,此处不再赘述。For the form of the response message, refer to the description in Method A, which will not be repeated here.
对于被干扰网络设备组来说,接收到询问消息后,如果被干扰网络设备组检测到远程干扰消除,则可以立即向gNB或协调网元回复响应消息,且该响应消息用于指示远程干扰已消除;如果被干扰网络设备组检测到远程干扰未消除,则不回复响应消息。For the interfered network device group, after receiving the inquiry message, if the interfered network device group detects that the remote interference is eliminated, it can immediately reply to the gNB or the coordinating network element with a response message, and the response message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been Elimination; if the interfered network device group detects that the remote interference has not been eliminated, it will not respond with a response message.
其中,被干扰网络设备组可以在接收到询问消息后检测远程干扰是否消除;或者,被干扰网络设备组可以在接收到询问消息后周期性的检测远程干扰是否消除;或者,被干扰网络设备组可以在接收到询问消息后不定期地的检测远程干扰是否消除;或者,被干扰网络设备组可以周期性地或不定期地的检测远程干扰是否消除,对此,本申请实施例不作限定。Among them, the interfered network equipment group can detect whether the remote interference is eliminated after receiving the inquiry message; or the interfered network equipment group may periodically detect whether the remote interference is eliminated after receiving the inquiry message; or the interfered network equipment group After receiving the inquiry message, it may be detected irregularly whether the remote interference is eliminated; or the interfered network device group may periodically or irregularly detect whether the remote interference is eliminated, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
基于方式B,gNB可以通过向被干扰网络设备组询问远程干扰状态,并根据预设时长内是否收到被干扰网络设备组回复的响应消息,可以准确地确认远程干扰是否消除,且可以节省信令开销。Based on method B, gNB can ask the interfered network device group about the remote interference status, and according to whether the response message from the interfered network device group is received within the preset time, it can accurately confirm whether the remote interference is eliminated, and it can save trust. Order overhead.
方式C:gNB根据在预设时长内是否收到通知消息来确定远程干扰是否消除。Method C: The gNB determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the notification message is received within the preset time period.
与方式B相比,方式C中,gNB或协调网元不需要向被干扰网络设备组发送询问消息。Compared with method B, in method C, the gNB or the coordination network element does not need to send an inquiry message to the interfered network device group.
对于gNB来说,如果在预设时长内gNB接收到通知消息,且该通知消息用于指示远程干扰已消除,则gNB确定远程干扰已消除;如果在预设时长内gNB未接收到通知消息,则gNB确定远程干扰未消除。例如,gNB开始进行干扰消除时,以预设时长为时间长度启动定时器,如果在定时器运行阶段gNB接收到通知消息,且该通知消息用于指示远程干扰已消除,则gNB确定远程干扰已消除;如果在定时器结束时gNB还未接收到通知消息,则gNB确定远程干扰未消除。For gNB, if the gNB receives a notification message within the preset time period, and the notification message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, the gNB determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; if the gNB does not receive the notification message within the preset time period, Then the gNB determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated. For example, when gNB starts to cancel interference, it starts a timer with a preset duration. If the gNB receives a notification message during the timer operation phase and the notification message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, the gNB determines that the remote interference has been eliminated. Elimination; if the gNB has not received the notification message at the end of the timer, the gNB determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
或者,对于协调网元来说,如果在预设时长内协调网元接收到通知消息,且该通知消息用于指示远程干扰已消除,则协调网元确定远程干扰已消除;如果在预设时长内协调网元未接收到通知消息,则协调网元确定远程干扰未消除。例如,协调网元指示gNB进行干扰消除时,可以以预设时长为时间长度启动定时器,如果在定时器运行阶段协调网元接收到通知消息,且该通知消息用于指示远程干扰已消除,则协调网元确定远程干扰已消除;如果在定时器结束时协调网元还未接收到通知消息,则协调网元确定远程干扰未消除。Or, for the coordination network element, if the coordination network element receives a notification message within the preset time period, and the notification message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, the coordination network element determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; If the internal coordination network element does not receive the notification message, the coordination network element determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated. For example, when the coordination network element instructs the gNB to perform interference cancellation, the timer can be started with a preset duration. If the coordination network element receives a notification message during the timer operation phase, and the notification message is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated, Then the coordination network element determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; if the coordination network element has not received the notification message when the timer expires, the coordination network element determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
其中,预设时长可以是预先设置的时长,例如协议预先规定的,或者网络设备预先配置的;或者,也可以是根据实际情况动态设置的时长;或者,也可以是根据历史情况预估的时长,对此,本申请实施例不作限定。Among them, the preset duration may be a preset duration, such as pre-defined by the protocol or pre-configured by the network device; or it may be a duration dynamically set according to actual conditions; or it may be a duration estimated based on historical conditions In this regard, the embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
其中,关于通知消息的形式,可以参考方式A中关于响应消息的描述,此处不再赘述。For the form of the notification message, please refer to the description of the response message in Method A, which will not be repeated here.
对于被干扰网络设备组来说,可以周期性地或不定期地检测远程干扰是否消除,如果被干扰网络设备组检测到远程干扰消除,则可以立即向gNB或协调网元发送远程干扰已消除的通知消息,该通知消息可以通过backhaul发送,也可以在空口发送的参考信号中携带;如果被干扰网络设备组检测到远程干扰未消除,则可以不发送通知消息,或者,也可 以在空口发送的参考信号中携带远程干扰未消除的消息。For the interfered network equipment group, it can periodically or irregularly detect whether the remote interference is eliminated. If the interfered network equipment group detects that the remote interference is eliminated, it can immediately send the remote interference eliminated to the gNB or the coordination network element Notification message. The notification message can be sent through backhaul or carried in the reference signal sent by the air interface; if the interfered network equipment group detects that the remote interference has not been eliminated, the notification message may not be sent, or it can be sent over the air interface The reference signal carries a message that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
基于方式C,gNB或协调网元可以根据预设时长内是否收到被干扰网络设备组发送的通知消息,可以准确地确认远程干扰是否消除,且可以节省信令开销。Based on method C, the gNB or the coordinating network element can accurately confirm whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the notification message sent by the interfered network device group is received within a preset time period, and can save signaling overhead.
方式D:gNB根据被干扰网络设备组发送的远程干扰强度信息来确定远程干扰是否消除。Method D: The gNB determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to the remote interference intensity information sent by the interfered network device group.
其中,被干扰网络设备组发送的远程干扰强度信息,即该被干扰网络设备组受到的远程干扰强度,可以是IoT值,或者也可以是其它远程干扰强度信息。该干扰强度信息可以携带在被干扰网络设备组发送的参考信号中,也可以是被干扰网络设备组专门发送的,或者,也可以是携带在如方式A所述的响应消息中。关于远程干扰强度信息的形式,不作限定。The remote interference intensity information sent by the interfered network device group, that is, the remote interference intensity received by the interfered network device group, may be an IoT value or other remote interference strength information. The interference intensity information may be carried in the reference signal sent by the interfered network equipment group, or may be specially sent by the interfered network equipment group, or may also be carried in the response message as described in way A. There is no limitation on the form of the remote interference intensity information.
对于gNB来说,可以根据是否接收到远程干扰强度信息来确定干扰是否消除,或者,也可以根据接收到的远程干扰强度信息确定干扰是否消除。例如,如果gNB接收到该远程干扰强度信息,则gNB确定远程干扰未消除;如果gNB未接收到该远程干扰强度信息,则gNB确定远程干扰消除。又如,如果gNB在预设时长内接收到该远程干扰强度信息gNB,则gNB确定远程干扰未消除;如果gNB在预设时长内未接收到该远程干扰强度信息,则gNB确定远程干扰消除。For the gNB, it can be determined whether the interference is eliminated according to whether the remote interference intensity information is received, or it can also be determined whether the interference is eliminated according to the received remote interference intensity information. For example, if the gNB receives the remote interference strength information, the gNB determines that the remote interference is not eliminated; if the gNB does not receive the remote interference strength information, the gNB determines that the remote interference is eliminated. For another example, if the gNB receives the remote interference strength information gNB within the preset time period, the gNB determines that the remote interference is not eliminated; if the gNB does not receive the remote interference strength information within the preset time period, the gNB determines that the remote interference is eliminated.
或者,对于协调网元来说,可以根据是否接收到远程干扰强度信息来确定干扰是否消除,或者,也可以根据接收到的远程干扰强度信息确定干扰是否消除。例如,如果协调网元接收到该远程干扰强度信息,则协调网元确定远程干扰未消除;如果协调网元未接收到该远程干扰强度信息,则协调网元确定远程干扰消除。又如,如果协调网元在预设时长内接收到该远程干扰强度信息协调网元,则协调网元确定远程干扰未消除;如果协调网元在预设时长内未接收到该远程干扰强度信息,则协调网元确定远程干扰消除。Alternatively, for the coordination network element, whether the interference is eliminated can be determined according to whether the remote interference intensity information is received, or it can also be determined whether the interference is eliminated according to the received remote interference intensity information. For example, if the coordination network element receives the remote interference intensity information, the coordination network element determines that the remote interference is not eliminated; if the coordination network element does not receive the remote interference intensity information, the coordination network element determines that the remote interference is eliminated. For another example, if the coordination network element receives the remote interference intensity information within the preset time period, the coordination network element determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated; if the coordination network element does not receive the remote interference intensity information within the preset time period , The coordination network element determines the remote interference cancellation.
其中,预设时长可以是预先设置的时长,例如协议预先规定的,或者网络设备预先配置的;或者,也可以是根据实际情况动态设置的时长;或者,也可以是根据历史情况预估的时长,对此,本申请实施例不作限定。Among them, the preset duration may be a preset duration, such as pre-defined by the protocol or pre-configured by the network device; or it may be a duration dynamically set according to actual conditions; or it may be a duration estimated based on historical conditions In this regard, the embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
对于被干扰网络设备组来说,可以周期性地或不定期地检测远程干扰是否消除,并向gNB或协调网元发送远程干扰强度信息。或者,如果被干扰网络设备组检测到远程干扰消除,则可以立即向gNB或协调网元发送远程干扰强度信息,该远程干扰强度信息可以在空口发送的参考信号中携带,或者,也可以是携带在如方式A所述的响应消息中;如果被干扰网络设备组检测到远程干扰未消除,则可以不发送远程干扰强度信息,或者,也可以在空口发送的参考信号中携带远程干扰未消除的消息。For the interfered network equipment group, it can periodically or irregularly detect whether the remote interference is eliminated, and send the remote interference intensity information to the gNB or the coordination network element. Or, if the interfered network equipment group detects remote interference cancellation, it can immediately send remote interference strength information to the gNB or the coordinating network element. The remote interference strength information can be carried in the reference signal sent by the air interface, or it can be carried. In the response message as described in Method A; if the interfered network device group detects that the remote interference has not been eliminated, the remote interference strength information may not be sent, or the reference signal sent by the air interface may also carry the uneliminated remote interference news.
上述仅示例性地列举了四种方式,gNB或协调网元可以基于上述任意一种方式确定远程干扰是否消除。本申请实施例并未限定于此,任何可以使得gNB或协调网元确定远程干扰是否消除的方式都落入本申请实施例的保护范围。The foregoing only exemplarily lists four methods. The gNB or the coordination network element can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated based on any of the foregoing methods. The embodiment of the present application is not limited to this, and any manner that enables the gNB or the coordinating network element to determine whether the remote interference is eliminated falls within the protection scope of the embodiment of the present application.
图8是本申请实施例的通信方法800的流程示意图。该方法涉及集中式单元和分布式单元。如图8所示,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,该方法包括:FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method 800 according to an embodiment of the present application. The method involves centralized units and distributed units. As shown in Figure 8, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which includes:
S810、DU接收来自被干扰网络设备组的参考信号。S810. The DU receives the reference signal from the interfered network device group.
N个DU接收来自被干扰网络设备组的参考信号,该N个DU均对被干扰网络设备组造成了远程干扰,也就是说,被干扰网络设备组通过空口发送参考信号,向该N个DU接 收到该参考信号,其中,N为大于1或等于1的整数。图8中为便于说明,仅列举了一个DU进行说明,该DU属于N个DU中的任意DU。N DUs receive reference signals from the interfered network equipment group, and the N DUs all cause long-range interference to the interfered network equipment group, that is, the interfered network equipment group sends reference signals to the N DUs through the air interface. The reference signal is received, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1. For the convenience of description, FIG. 8 only lists one DU for description, and the DU belongs to any DU among the N DUs.
其中,DU和被干扰网络设备组可参考方法500中的描述,此处不再赘述。For the DU and the interfered network device group, reference may be made to the description in method 500, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请实施例中,DU可以基于接收到的参考信号,自身确定是否要进行干扰消除,避免DU收到参考信号后,就单独进行干扰消除,造成DU处不必要的通信性能损失。In the embodiment of the present application, the DU can determine whether to perform interference cancellation by itself based on the received reference signal, so as to avoid the DU from performing interference cancellation separately after receiving the reference signal, causing unnecessary communication performance loss at the DU.
应理解,在本申请实施例中,进行干扰消除,也可以称为进行远程干扰消除,均是为了消除DU对被干扰网络设备组造成的远程干扰。下文为简洁,均称为进行干扰消除。It should be understood that, in the embodiments of the present application, performing interference cancellation, which may also be referred to as performing remote interference cancellation, is to eliminate the remote interference caused by the DU to the interfered network device group. The following is succinct, all referred to as performing interference cancellation.
S820,DU确定是否要进行远程干扰消除。S820: The DU determines whether to perform remote interference cancellation.
一种可能的实现方式,DU可以根据参考信号强度是否超过阈值#1来确定。In a possible implementation manner, the DU can be determined according to whether the reference signal strength exceeds the threshold #1.
DU可以根据参考信号强度和阈值#1来确定是否进行干扰消除。如,DU的参考信号强度超过阈值#1时,进行干扰消除;DU的参考信号强度未超过阈值#1时,不进行干扰消除。关于参考信号强度参考方法500中的描述,此处不再赘述。The DU can determine whether to perform interference cancellation according to the reference signal strength and threshold #1. For example, when the reference signal strength of the DU exceeds the threshold #1, interference cancellation is performed; when the reference signal strength of the DU does not exceed the threshold #1, interference cancellation is not performed. Regarding the description of the reference signal strength reference method 500, details are not repeated here.
一种情况,阈值#1可以是预先设置的阈值,例如协议预先规定的阈值,或者网络设备预先配置的阈值;或者,也可以是根据历史情况预估的阈值。In one case, the threshold #1 may be a preset threshold, such as a threshold pre-specified by a protocol, or a threshold pre-configured by a network device; or, it may also be a threshold estimated based on historical conditions.
又一种情况,阈值#1可以是CU预先向DU分配的一个阈值。其中,CU可参考方法500中的描述,不再赘述。In another case, the threshold #1 may be a threshold allocated by the CU to the DU in advance. Among them, the CU can refer to the description in the method 500, and the details are not repeated here.
具体地,DU向CU上报参考信号的信息,相应地,CU接收DU上报的参考信号的信息。其中,DU上报的参考信号的信息中携带被干扰网络设备组的标识,从而CU通过携带的被干扰网络设备组的标识,可以确定携带相同标识的DU有哪些,换句话说,可以确定远程干扰相同网络设备的DU有哪些。其中,关于DU向CU上报参考信号的信息的具体形式,可参考方法500中的S520,此处,不再赘述。Specifically, the DU reports the information of the reference signal to the CU, and accordingly, the CU receives the information of the reference signal reported by the DU. Among them, the reference signal information reported by the DU carries the identity of the interfered network device group, so that the CU can determine which DU carries the same identity by carrying the identity of the interfered network device group, in other words, it can determine the remote interference What are the DUs of the same network equipment? For the specific form of the DU reporting the information of the reference signal to the CU, refer to S520 in the method 500, which will not be repeated here.
针对携带相同标识的DU,CU分配阈值#1。例如,参考信号的信息中包括参考信号强度,CU根据该参考信号强度,确定一个阈值#1,如取N个参考信号强度的平均值等,并将该阈值#1发送给DU。又如,CU根据历史上报的参考信息中的参考信号强度,确定一个阈值#1,并将该阈值#1发送给DU。For DUs carrying the same identifier, the CU assigns threshold #1. For example, the reference signal information includes the reference signal strength, and the CU determines a threshold value #1 according to the reference signal strength, such as taking the average value of the N reference signal strengths, and sending the threshold value #1 to the DU. For another example, the CU determines a threshold #1 according to the reference signal strength in the historically reported reference information, and sends the threshold #1 to the DU.
又一种可能的实现方式,DU可以根据干扰强度是否超过阈值#2来确定。In another possible implementation manner, the DU can be determined according to whether the interference intensity exceeds the threshold #2.
DU可以根据干扰强度和阈值#2来确定是否进行干扰消除。如,DU的干扰强度超过阈值#2时,进行干扰消除;DU的干扰强度未超过阈值#2时,不进行干扰消除。关于干扰强度参考方法500中的描述,此处不再赘述。The DU can determine whether to perform interference cancellation according to the interference intensity and threshold #2. For example, when the interference intensity of DU exceeds threshold #2, interference cancellation is performed; when the interference intensity of DU does not exceed threshold #2, interference cancellation is not performed. Regarding the interference intensity, refer to the description in the method 500, which will not be repeated here.
一种情况,阈值#2可以是预先设置的阈值,例如协议预先规定的阈值,或者网络设备预先配置的阈值;或者,也可以是根据历史情况预估的阈值。In one case, the threshold #2 may be a preset threshold, such as a threshold pre-specified by a protocol or a threshold pre-configured by a network device; or, it may also be a threshold estimated based on historical conditions.
又一种情况,阈值#2可以是CU预先向DU分配的一个阈值。其中,CU可参考方法500中的描述,不再赘述。In another case, the threshold #2 may be a threshold allocated by the CU to the DU in advance. Among them, the CU can refer to the description in the method 500, and the details are not repeated here.
具体地,DU向CU上报参考信号的信息,相应地,CU接收DU上报的参考信号的信息。其中,DU上报的参考信号的信息中携带被干扰网络设备组的标识,从而CU通过携带的被干扰网络设备组的标识,可以确定携带相同标识的DU有哪些,换句话说,可以确定远程干扰相同网络设备的DU有哪些。其中,关于DU向CU上报参考信号的信息的具体形式,可参考方法500中的S520,此处,不再赘述。Specifically, the DU reports the information of the reference signal to the CU, and accordingly, the CU receives the information of the reference signal reported by the DU. Among them, the reference signal information reported by the DU carries the identity of the interfered network device group, so that the CU can determine which DU carries the same identity by carrying the identity of the interfered network device group, in other words, it can determine the remote interference What are the DUs of the same network equipment? For the specific form of the DU reporting the information of the reference signal to the CU, refer to S520 in the method 500, which will not be repeated here.
针对携带相同标识的DU,CU分配阈值#2。例如,参考信号的信息中包括干扰强度, CU根据该干扰强度,确定一个阈值#2,如取N个干扰强度的平均值等,并将该阈值#2发送给DU。又如,CU根据历史上报的参考信息中的干扰强度,确定一个阈值#2,并将该阈值#2发送给DU。For DUs carrying the same identifier, the CU allocates threshold #2. For example, the information of the reference signal includes the interference intensity, and the CU determines a threshold #2 according to the interference intensity, such as taking the average value of N interference intensities, and sends the threshold #2 to the DU. For another example, the CU determines a threshold #2 according to the interference intensity in the historically reported reference information, and sends the threshold #2 to the DU.
关于DU进行干扰消除的方法参考方法500中的描述,此处不再赘述。For the method for DU interference cancellation, refer to the description in method 500, which will not be repeated here.
可选地,DU还可以确定DU对被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰是否消除,或者,也可以理解为,CU确定DU对被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰是否消除,或者,也可以理解为,DU中进行干扰消除的DU确定对被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰是否消除。下文以DU确定远程干扰是否消除为例进行说明。Optionally, the DU can also determine whether the remote interference of the DU to the interfered network device group is eliminated, or it can also be understood as the CU determines whether the remote interference of the DU to the interfered network device group is eliminated, or it can also be understood as, The DU that performs interference cancellation in the DU determines whether the remote interference to the interfered network device group is eliminated. The following is an example of DU determining whether the remote interference is eliminated.
S830、DU确定远程干扰是否消除。S830. The DU determines whether the remote interference is eliminated.
在本申请实施例中,干扰是否消除,换句话说,干扰是否还存在,换句话说,远程干扰是否消除或远程干扰是否还存在。干扰是否消除可以表示干扰是否完全消除;或者,也可以表示干扰强度是否超过预设阈值;或者,也可以表示干扰强度是否降低;或者,也可以表示干扰下降程度是否超过预设值等等。对此,本申请实施例不作限定,下文均用干扰是否消除来表示。其中,预设阈值或预设值可以是预先规定的阈值,例如协议预先规定的,或者网络设备预先配置的阈值或者预设值,对此,不作限定。In the embodiments of the present application, whether the interference is eliminated, in other words, whether the interference still exists, in other words, whether the remote interference is eliminated or whether the remote interference still exists. Whether the interference is eliminated may indicate whether the interference is completely eliminated; or, it may also indicate whether the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold; or, it may also indicate whether the interference intensity is reduced; or, it may also indicate whether the degree of interference reduction exceeds a preset value, and so on. In this regard, the embodiment of the present application does not make a limitation, and the following is used to indicate whether the interference is eliminated. The preset threshold or the preset value may be a preset threshold, for example, a predetermined threshold or a preset value pre-configured by a protocol or a network device, which is not limited.
相应地,在本申请实施例中,远程干扰已消除,换句话说干扰已消除,可以表示远程干扰已完全消除,或者,也可以表示干扰强度未超过预设阈值,或者,也可以表示干扰强度已降低,或者,也可以表示干扰强度下降程度超过预设值等等。对此,本申请实施例不作限定,下文均用远程干扰已消除来表示。Correspondingly, in the embodiments of the present application, the remote interference has been eliminated, in other words the interference has been eliminated, it can mean that the remote interference has been completely eliminated, or it can also mean that the interference intensity does not exceed the preset threshold, or it can also mean the interference intensity Already reduced, or, it can also mean that the degree of interference intensity has decreased beyond a preset value, and so on. In this regard, the embodiment of the present application does not make a limitation, and the following is used to indicate that the remote interference has been eliminated.
相应地,在本申请实施例中,远程干扰未消除,换句话说干扰未消除,可以表示远程干扰未完全消除,或者,也可以表示干扰强度超过预设阈值,或者,也可以表示干扰强度没有变化或者干扰强度上升,或者,也可以表示干扰强度下降程度未超过预设值等等。对此,本申请实施例不作限定,下文均用远程干扰未消除来表示。Correspondingly, in the embodiments of the present application, the remote interference is not eliminated, in other words, the interference is not eliminated, which may indicate that the remote interference is not completely eliminated, or it may indicate that the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold, or it may also indicate that the interference intensity is not eliminated. Change or increase in interference intensity, or it can also mean that the degree of interference intensity decline does not exceed a preset value, and so on. In this regard, the embodiment of the present application does not make a limitation, and the following is used to indicate that the remote interference is not eliminated.
一种可能的情况,DU确定远程干扰消除。In a possible situation, the DU determines remote interference cancellation.
在该情况下,DU保持当前配置,或者DU保持当前的通信资源配置,直到RIM流程结束。关于RIM流程,参考图4的描述,此处不再赘述。In this case, the DU keeps the current configuration, or the DU keeps the current communication resource configuration until the RIM process ends. Regarding the RIM process, refer to the description of FIG. 4, which will not be repeated here.
又一种可能的情况,DU确定远程干扰未消除。In another possible situation, the DU determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated.
在该情况下,DU可以通知CU远程干扰未消除,且CU可以给DU分配阈值#3和/或阈值#4,DU继续执行S820直到确定远程干扰已消除;或者,CU可以给剩余DU分配阈值#3和/或阈值#4,剩余DU继续执行S820直到确定远程干扰已消除,剩余DU为DU中没有进行干扰消除的DU。其中,阈值#3小于预设的阈值#1,阈值#4小于预设的阈值#2。In this case, the DU can notify the CU that the remote interference is not eliminated, and the CU can assign threshold #3 and/or threshold #4 to the DU, and the DU continues to perform S820 until it is determined that the remote interference has been eliminated; or, the CU can assign a threshold to the remaining DUs #3 and/or threshold #4, the remaining DUs continue to perform S820 until it is determined that the remote interference has been eliminated, and the remaining DUs are DUs that have not undergone interference cancellation. Among them, the threshold #3 is less than the preset threshold #1, and the threshold #4 is less than the preset threshold #2.
或者,在该情况下,DU中进行干扰消除的DU还可以进一步降低下行功率或者停止通信,直到DU确定远程干扰已消除。Or, in this case, the DU that performs interference cancellation in the DU can further reduce the downlink power or stop communication until the DU determines that the remote interference has been eliminated.
其中,阈值#3和阈值#4的确定方式有很多:Among them, there are many ways to determine threshold #3 and threshold #4:
一种可能的方式,阈值#3可以是预先设置的阈值,例如协议预先规定的阈值,或者网络设备预先配置的阈值;或者,也可以是根据历史情况预估的阈值。换句话说,可以预先配置多个阈值,例如包括阈值#1和阈值#3,或者,包括阈值#2和阈值#4。In a possible way, the threshold #3 may be a preset threshold, such as a threshold pre-specified by a protocol, or a threshold pre-configured by a network device; or, it may be a threshold estimated based on historical conditions. In other words, multiple thresholds may be configured in advance, for example, including threshold #1 and threshold #3, or including threshold #2 and threshold #4.
又一种可能的方式,阈值#3可以是CU预先向DU分配的一个阈值。例如,CU向DU分配阈值#1时,分配阈值#3,即CU向DU分配阈值#1和阈值#3。又如,CU向DU分配 阈值#2时,分配阈值#4,即CU向DU分配阈值#2和阈值#4。In another possible manner, the threshold #3 may be a threshold allocated by the CU to the DU in advance. For example, when the CU allocates the threshold #1 to the DU, the threshold #3 is allocated, that is, the CU allocates the threshold #1 and the threshold #3 to the DU. For another example, when the CU allocates the threshold #2 to the DU, the threshold #4 is allocated, that is, the CU allocates the threshold #2 and the threshold #4 to the DU.
又一种可能的方式,阈值#3可以是CU根据之前接收到的参考信号的信息向DU分配的一个阈值。当DU确定远程干扰未消除时,CU再基于之前接收的参考信号的信息再为DU分配的一个阈值,如阈值#3、阈值#4。In another possible manner, the threshold #3 may be a threshold allocated by the CU to the DU according to the information of the previously received reference signal. When the DU determines that the remote interference has not been eliminated, the CU then allocates a threshold for the DU based on the information of the previously received reference signal, such as threshold #3 and threshold #4.
又一种可能的方式,当DU确定远程干扰未消除时,DU再向CU上报参考信号的信息,相应地,CU接收DU上报的参考信号的信息。关于DU向CU上报参考信号的信息的具体形式,可参考方法500中的S520,此处,不再赘述。阈值#3或阈值#4可以是CU根据该上报的参考信号的信息为DU分配的阈值。In another possible way, when the DU determines that the remote interference is not eliminated, the DU reports the information of the reference signal to the CU, and accordingly, the CU receives the information of the reference signal reported by the DU. Regarding the specific form of the DU reporting the information of the reference signal to the CU, reference may be made to S520 in the method 500, which will not be repeated here. The threshold #3 or the threshold #4 may be a threshold allocated by the CU to the DU according to the reported information of the reference signal.
上述介绍了几种确定阈值#3或阈值#4的可能的方式,本申请并未限定于此。The foregoing introduces several possible ways of determining the threshold #3 or the threshold #4, and the application is not limited thereto.
下文中,关于DU确定远程干扰消除或DU确定远程干扰未消除后的动作,不再赘述。In the following, the actions after the DU determines that the remote interference is eliminated or the DU determines that the remote interference is not eliminated will not be repeated.
DU可以通过以下任一方式,来确定远程干扰是否消除。DU can use any of the following methods to determine whether the remote interference is eliminated.
方式A:DU询问被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰状态,并接收被干扰网络设备组回复的响应消息;Method A: DU inquires about the remote interference status of the interfered network equipment group, and receives the response message from the interfered network equipment group;
方式B:DU询问被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰状态,根据在预设时长内是否收到回复的响应消息来确定远程干扰是否消除;Method B: DU inquires about the remote interference status of the interfered network equipment group, and determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the reply message is received within a preset time period;
方式C:DU根据在预设时长内是否收到通知消息来确定远程干扰是否消除;Method C: DU determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the notification message is received within the preset time period;
方式D:CU根据被干扰网络设备组发送的远程干扰强度信息来确定远程干扰是否消除。Method D: The CU determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to the remote interference intensity information sent by the interfered network device group.
上述方式A、方式B、方式C、方式D可参考方法500中的描述,此处不再赘述。For the above method A, method B, method C, and method D, please refer to the description in method 500, which will not be repeated here.
图9本申请实施例的通信方法900的流程示意图。该方法涉及AMF或OAM、以及基站。如图9所示,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,该方法包括:FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method 900 according to an embodiment of the present application. The method involves AMF or OAM, and base stations. As shown in Figure 9, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which includes:
S910、gNB接收来自被干扰网络设备组的参考信号。S910. The gNB receives the reference signal from the interfered network device group.
N个gNB接收来自被干扰网络设备组的参考信号,该N个gNB均对被干扰网络设备组造成了远程干扰,也就是说,被干扰网络设备组通过空口发送参考信号,该N个gNB接收到该参考信号,其中,N为大于1或等于1的整数。图9中为便于说明,仅列举了一个gNB进行说明,该gNB属于N个gNB中的任意gNB。N gNBs receive the reference signal from the interfered network equipment group, and the N gNBs all cause long-range interference to the interfered network equipment group, that is, the interfered network equipment group sends the reference signal through the air interface, and the N gNB receives To the reference signal, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1. For ease of description, FIG. 9 only lists one gNB for description, and the gNB belongs to any gNB among the N gNBs.
其中,关于gNB以及被干扰网络设备组可参考方法700中的描述,此处不再赘述。For the gNB and the interfered network device group, please refer to the description in the method 700, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请实施例中,gNB可以基于接收到的参考信号,自身确定是否要进行干扰消除,避免gNB收到参考信号后,就单独进行干扰消除,造成gNB处不必要的通信性能损失。In the embodiment of the present application, the gNB may determine whether to perform interference cancellation by itself based on the received reference signal, so as to prevent the gNB from performing interference cancellation separately after receiving the reference signal, causing unnecessary communication performance loss at the gNB.
应理解,在本申请实施例中,进行干扰消除,也可以称为进行远程干扰消除,均是为了消除gNB对被干扰网络设备组造成的远程干扰。下文为简洁,均称为进行干扰消除。It should be understood that, in the embodiments of the present application, performing interference cancellation, which can also be referred to as performing remote interference cancellation, is to eliminate the remote interference caused by the gNB to the interfered network device group. The following is succinct, all referred to as performing interference cancellation.
S920,gNB确定是否要进行干扰消除。S920, the gNB determines whether to perform interference cancellation.
一种可能的实现方式,gNB可以根据参考信号强度是否超过阈值#5来确定。In a possible implementation manner, gNB can be determined according to whether the reference signal strength exceeds threshold #5.
gNB可以根据参考信号强度和阈值#5来确定是否进行干扰消除。如,参考信号强度超过阈值#5时,进行干扰消除;参考信号强度未超过阈值#5时,不进行干扰消除。关于参考信号强度参考方法500中的描述,此处不再赘述。The gNB can determine whether to perform interference cancellation according to the reference signal strength and threshold #5. For example, when the reference signal strength exceeds threshold #5, interference cancellation is performed; when the reference signal strength does not exceed threshold #5, interference cancellation is not performed. Regarding the description of the reference signal strength reference method 500, details are not repeated here.
一种情况,阈值#5可以是预先设置的阈值,例如协议预先规定的阈值,或者网络设备预先配置的阈值;或者,也可以是根据历史情况预估的阈值。In one case, the threshold #5 may be a preset threshold, such as a threshold pre-defined by a protocol, or a threshold pre-configured by a network device; or, it may also be a threshold estimated based on historical conditions.
又一种情况,阈值#5可以是协调网元预先向gNB分配的一个阈值。其中,关于协调 网元可参考方法700中的描述,不再赘述。In another case, the threshold #5 may be a threshold pre-allocated by the coordination network element to the gNB. For the coordination network element, reference may be made to the description in method 700, which will not be repeated.
具体地,gNB向协调网元上报参考信号的信息。其中,gNB上报的参考信号的信息中携带被干扰网络设备组的标识,从而协调网元通过携带的被干扰网络设备组的标识,可以确定携带相同标识的gNB有哪些,换句话说,可以确定远程干扰相同网络设备的gNB有哪些。其中,关于gNB向协调网元上报参考信号的信息的具体形式,可参考方法700中的S720,此处,不再赘述。Specifically, the gNB reports the information of the reference signal to the coordination network element. Among them, the reference signal information reported by the gNB carries the identity of the interfered network device group, so that the coordinated network element can determine which gNB carries the same identity by carrying the identity of the interfered network device group, in other words, it can be determined What are the gNBs that interfere with the same network equipment remotely? For the specific form of the information of the reference signal reported by the gNB to the coordination network element, refer to S720 in the method 700, which will not be repeated here.
针对携带相同标识的gNB,协调网元分配阈值#5。例如,参考信号的信息中包括参考信号强度,协调网元根据该参考信号强度,确定一个阈值#5,如取N个参考信号强度的平均值等,并将该阈值#5发送给gNB。又如,协调网元根据历史上报的参考信息中的参考信号强度,确定一个阈值#5,并将该阈值#5发送给gNB。For the gNB carrying the same identifier, the coordination network element allocates threshold #5. For example, the reference signal information includes the reference signal strength, and the coordination network element determines a threshold #5 according to the reference signal strength, such as taking the average value of the N reference signal strengths, and sending the threshold #5 to the gNB. For another example, the coordination network element determines a threshold #5 according to the reference signal strength in the historically reported reference information, and sends the threshold #5 to the gNB.
又一种可能的实现方式,gNB可以根据干扰强度是否超过阈值#6来确定。In another possible implementation manner, the gNB may be determined according to whether the interference intensity exceeds the threshold #6.
gNB可以根据干扰强度和阈值#6来确定是否进行干扰消除。如,干扰强度超过阈值#6时,进行干扰消除;干扰强度未超过阈值#6时,不进行干扰消除。关于干扰强度参考方法500中的描述,此处不再赘述。The gNB can determine whether to perform interference cancellation according to the interference intensity and threshold #6. For example, when the interference intensity exceeds threshold #6, interference cancellation is performed; when the interference intensity does not exceed threshold #6, interference cancellation is not performed. Regarding the interference intensity, refer to the description in the method 500, which will not be repeated here.
一种情况,阈值#6可以是预先设置的阈值,例如协议预先规定的阈值,或者网络设备预先配置的阈值;或者,也可以是根据历史情况预估的阈值。In one case, the threshold #6 may be a preset threshold, such as a threshold pre-defined by a protocol or a threshold pre-configured by a network device; or, it may also be a threshold estimated based on historical conditions.
又一种情况,阈值#6可以是协调网元预先向gNB分配的一个阈值。其中,协调网元可参考方法700中的描述,不再赘述。In another case, the threshold #6 may be a threshold pre-allocated to the gNB by the coordination network element. Among them, the coordination network element can refer to the description in the method 700, which will not be repeated.
具体地,gNB向协调网元上报参考信号的信息。其中,gNB上报的参考信号的信息中携带被干扰网络设备组的标识,从而协调网元通过携带的被干扰网络设备组的标识,可以确定携带相同标识的gNB有哪些,换句话说,可以确定远程干扰相同网络设备的gNB有哪些。其中,关于gNB向协调网元上报参考信号的信息的具体形式,可参考方法700中的S720,此处,不再赘述。Specifically, the gNB reports the information of the reference signal to the coordination network element. Among them, the reference signal information reported by the gNB carries the identity of the interfered network device group, so that the coordinated network element can determine which gNB carries the same identity by carrying the identity of the interfered network device group, in other words, it can be determined What are the gNBs that interfere with the same network equipment remotely? For the specific form of the information of the reference signal reported by the gNB to the coordination network element, refer to S720 in the method 700, which will not be repeated here.
针对携带相同标识的gNB,协调网元分配阈值#6。例如,参考信号的信息中包括干扰强度,协调网元根据该干扰强度,确定一个阈值#6,如取N个干扰强度的平均值等,并将该阈值#6发送给gNB。又如,协调网元根据历史上报的参考信息中的干扰强度,确定一个阈值#6,并将该阈值#6发送给gNB。For the gNB carrying the same identifier, the coordination network element assigns threshold #6. For example, the information of the reference signal includes the interference intensity, and the coordination network element determines a threshold #6 according to the interference intensity, such as taking the average value of N interference intensities, and sends the threshold #6 to the gNB. For another example, the coordination network element determines a threshold #6 according to the interference intensity in the historically reported reference information, and sends the threshold #6 to the gNB.
gNB进行干扰消除的方法参考方法700中的描述,此处不再赘述。For the method of interference cancellation by the gNB, refer to the description in method 700, which will not be repeated here.
可选地,gNB还可以确定被干扰网络设备组的干扰是否消除。Optionally, the gNB may also determine whether the interference of the interfered network device group is eliminated.
S930、gNB确定远程干扰是否消除。S930, gNB determines whether the remote interference is eliminated.
在本申请实施例中,远程干扰是否消除,换句话说,远程干扰是否还存在,换句话说,干扰是否消除或干扰是否还存在。远程干扰是否消除可以表示远程干扰是否完全消除;或者,也可以表示干扰强度是否超过预设阈值;或者,也可以表示干扰强度是否降低;或者,也可以表示干扰下降程度是否大于预设值等等。对此,本申请实施例不作限定,下文均用干扰是否消除来表示。其中,预设阈值或预设值可以是预先规定的阈值,例如协议预先规定的,或者网络设备预先配置的阈值或者预设值,对此,不作限定。In the embodiments of the present application, whether the remote interference is eliminated, in other words, whether the remote interference still exists, in other words, whether the interference is eliminated or whether the interference still exists. Whether the remote interference is eliminated can indicate whether the remote interference is completely eliminated; or, it can also indicate whether the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold; or, it can also indicate whether the interference intensity is reduced; or, it can also indicate whether the interference reduction degree is greater than a preset value, etc. . In this regard, the embodiment of the present application does not make a limitation, and the following is used to indicate whether the interference is eliminated. The preset threshold or the preset value may be a preset threshold, for example, a predetermined threshold or a preset value pre-configured by a protocol or a network device, which is not limited.
相应地,在本申请实施例中,远程干扰已消除,换句话说干扰已消除,可以表示远程干扰已完全消除,或者,也可以表示干扰强度未超过预设阈值,或者,也可以表示干扰强度已降低,或者,也可以表示干扰强度下降程度超过预设值等等。对此,本申请实施例不 作限定,下文均用远程干扰已消除来表示。Correspondingly, in the embodiments of the present application, the remote interference has been eliminated, in other words the interference has been eliminated, it can mean that the remote interference has been completely eliminated, or it can also mean that the interference intensity does not exceed the preset threshold, or it can also mean the interference intensity Already reduced, or, it can also mean that the degree of interference intensity has decreased beyond a preset value, and so on. In this regard, the embodiments of the present application are not limited, and the following are all expressed as long-range interference eliminated.
相应地,在本申请实施例中,远程干扰未消除,换句话说干扰未消除,可以表示远程干扰未完全消除,或者,也可以表示干扰强度超过预设阈值,或者,也可以表示干扰强度没有变化或者干扰强度上升,或者,也可以表示干扰强度下降程度未超过预设值等等。对此,本申请实施例不作限定,下文均用远程干扰未消除来表示。Correspondingly, in the embodiments of the present application, the remote interference is not eliminated, in other words, the interference is not eliminated, which may indicate that the remote interference is not completely eliminated, or it may indicate that the interference intensity exceeds a preset threshold, or it may also indicate that the interference intensity is not eliminated. Change or increase in interference intensity, or it can also mean that the degree of interference intensity decline does not exceed a preset value, and so on. In this regard, the embodiment of the present application does not make a limitation, and the following is used to indicate that the remote interference is not eliminated.
gNB确定远程干扰是否消除,也可以理解为,协调网元确定gNB对被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰是否消除。当协调网元为AMF时,AMF确定远程干扰是否消除即可,或者,AMF也可以将确定远程干扰是否消除的结果发送给gNB,便于gNB确定远程干扰是否消除;当协调网元为OAM时,gNB确定远程干扰是否消除即可,或者,gNB也可以将确定远程干扰是否消除的结果上报给OAM,便于OAM确定远程干扰是否消除。下面以gNB确定远程干扰是否消除为例进行示例性说明。The gNB determines whether the remote interference is eliminated, which can also be understood as the coordination network element determines whether the remote interference of the gNB to the interfered network device group is eliminated. When the coordination network element is AMF, AMF can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated, or AMF can also send the result of determining whether the remote interference is eliminated to gNB, so that the gNB can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated; when the coordination network element is OAM, The gNB may determine whether the remote interference is eliminated, or the gNB may also report the result of determining whether the remote interference is eliminated to the OAM, so that the OAM can determine whether the remote interference is eliminated. The following is an example of determining whether the long-range interference is eliminated by the gNB as an example.
一种可能的情况,gNB确定远程干扰消除。In one possible situation, gNB determines remote interference cancellation.
在该情况下gNB保持当前配置,或者gNB保持当前的通信资源配置,直到RIM流程结束。关于RIM流程,参考图4的描述,此处不再赘述。In this case, the gNB keeps the current configuration, or the gNB keeps the current communication resource configuration until the end of the RIM process. Regarding the RIM process, refer to the description of FIG. 4, which will not be repeated here.
又一种可能的情况,gNB确定远程干扰未消除。In another possible situation, the gNB determines that the remote interference is not eliminated.
在该情况下,协调网元可以给gNB分配阈值#7和/或阈值#8,gNB继续执行S920直到协调网元或gNB确定远程干扰已消除;或者,协调网元可以给剩余gNB分配阈值#7和/或阈值#8,剩余gNB继续执行S520直到协调网元或gNB确定远程干扰已消除,剩余gNB为N个gNB中没有进行干扰消除的gNB。其中,阈值#7小于预设的阈值#5,阈值#8小于预设的阈值#6。或者,在该情况下,N个gNB中进行干扰消除的gNB还可以进一步降低下行功率或者停止通信,直到gNB确定远程干扰已消除。In this case, the coordination network element can assign threshold #7 and/or threshold #8 to gNB, and gNB continues to perform S920 until the coordination network element or gNB determines that the remote interference has been eliminated; or, the coordination network element can assign thresholds to the remaining gNB# 7 and/or threshold #8, the remaining gNBs continue to perform S520 until the coordination network element or the gNB determines that the remote interference has been eliminated, and the remaining gNBs are gNBs that have not undergone interference cancellation among the N gNBs. Among them, the threshold #7 is less than the preset threshold #5, and the threshold #8 is less than the preset threshold #6. Or, in this case, the gNB that performs interference cancellation among the N gNBs may further reduce the downlink power or stop communication until the gNB determines that the remote interference has been eliminated.
其中,阈值#7和阈值#8的确定方式有很多:Among them, there are many ways to determine threshold #7 and threshold #8:
一种可能的方式,阈值#7可以是预先设置的阈值,例如协议预先规定的阈值,或者网络设备预先配置的阈值;或者,也可以是根据历史情况预估的阈值。换句话说,可以预先配置多个阈值,例如包括阈值#5和阈值#7,或者,包括阈值#6和阈值#8。In a possible manner, threshold #7 may be a preset threshold, such as a threshold pre-specified by a protocol, or a threshold pre-configured by a network device; or, it may also be a threshold estimated based on historical conditions. In other words, multiple thresholds may be configured in advance, for example, including threshold #5 and threshold #7, or including threshold #6 and threshold #8.
又一种可能的方式,阈值#7可以是协调网元预先向gNB分配的一个阈值。例如,协调网元向gNB分配阈值#5时,分配阈值#7,即协调网元向gNB分配阈值#5和阈值#7。又如,协调网元向gNB分配阈值#6时,分配阈值#8,即协调网元向gNB分配阈值#6和阈值#8。In another possible manner, the threshold #7 may be a threshold that the coordination network element allocates to the gNB in advance. For example, when the coordination network element allocates threshold #5 to gNB, threshold #7 is allocated, that is, the coordination network element allocates threshold #5 and threshold #7 to gNB. For another example, when the coordination network element allocates threshold #6 to gNB, threshold #8 is allocated, that is, the coordination network element allocates threshold #6 and threshold #8 to gNB.
又一种可能的方式,阈值#7可以是协调网元根据之前接收到的参考信号信的信息向gNB分配的一个阈值。当gNB确定远程干扰未消除时,协调网元再基于之前接收的参考信号的信息再为gNB分配的一个阈值,如阈值#7、阈值#8。In another possible manner, the threshold #7 may be a threshold allocated by the coordination network element to the gNB according to the information of the previously received reference signal. When the gNB determines that the remote interference is not eliminated, the coordination network element allocates a threshold for the gNB based on the information of the previously received reference signal, such as threshold #7 and threshold #8.
又一种可能的方式,当gNB确定远程干扰未消除时,gNB再向协调网元上报参考信号的信息,相应地,协调网元接收gNB上报的参考信号的信息。关于gNB向协调网元上报参考信号的信息的具体形式,可参考方法700中的S720,此处,不再赘述。阈值#7或阈值#8可以是协调网元根据该上报的参考信号的信息为gNB分配的阈值。In another possible manner, when the gNB determines that the remote interference is not eliminated, the gNB then reports the information of the reference signal to the coordination network element, and accordingly, the coordination network element receives the information of the reference signal reported by the gNB. Regarding the specific form of the gNB reporting the information of the reference signal to the coordination network element, refer to S720 in the method 700, which will not be repeated here. The threshold #7 or the threshold #8 may be the threshold allocated by the coordination network element to the gNB according to the reported information of the reference signal.
上述介绍了几种确定阈值#7或阈值#8的可能的方式,本申请并未限定于此。The foregoing has introduced several possible ways of determining the threshold #7 or the threshold #8, and the application is not limited thereto.
下文中,关于gNB确定远程干扰消除或gNB确定远程干扰未消除后的动作,不再赘述。In the following, the actions after the gNB determines that the remote interference is eliminated or the gNB determines that the remote interference is not eliminated will not be repeated.
gNB可以通过以下任一方式,来确定远程干扰是否消除。The gNB can use any of the following methods to determine whether the remote interference is eliminated.
方式A:gNB询问被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰状态,并接收被干扰网络设备组回复的响应消息;Method A: gNB inquires about the remote interference status of the interfered network device group, and receives the response message from the interfered network device group;
方式B:gNB询问被干扰网络设备组的远程干扰状态,根据在预设时长内是否收到回复的响应消息来确定远程干扰是否消除;Method B: gNB asks about the remote interference status of the interfered network device group, and determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the response message is received within a preset time period;
方式C:gNB根据在预设时长内是否收到通知消息来确定远程干扰是否消除;Method C: gNB determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to whether the notification message is received within the preset time period;
方式D:gNB根据被干扰网络设备组发送的远程干扰强度信息来确定远程干扰是否消除。Method D: The gNB determines whether the remote interference is eliminated according to the remote interference intensity information sent by the interfered network device group.
上述方式A、方式B、方式C、方式D可参考方法700中的描述,此处不再赘述。For the foregoing manner A, manner B, manner C, and manner D, reference may be made to the description in method 700, which is not repeated here.
上文中结合附图1至图9介绍了本申请实施例的通信方法,下文将结合附图继续介绍本申请实施例中的装置。The communication method of the embodiment of the present application is described above with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9, and the device in the embodiment of the present application will be described below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
图10是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图。如图10所示,该通信装置1000可以包括通信单元1010和处理单元1020。FIG. 10 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 10, the communication device 1000 may include a communication unit 1010 and a processing unit 1020.
在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置1000可实现对应于上文方法实施例中集中式单元或协调网元(如上述的AMF、OAM、网络设备等)执行的步骤或者流程,例如,可以为集中式单元或协调网元,或者配置于集中式单元或协调网元中的芯片或电路。In a possible design, the communication device 1000 can implement steps or processes corresponding to the centralized unit or coordination network element (such as the above-mentioned AMF, OAM, network equipment, etc.) in the above method embodiment. For example, It is a centralized unit or coordinated network element, or a chip or circuit configured in a centralized unit or coordinated network element.
一种可能的实现方式,通信单元1010用于:获取来自N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息,其中,N为大于1或等于1的整数,参考信号的信息包含被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息;通信单元1010还用于:基于该N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息,该第一网络设备向该N个第二网络设备中的M个第二网络设备发送用于指示进行干扰消除的信息,其中,M为大于或等于1的整数,且M小于或等于N。In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit 1010 is configured to: obtain information about reference signals from N second network devices, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and the information about the reference signal includes the interfered network device group The communication unit 1010 is further configured to: based on the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices, the first network device sends instructions to M second network devices among the N second network devices Information for interference cancellation, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to N.
可选地,N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息包含的所述被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息相同,参考信号的信息包括参考信号强度的信息,M个第二网络设备的参考信号强度超过第一阈值;或者,M个第二网络设备的参考信号强度大于或等于(N-M)个第二网络设备的参考信号强度,(N-M)个第二网络设备和M个第二网络设备中的网络设备不同。Optionally, the information of the reference signals of the N second network devices includes the same identification information of the interfered network device group, the information of the reference signals includes information about the strength of the reference signal, and the reference signals of the M second network devices The strength exceeds the first threshold; or, the reference signal strength of M second network devices is greater than or equal to the reference signal strength of (NM) second network devices, among (NM) second network devices and M second network devices The network equipment is different.
可选地,N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息包含的所述被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息相同,参考信号的信息包括干扰强度的信息或受到远程干扰的强度的信息,M个第二网络设备的干扰强度或所述M个第二网络设备受到远程干扰的强度超过第二阈值;或者,M个第二网络设备的干扰强度大于或等于(N-M)个第二网络设备的干扰强度,或,所述M个第二网络设备的受到远程干扰的强度大于或等于(N-M)个第二网络设备的受到远程干扰的强度,(N-M)个第二网络设备和M个第二网络设备中的网络设备不同。Optionally, the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices includes the same identification information of the interfered network device group, the information of the reference signal includes the information of the interference intensity or the information of the intensity of the remote interference, and M The interference intensity of the second network device or the intensity of remote interference received by the M second network devices exceeds the second threshold; or, the interference intensity of the M second network devices is greater than or equal to the interference of (NM) second network devices Strength, or, the strength of the M second network devices received by the remote interference is greater than or equal to the strength of the (NM) second network devices received by the remote interference, (NM) the second network device and the M second network The network equipment in the device is different.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:发送询问信息,询问信息用于询问被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to send inquiry information, and the inquiry information is used to inquire about the interference state of the interfered network device group.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:接收针对询问信息的响应信息。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: receive response information for the inquiry information.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:接收通知消息,通知消息用于通知被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: receive a notification message, which is used to notify that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the non-eliminated state.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:在预设时长内接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: within a preset time period, receive information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息包含的被干扰 的网络设备组的标识信息相同,当在预设时长内未接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息时,向(N-M)个第二网络设备中的T个第二网络设备发送用于指示进行干扰消除的消息,(N-M)个第二网络设备和M个第二网络设备中的网络设备不同,其中,T为大于或等于1的整数,且T小于或等于(N-M)。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: the information of the reference signals of the N second network devices contains the same identification information of the interfered network device group, and when the information indicating the interfered network device is not received within a preset time period When the interference state of the network device group is the information of the eliminated state, send a message for indicating interference cancellation to T second network devices in the (NM) second network device, (NM) second network device It is different from the network device in the M second network devices, where T is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and T is less than or equal to (NM).
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息包含的被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息相同,当处理单元1020确定被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态时,向(N-M)个第二网络设备中的T个第二网络设备发送用于指示进行干扰消除的消息,(N-M)个第二网络设备和M个第二网络设备中的网络设备不同,其中,T为大于或等于1的整数,且T小于或等于(N-M)。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices contains the same identification information of the interfered network device group, when the processing unit 1020 determines the interference state of the interfered network device group When it is in the un-cancelled state, send a message indicating interference cancellation to T second network devices in (NM) second network devices, and one of (NM) second network devices and M second network devices The network devices are different, where T is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and T is less than or equal to (NM).
可选地,第二网络设备为接入网设备的分布式单元;或者,第二网络设备为基站。Optionally, the second network device is a distributed unit of an access network device; or, the second network device is a base station.
又一种可能的实现方式,通信单元1010用于:接收来自N个第二网络设备的第一参考信号的信息,其中,N为大于1或等于1的整数,第一参考信号的信息包含被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息;通信单元1010还用于:基于N个第二网络设备的第一参考信号的信息,向N个第二网络设备发送用于指示第一条件的第一信息,第一条件用于N个第二网络设备判断是否要进行干扰消除。In yet another possible implementation manner, the communication unit 1010 is configured to: receive information about the first reference signal from N second network devices, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and the information about the first reference signal includes The identification information of the interfering network device group; the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: send first information indicating the first condition to the N second network devices based on the information of the first reference signal of the N second network devices, The first condition is used for N second network devices to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
可选地,第一信息包括第一阈值;第一条件是:第一参考信号强度超过第一阈值。Optionally, the first information includes a first threshold; the first condition is: the strength of the first reference signal exceeds the first threshold.
可选地,第一信息包括第二阈值;第一条件是:第一干扰强度或受到远程干扰的强度超过第二阈值。Optionally, the first information includes a second threshold; the first condition is that the first interference intensity or the intensity of remote interference exceeds the second threshold.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:发送询问信息,询问信息用于询问被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to send inquiry information, and the inquiry information is used to inquire about the interference state of the interfered network device group.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:接收针对询问信息的响应信息。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: receive response information for the inquiry information.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:接收通知消息,通知消息用于通知被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态或未消除状态。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: receive a notification message, which is used to notify that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state or the uneliminated state.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:在预设时长内接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: within a preset time period, receive information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息包含的被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息相同,当在预设时长内未接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息时,向N个第二网络设备发送用于指示第二条件的第二信息,第二条件用于N个第二网络设备判断是否要进行干扰消除。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: the information of the reference signals of the N second network devices contains the same identification information of the interfered network device group, and when the information indicating the interfered network device is not received within a preset time period When the interference state of the network device group is the information of the eliminated state, the second information indicating the second condition is sent to the N second network devices, and the second condition is used for the N second network devices to determine whether to interfere eliminate.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息包含的被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息相同,当处理单元1020确定被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态时,向N个第二网络设备发送用于指示第二条件的第二信息,第二条件用于N个第二网络设备判断是否要进行干扰消除。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices contains the same identification information of the interfered network device group, when the processing unit 1020 determines the interference state of the interfered network device group When it is in the un-cancelled state, the second information indicating the second condition is sent to the N second network devices, and the second condition is used by the N second network devices to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
可选地,第二信息包括第三阈值,以及第二条件是:第一参考信号强度超过第三阈值,第三阈值小于第一阈值;或,第二信息包括第四阈值,以及第二条件是:第一干扰强度或受到远程干扰的强度超过第四阈值,第四阈值小于第二阈值。Optionally, the second information includes a third threshold, and the second condition is: the first reference signal strength exceeds the third threshold, and the third threshold is less than the first threshold; or, the second information includes a fourth threshold, and the second condition Yes: the first interference intensity or the intensity of remote interference exceeds the fourth threshold, and the fourth threshold is less than the second threshold.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息包含的被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息相同,当在预设时长内未接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息时,获取来自N个第二网络设备的第二参考信号的信息; 基于N个第二网络设备的第二参考信号的信息,向N个第二网络设备发送用于指示第三条件的第三信息,第三条件用于N个第二网络设备判断是否要进行干扰消除。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: the information of the reference signals of the N second network devices contains the same identification information of the interfered network device group, and when the information indicating the interfered network device is not received within a preset time period When the interference state of the network device group is the information of the eliminated state, obtain the information of the second reference signal from the N second network devices; based on the information of the second reference signal of the N second network devices, send the information to the Nth The second network device sends third information used to indicate the third condition, and the third condition is used by N second network devices to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:当处理单元1020确定被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态时,获取来自N个第二网络设备的第二参考信号的信息;基于N个第二网络设备的第二参考信号的信息,向N个第二网络设备发送用于指示第三条件的第三信息,第三条件用于N个第二网络设备判断是否要进行干扰消除。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: when the processing unit 1020 determines that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the non-cancelled state, obtain information about the second reference signal from the N second network devices; The second reference signal information of the second network device sends third information indicating the third condition to the N second network devices. The third condition is used by the N second network devices to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
可选地,第三信息包括第五阈值,以及第三条件是:第二参考信号强度超过第五阈值,第五阈值小于第一阈值;或,第三信息包括第六阈值,以及第三条件是:第二干扰强度或受到远程干扰的强度超过第六阈值,第六阈值小于第二阈值。Optionally, the third information includes a fifth threshold, and the third condition is: the second reference signal strength exceeds the fifth threshold, and the fifth threshold is less than the first threshold; or, the third information includes the sixth threshold, and the third condition Yes: the second interference intensity or the intensity of the remote interference exceeds the sixth threshold, and the sixth threshold is less than the second threshold.
可选地,第二网络设备为接入网设备的集中式单元;或者,第二网络设备为基站。Optionally, the second network device is a centralized unit of the access network device; or, the second network device is a base station.
具体地,该通信装置1000可实现对应于根据本申请实施例的方法500、方法700、方法800、方法900中的集中式单元或协调网元执行的步骤或者流程,该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行方法500、方法700、方法800、方法900中的集中式单元或协调网元执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现方法500、方法700、方法800、方法900的相应流程。Specifically, the communication device 1000 can implement the steps or processes performed by the centralized unit or the coordination network element in the method 500, the method 700, the method 800, and the method 900 according to the embodiments of the present application. The communication device 1000 may include The centralized unit in the method 500, the method 700, the method 800, and the method 900 or the unit that coordinates the method executed by the network element. In addition, each unit in the communication device 1000 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding processes of the method 500, the method 700, the method 800, and the method 900, respectively.
应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
在另一种可能的设计中,该通信装置1000可实现对应于上文方法实施例中的分布式单元或网络设备(如gNB)执行的步骤或者流程,例如,可以为分布式单元或网络设备,或者配置于分布式单元或网络设备中的芯片或电路。In another possible design, the communication device 1000 can implement the steps or processes performed by the distributed unit or network device (such as gNB) in the above method embodiment. For example, it can be a distributed unit or network device. , Or a chip or circuit configured in a distributed unit or network device.
一种可能的实现方式,通信单元1010用于:向第一网络设备发送参考信号的信息,参考信号的信息包含被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息;通信单元1010还用于:获取来自第一网络设备基于参考信号的信息确定的指示信息,指示信息用于指示装置1000进行干扰消除;处理单元1020用于:基于指示信息,进行干扰消除。In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit 1010 is used to: send information about the reference signal to the first network device, and the information about the reference signal includes the identification information of the interfered network device group; the communication unit 1010 is also used to: obtain information from the first network device. The network equipment determines the indication information based on the information of the reference signal, the indication information is used to instruct the apparatus 1000 to perform interference cancellation; the processing unit 1020 is used to: perform interference cancellation based on the indication information.
可选地,参考信号的信息包括以下至少一项:参考信号强度的信息、干扰强度的信息、或者受到远程干扰的强度的信息。Optionally, the information of the reference signal includes at least one of the following: information of the strength of the reference signal, information of the interference strength, or information of the strength of the remote interference.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:发送询问信息,询问信息用于询问被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to send inquiry information, and the inquiry information is used to inquire about the interference state of the interfered network device group.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:接收针对询问信息的响应信息。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: receive response information for the inquiry information.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:在预设时长内接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: within a preset time period, receive information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state.
可选地,处理单元1020还用于从参考信号中解决被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态。Optionally, the processing unit 1020 is further configured to resolve the interference state of the interfered network device group from the reference signal.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:当处理单元1020确定被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态时,向第一网络设备发送通知信息,通知信息用于通知第一网络设备被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: when the processing unit 1020 determines that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the non-eliminated state, send notification information to the first network device, and the notification information is used to notify the first network device The interfered state of the interfered network device group is the uneliminated state.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:当处理单元1020确定被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态时,向第一网络设备发送通知信息,通知信息用于通知第一网络设备被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: when the processing unit 1020 determines that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state, send notification information to the first network device, and the notification information is used to notify the first network device The interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:当在预设时长内未接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设 备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息时,向第一网络设备发送通知信息,通知信息用于通知第一网络设备被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: send notification information to the first network device when the information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state is not received within a preset time period, The notification information is used to notify the first network device that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the non-eliminated state.
可选地,第一网络设备为接入网设备的一个或多个分布式单元;或者,第一网络设备为核心网设备或网络管理设备;或者,第一网络设备为基站。Optionally, the first network device is one or more distributed units of the access network device; or, the first network device is a core network device or a network management device; or, the first network device is a base station.
又一种可能的实现方式,通信单元1010用于:接收第一参考信号;处理单元1020用于:当满足第一条件时,进行干扰消除。In another possible implementation manner, the communication unit 1010 is configured to receive the first reference signal; the processing unit 1020 is configured to perform interference cancellation when the first condition is satisfied.
可选地,第一条件是:第一参考信号强度超过第一阈值。Optionally, the first condition is: the first reference signal strength exceeds the first threshold.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:获取来自第一网络设备的第一阈值。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: obtain the first threshold value from the first network device.
可选地,第一条件是:第一干扰强度或受到远程干扰的强度超过第二阈值。Optionally, the first condition is that: the first interference intensity or the intensity of remote interference exceeds a second threshold.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:获取来自第一网络设备的第二阈值。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: obtain a second threshold value from the first network device.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:发送询问信息,询问信息用于询问被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to send inquiry information, and the inquiry information is used to inquire about the interference state of the interfered network device group.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:第一网络设备接收针对询问信息的响应信息。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: the first network device receives response information for the inquiry information.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:在预设时长内接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: within a preset time period, receive information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state.
可选地,处理单元1020还用于:当在预设时长内未接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息时,以及满足第二条件时,进行干扰消除。Optionally, the processing unit 1020 is further configured to: perform interference when the information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state is not received within a preset time period, and when the second condition is satisfied eliminate.
可选地,处理单元1020还用于:当确定被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态时,以及满足第二条件时,进行干扰消除。Optionally, the processing unit 1020 is further configured to: when it is determined that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the non-cancelled state, and when the second condition is met, perform interference cancellation.
可选地,第二条件是:第一参考信号强度超过第三阈值,第三阈值小于第一阈值;或,第二条件是:第一干扰强度或受到远程干扰的强度超过第四阈值,第四阈值小于第二阈值,第一干扰强度是基于第一参考信号确定的。Optionally, the second condition is: the first reference signal strength exceeds a third threshold, and the third threshold is less than the first threshold; or, the second condition is: the first interference strength or the strength of remote interference exceeds the fourth threshold, The four threshold value is smaller than the second threshold value, and the first interference intensity is determined based on the first reference signal.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:获取来自第一网络设备的第三阈值或第四阈值。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: obtain a third threshold or a fourth threshold from the first network device.
可选地,当在预设时长内未接收到用于指示被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息时,通信单元1010还用于:接收第二参考信号;当满足第三条件时,处理单元1020还用于:进行干扰消除。Optionally, when the information indicating that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state is not received within the preset time period, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: receive the second reference signal; Under the three conditions, the processing unit 1020 is also used to: perform interference cancellation.
可选地,当确定被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态时,通信单元1010还用于:接收第二参考信号;当满足第三条件时,处理单元1020还用于:进行干扰消除。Optionally, when it is determined that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the un-cancelled state, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: receive the second reference signal; when the third condition is met, the processing unit 1020 is further configured to: Interference elimination.
可选地,第三条件是:第二参考信号强度超过第五阈值,第五阈值小于第一阈值;或,第三条件是:第二干扰强度或受到远程干扰的强度超过第六阈值,第六阈值小于第二阈值,第二干扰强度是基于第二参考信号确定的。Optionally, the third condition is: the second reference signal strength exceeds the fifth threshold, and the fifth threshold is less than the first threshold; or, the third condition is: the second interference strength or the strength of the remote interference exceeds the sixth threshold, The sixth threshold is less than the second threshold, and the second interference intensity is determined based on the second reference signal.
可选地,通信单元1010还用于:获取来自第一网络设备的第五阈值或第六阈值。Optionally, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to: obtain a fifth threshold or a sixth threshold from the first network device.
可选地,第一网络设备为接入网设备的一个或多个分布式单元;或者,第一网络设备为核心网设备或网络管理设备;或者,第一网络设备为基站。Optionally, the first network device is one or more distributed units of the access network device; or, the first network device is a core network device or a network management device; or, the first network device is a base station.
具体地,该通信装置1000可实现对应于根据本申请实施例的方法500、方法700、方法800、方法900中的分布式单元或网络设备执行的步骤或者流程,该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行方法500、方法700、方法800、方法900中的分布式单元或网络设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现方法500、方法700、方法800、方法900的相应流程。Specifically, the communication apparatus 1000 can implement the steps or processes executed by the distributed unit or network equipment in the method 500, the method 700, the method 800, and the method 900 according to the embodiments of the present application. The communication apparatus 1000 may include A unit that executes the method 500, the method 700, the method 800, and the method 900 performed by the distributed unit or the network device. In addition, each unit in the communication device 1000 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding processes of the method 500, the method 700, the method 800, and the method 900, respectively.
应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
图11是本申请实施例的装置1100的结构示意图。该装置可以实现以上实施例中由集中式单元所执行的各个步骤的单元。例如,可以执行方法500或方法800中由集中式单元所执行的方法。该装置1100包括:FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus 1100 according to an embodiment of the present application. The device can implement the units of each step executed by the centralized unit in the above embodiments. For example, the method executed by the centralized unit in method 500 or method 800 may be executed. The device 1100 includes:
存储器1110,用于存储程序;The memory 1110 is used to store programs;
通信接口1120,用于和其他设备进行通信;Communication interface 1120, used to communicate with other devices;
处理器1130,用于执行存储器1110中的程序,当所述程序被执行时,所述处理器1130用于通过所述通信接口1120获取来自N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息,其中,N为大于1或等于1的整数,参考信号的信息包含被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息;以及基于N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息,向N个第二网络设备中的M个第二网络设备发送用于指示进行干扰消除的信息,其中,M为大于或等于1的整数,且M小于或等于N。The processor 1130 is configured to execute a program in the memory 1110. When the program is executed, the processor 1130 is configured to obtain information about reference signals from N second network devices through the communication interface 1120, where: N is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1, and the information of the reference signal includes the identification information of the interfered network device group; and based on the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices, it is sent to M of the N second network devices The second network device sends information for indicating interference cancellation, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to N.
或者,or,
当所述程序被执行时,所述处理器1130用于通过所述通信接口1120获取来自N个第二网络设备的第一参考信号的信息,其中,N为大于1或等于1的整数,第一参考信号的信息包含被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息;以及基于N个第二网络设备的第一参考信号的信息,向N个第二网络设备发送用于指示第一条件的第一信息,第一条件用于N个第二网络设备判断是否要进行干扰消除。When the program is executed, the processor 1130 is configured to obtain information about the first reference signal from N second network devices through the communication interface 1120, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and The information of a reference signal includes the identification information of the interfered network device group; and based on the information of the first reference signal of the N second network devices, the first information indicating the first condition is sent to the N second network devices , The first condition is used for N second network devices to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
图12是本申请实施例的装置1200的结构示意图。该装置可以实现以上实施例中由协调网元所执行的各个步骤的单元。例如,可以执行方法700或方法900中由协调网元所执行的方法。该装置1200包括:FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus 1200 according to an embodiment of the present application. The device can implement the units of each step executed by the coordination network element in the above embodiment. For example, the method executed by the coordination network element in method 700 or method 900 may be executed. The device 1200 includes:
存储器1210,用于存储程序;The memory 1210 is used to store programs;
通信接口1220,用于和其他设备进行通信;The communication interface 1220 is used to communicate with other devices;
处理器1230,用于执行存储器1210中的程序,当所述程序被执行时,所述处理器1230用于通过所述通信接口1220获取来自N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息,其中,N为大于1或等于1的整数,参考信号的信息包含被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息;以及基于N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息,向N个第二网络设备中的M个第二网络设备发送用于指示进行干扰消除的信息,其中,M为大于或等于1的整数,且M小于或等于N。The processor 1230 is configured to execute a program in the memory 1210. When the program is executed, the processor 1230 is configured to obtain reference signal information from N second network devices through the communication interface 1220, where: N is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1, and the information of the reference signal includes the identification information of the interfered network device group; and based on the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices, it is sent to M of the N second network devices The second network device sends information for indicating interference cancellation, where M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to N.
或者,or,
当所述程序被执行时,所述处理器1230用于通过所述通信接口1220获取来自N个第二网络设备的第一参考信号的信息,其中,N为大于1或等于1的整数,第一参考信号的信息包含被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息;以及基于N个第二网络设备的第一参考信号的信息,向N个第二网络设备发送用于指示第一条件的第一信息,第一条件用于N个第二网络设备判断是否要进行干扰消除。When the program is executed, the processor 1230 is configured to obtain information of the first reference signal from N second network devices through the communication interface 1220, where N is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and The information of a reference signal includes the identification information of the interfered network device group; and based on the information of the first reference signal of the N second network devices, the first information indicating the first condition is sent to the N second network devices , The first condition is used for N second network devices to determine whether to perform interference cancellation.
图13是本申请实施例的装置1300的结构示意图。该装置可以实现以上实施例中由分布式单元所执行的各个步骤的单元。例如,可以执行方法500或方法800中由分布式单元所执行的方法。该装置1300包括:FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus 1300 according to an embodiment of the present application. The device can implement the units of each step executed by the distributed unit in the above embodiments. For example, a method executed by a distributed unit in method 500 or method 800 may be executed. The device 1300 includes:
存储器1310,用于存储程序;The memory 1310 is used to store programs;
通信接口1320,用于和其他设备进行通信;Communication interface 1320, used to communicate with other devices;
处理器1330,用于执行存储器1310中的程序,当所述程序被执行时,所述处理器1320用于通过通信接口1330向第一网络设备发送参考信号的信息,参考信号的信息包含被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息;以及获取来自第一网络设备基于参考信号的信息确定的指示信息,指示信息用于指示第二网络设备进行干扰消除;以及所述处理器1320用于基于指示信息,进行干扰消除。The processor 1330 is configured to execute a program in the memory 1310. When the program is executed, the processor 1320 is configured to send reference signal information to the first network device through the communication interface 1330, and the reference signal information includes the interfered And obtaining indication information determined by the first network device based on the information of the reference signal, the indication information being used to instruct the second network device to perform interference cancellation; and the processor 1320 is configured to be based on the indication information, Perform interference cancellation.
或者,or,
当所述程序被执行时,所述处理器1320用于通过通信接口1330接收第一参考信号的信息;以及所述处理器1320用于当第一参考信号的信息满足第一条件时,进行干扰消除。When the program is executed, the processor 1320 is configured to receive the information of the first reference signal through the communication interface 1330; and the processor 1320 is configured to perform interference when the information of the first reference signal meets the first condition eliminate.
图14是本申请实施例的装置1400的结构示意图。该装置可以实现以上实施例中由网络设备(如gNB)所执行的各个步骤的单元。例如,可以执行方法700或方法900中由网络设备所执行的方法。该装置1400包括:FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a device 1400 according to an embodiment of the present application. The device can implement the units of each step executed by the network device (such as gNB) in the above embodiment. For example, the method executed by the network device in method 700 or method 900 may be executed. The device 1400 includes:
存储器1410,用于存储程序;The memory 1410 is used to store programs;
通信接口1420,用于和其他设备进行通信;Communication interface 1420, used to communicate with other devices;
处理器1430,用于执行存储器1410中的程序,当所述程序被执行时,所述处理器1420用于通过通信接口1430向第一网络设备发送参考信号的信息,参考信号的信息包含被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息;以及获取来自第一网络设备基于参考信号的信息确定的指示信息,指示信息用于指示第二网络设备进行干扰消除;以及所述处理器1420用于基于指示信息,进行干扰消除。The processor 1430 is configured to execute a program in the memory 1410. When the program is executed, the processor 1420 is configured to send reference signal information to the first network device through the communication interface 1430, and the reference signal information includes the interfered Identification information of the network device group; and obtaining indication information determined by the first network device based on the information of the reference signal, where the indication information is used to instruct the second network device to perform interference cancellation; and the processor 1420 is used to, based on the indication information, Perform interference cancellation.
或者,or,
当所述程序被执行时,所述处理器1420用于通过通信接口1430接收第一参考信号的信息;以及所述处理器1420用于当第一参考信号的信息满足第一条件时,进行干扰消除。When the program is executed, the processor 1420 is configured to receive the information of the first reference signal through the communication interface 1430; and the processor 1420 is configured to perform interference when the information of the first reference signal meets the first condition eliminate.
可选地,上述通信接口(1120,1220,1320,1420)可以是接收器或者发送器,或者也可以是收发器。Optionally, the aforementioned communication interface (1120, 1220, 1320, 1420) may be a receiver or a transmitter, or may also be a transceiver.
在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。为避免重复,这里不再详细描述。In the implementation process, the steps of the above method can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor. The software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
应注意,本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步 骤。It should be noted that the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability. In the implementation process, the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software. The above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components . The methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。应注意,本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It can be understood that the memory in the embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Among them, the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electronic Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. The volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of exemplary but not restrictive description, many forms of RAM are available, such as static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) ) And direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM). It should be noted that the memories of the systems and methods described herein are intended to include, but are not limited to, these and any other suitable types of memories.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码,当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行方法500、方法700、方法800、方法900所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。According to the method provided by the embodiments of the present application, the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the method 500, method 700, The method in any one of the embodiments shown in method 800 and method 900.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机可读介质,该计算机可读介质存储有程序代码,当该程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行方法500、方法700、方法800、方法900所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。According to the method provided by the embodiments of the present application, the present application also provides a computer-readable medium that stores program code, and when the program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the method 500, method 700, The method in any one of the embodiments shown in method 800 and method 900.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如,固态硬盘(solid state disc,SSD))等。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a high-density digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (solid state disc, SSD)) etc.
在本说明书中使用的术语“部件”、“模块”、“系统”等用于表示计算机相关的实体、硬件、固件、硬件和软件的组合、软件、或执行中的软件。例如,部件可以是但不限于,在处理器上运行的进程、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行线程、程序和/或计算机。通过图示,在计算设备上运行的应用和计算设备都可以是部件。一个或多个部件可驻留在进程和/或执行线程中,部件可位于一个计算机上和/或分布在两个或更多个计算机之间。此外,这些部件可从在上面存储有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质执行。部件可例如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如来自与本地系统、分布式系统和/或网络间的另一部 件交互的二个部件的数据,例如通过信号与其它系统交互的互联网)的信号通过本地和/或远程进程来通信。The terms "component", "module", "system", etc. used in this specification are used to denote computer-related entities, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution. For example, the component may be, but is not limited to, a process, a processor, an object, an executable file, an execution thread, a program, and/or a computer running on a processor. Through the illustration, both the application running on the computing device and the computing device can be components. One or more components may reside in processes and/or threads of execution, and components may be located on one computer and/or distributed between two or more computers. In addition, these components can be executed from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon. A component can be based on a signal having one or more data packets (for example, data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。A person of ordinary skill in the art may be aware that the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in combination with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are executed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and conciseness of description, the specific working process of the above-described system, device, and unit can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components can be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, the functional units in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of this application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific implementations of this application, but the protection scope of this application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in this application. Should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (30)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, characterized in that it comprises:
    第一网络设备获取来自N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息,其中,N为大于1或等于1的整数,所述参考信号的信息包含被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息;The first network device obtains reference signal information from N second network devices, where N is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1, and the reference signal information includes identification information of the interfered network device group;
    基于所述N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息,所述第一网络设备向所述N个第二网络设备中的M个第二网络设备发送用于指示进行干扰消除的信息,其中,M为大于或等于1的整数,且M小于或等于N。Based on the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices, the first network device sends information for indicating interference cancellation to M second network devices among the N second network devices, where: M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to N.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息包含的所述被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息相同,所述参考信号的信息包括参考信号强度的信息,The method according to claim 1, wherein the information of the reference signals of the N second network devices includes the same identification information of the interfered network device group, and the information of the reference signals includes the reference signal Intensity information,
    所述M个第二网络设备的参考信号强度超过第一阈值;或者,The reference signal strength of the M second network devices exceeds the first threshold; or,
    所述M个第二网络设备的参考信号强度大于或等于(N-M)个第二网络设备的参考信号强度,所述(N-M)个第二网络设备和所述M个第二网络设备中的网络设备不同。The reference signal strength of the M second network devices is greater than or equal to the reference signal strength of the (NM) second network devices, and the network of the (NM) second network devices and the M second network devices The equipment is different.
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息包含的所述被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息相同,所述参考信号的信息包括干扰强度的信息或受到远程干扰的强度的信息,The method according to claim 1, wherein the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices includes the same identification information of the interfered network device group, and the information of the reference signal includes the interference intensity Information or the intensity of remote interference,
    所述M个第二网络设备的干扰强度或所述M个第二网络设备受到远程干扰的强度超过第二阈值;或者,The interference intensity of the M second network devices or the intensity of remote interference received by the M second network devices exceeds a second threshold; or,
    所述M个第二网络设备的干扰强度大于或等于(N-M)个第二网络设备的干扰强度,或,所述M个第二网络设备的受到远程干扰的强度大于或等于(N-M)个第二网络设备的受到远程干扰的强度,所述(N-M)个第二网络设备和所述M个第二网络设备中的网络设备不同。The interference strength of the M second network devices is greater than or equal to the interference strength of the (NM) second network device, or the strength of the M second network devices subject to remote interference is greater than or equal to the (NM) Second, the strength of the remote interference received by the network equipment, and the network equipment in the (NM) second network equipment is different from the network equipment in the M second network equipment.
  4. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述第一网络设备发送询问信息,所述询问信息用于询问所述被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态。The first network device sends query information, and the query information is used to query the interference state of the interfered network device group.
  5. 根据权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述第一网络设备接收通知消息,所述通知消息用于通知所述被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态。The first network device receives a notification message, where the notification message is used to notify that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the non-eliminated state.
  6. 根据权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息包含的所述被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息相同,The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the information of the reference signals of the N second network devices includes the same identification information of the interfered network device group,
    当所述第一网络设备在预设时长内未接收到用于指示所述被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息时,所述方法还包括:When the first network device does not receive the information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state within the preset time period, the method further includes:
    所述第一网络设备向(N-M)个第二网络设备中的T个第二网络设备发送用于指示进行干扰消除的消息,所述(N-M)个第二网络设备和所述M个第二网络设备中的网络设备不同,The first network device sends a message for instructing interference cancellation to T second network devices among the (NM) second network devices, and the (NM) second network devices and the M second network devices The network equipment in the network equipment is different,
    其中,T为大于或等于1的整数,且T小于或等于(N-M)。Wherein, T is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and T is less than or equal to (N-M).
  7. 根据权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述第一网络设备在预设时长内接收到用于指示所述被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息。The first network device receives the information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state within a preset time period.
  8. 根据权利要求1至7中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息包含的所述被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息相同,The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the information of the reference signals of the N second network devices includes the same identification information of the interfered network device group,
    当所述被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态时,所述方法还包括:When the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the non-eliminated state, the method further includes:
    所述第一网络设备向(N-M)个第二网络设备中的T个第二网络设备发送用于指示进行干扰消除的消息,所述(N-M)个第二网络设备和所述M个第二网络设备中的网络设备不同,The first network device sends a message for instructing interference cancellation to T second network devices among the (NM) second network devices, and the (NM) second network devices and the M second network devices The network equipment in the network equipment is different,
    其中,T为大于或等于1的整数,且T小于或等于(N-M)。Wherein, T is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and T is less than or equal to (N-M).
  9. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, characterized in that it comprises:
    第二网络设备向第一网络设备发送参考信号的信息,所述参考信号的信息包含被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息;The second network device sends information about the reference signal to the first network device, where the information about the reference signal includes the identification information of the interfered network device group;
    所述第二网络设备获取来自所述第一网络设备基于所述参考信号的信息确定的指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述第二网络设备进行干扰消除;Acquiring, by the second network device, indication information determined by the first network device based on the information of the reference signal, where the indication information is used to instruct the second network device to perform interference cancellation;
    基于所述指示信息,所述第二网络设备进行干扰消除。Based on the instruction information, the second network device performs interference cancellation.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述参考信号的信息包括以下至少一项:参考信号强度的信息、干扰强度的信息、或者受到远程干扰的强度的信息。The method according to claim 9, wherein the information of the reference signal comprises at least one of the following: information of reference signal strength, information of interference strength, or information of the strength of remote interference.
  11. 根据权利要求9或10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 9 or 10, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述第二网络设备发送询问信息,所述询问信息用于询问所述干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态。The second network device sends query information, and the query information is used to query the interference status of the interfered network device group.
  12. 根据权利要求9至11中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 9 to 11, wherein:
    当所述被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态时,或者,当所述第二网络设备在预设时长内未接收到用于指示所述被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息时,When the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the non-eliminated state, or, when the second network device does not receive the interfered state indicating the interfered network device group within a preset time period When the status is deleted,
    所述方法还包括:The method also includes:
    所述第二网络设备向所述第一网络设备发送通知信息,所述通知信息用于通知所述第一网络设备所述被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态。The second network device sends notification information to the first network device, where the notification information is used to notify the first network device that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is an uneliminated state.
  13. 根据权利要求9至11中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 9 to 11, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述第二网络设备在预设时长内接收到用于指示所述被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息。The second network device receives the information used to indicate that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state within a preset time period.
  14. 根据权利要求1至13中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 1 to 13, characterized in that,
    所述第一网络设备为接入网设备的一个或多个集中式单元,所述第二网络设备为接入网设备的分布式单元;或者The first network device is one or more centralized units of the access network device, and the second network device is a distributed unit of the access network device; or
    所述第一网络设备为核心网设备或网络管理设备,所述第二网络设备为基站;或者The first network device is a core network device or a network management device, and the second network device is a base station; or
    所述第一网络设备为基站,所述第二网络设备为基站。The first network device is a base station, and the second network device is a base station.
  15. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized by comprising:
    收发器,用于获取来自N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息,其中,N为大于1或等于1的整数,所述参考信号的信息包含被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息;A transceiver, configured to obtain reference signal information from N second network devices, where N is an integer greater than 1 or equal to 1, and the reference signal information includes identification information of the interfered network device group;
    所述收发器还用于,基于所述N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息,向所述N个第 二网络设备中的M个第二网络设备发送用于指示进行干扰消除的信息,其中,M为大于或等于1的整数,且M小于或等于N。The transceiver is further configured to, based on the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices, send information for indicating interference cancellation to M second network devices among the N second network devices, Wherein, M is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and M is less than or equal to N.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的装置,其特征在于,所述N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息包含的所述被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息相同,所述参考信号的信息包括参考信号强度的信息,The apparatus according to claim 15, wherein the information of the reference signals of the N second network devices includes the same identification information of the interfered network device group, and the information of the reference signals includes the reference signal Intensity information,
    所述M个第二网络设备的参考信号强度超过第一阈值;或者,The reference signal strength of the M second network devices exceeds the first threshold; or,
    所述M个第二网络设备的参考信号强度大于或等于(N-M)个第二网络设备的参考信号强度,所述(N-M)个第二网络设备和所述M个第二网络设备中的网络设备不同。The reference signal strength of the M second network devices is greater than or equal to the reference signal strength of the (NM) second network devices, and the network of the (NM) second network devices and the M second network devices The equipment is different.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的装置,其特征在于,所述N个第二网络设备的参考信号的信息包含的所述被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息相同,所述参考信号的信息包括干扰强度的信息或受到远程干扰的强度的信息,The apparatus according to claim 16, wherein the information of the reference signal of the N second network devices includes the same identification information of the interfered network device group, and the information of the reference signal includes the interference intensity Information or the intensity of remote interference,
    所述M个第二网络设备的干扰强度或所述M个第二网络设备受到远程干扰的强度超过第二阈值;或者,The interference intensity of the M second network devices or the intensity of remote interference received by the M second network devices exceeds a second threshold; or,
    所述M个第二网络设备的干扰强度大于或等于(N-M)个第二网络设备的干扰强度,或,所述M个第二网络设备的受到远程干扰的强度大于或等于(N-M)个第二网络设备的受到远程干扰的强度,所述(N-M)个第二网络设备和所述M个第二网络设备中的网络设备不同。The interference strength of the M second network devices is greater than or equal to the interference strength of the (NM) second network device, or the strength of the M second network devices subject to remote interference is greater than or equal to the (NM) Second, the strength of the remote interference received by the network equipment, and the network equipment in the (NM) second network equipment is different from the network equipment in the M second network equipment.
  18. 根据权利要求16至17中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发器还用于:The device according to any one of claims 16 to 17, wherein the transceiver is further used for:
    发送询问信息,所述询问信息用于询问所述被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态。Send inquiry information, where the inquiry information is used to inquire about the interference state of the interfered network device group.
  19. 根据权利要求16至18中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发器还用于:The device according to any one of claims 16 to 18, wherein the transceiver is further configured to:
    接收通知消息,所述通知消息用于通知所述被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态。Receive a notification message, where the notification message is used to notify that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the non-eliminated state.
  20. 根据权利要求16至18中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置还包括:The device according to any one of claims 16 to 18, wherein the device further comprises:
    当在预设时长内未接收到用于指示所述被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息时,When the information indicating that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state is not received within the preset time period,
    所述收发器还用于向(N-M)个第二网络设备中的T个第二网络设备发送用于指示进行干扰消除的消息,所述(N-M)个第二网络设备和所述M个第二网络设备中的网络设备不同,The transceiver is further configured to send a message for instructing interference cancellation to T second network devices in the (NM) second network device, and the (NM) second network device and the M second network device Second, the network equipment in the network equipment is different,
    其中,T为大于或等于1的整数,且T小于或等于(N-M)。Wherein, T is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and T is less than or equal to (N-M).
  21. 根据权利要求16至18中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发器还用于:The device according to any one of claims 16 to 18, wherein the transceiver is further configured to:
    在预设时长内接收到用于指示所述被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息。The information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state is received within the preset time period.
  22. 根据权利要求16至19中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,当所述被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态时,The apparatus according to any one of claims 16 to 19, wherein when the interference state of the interfered network device group is an un-cancelled state,
    所述收发器还用于:The transceiver is also used for:
    向(N-M)个第二网络设备中的T个第二网络设备发送用于指示进行干扰消除的消息,所述(N-M)个第二网络设备和所述M个第二网络设备中的网络设备不同,Send a message for instructing interference cancellation to T second network devices in (NM) second network devices, the (NM) second network devices and the network devices in the M second network devices different,
    其中,T为大于或等于1的整数,且T小于或等于(N-M)。Wherein, T is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and T is less than or equal to (N-M).
  23. 根据权利要求16至22中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to any one of claims 16 to 22, characterized in that:
    所述装置为接入网设备的一个或多个集中式单元,所述第二网络设备为接入网设备的分布式单元;或者The apparatus is one or more centralized units of the access network equipment, and the second network equipment is a distributed unit of the access network equipment; or
    所述装置为核心网设备或网络管理设备,所述第二网络设备为基站;或者The device is a core network device or a network management device, and the second network device is a base station; or
    所述装置为所述N个第二网络设备中的一个或多个,所述第二网络设备为基站。The apparatus is one or more of the N second network devices, and the second network device is a base station.
  24. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized by comprising:
    收发器,用于向第一网络设备发送参考信号的信息,所述参考信号的信息包含被干扰的网络设备组的标识信息;A transceiver, configured to send reference signal information to the first network device, where the reference signal information includes the identification information of the interfered network device group;
    所述收发器还用于,获取来自所述第一网络设备基于所述参考信号的信息确定的指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述第二网络设备进行干扰消除;The transceiver is further configured to obtain indication information determined by the first network device based on the information of the reference signal, where the indication information is used to instruct the second network device to perform interference cancellation;
    基于所述指示信息,所述第二网络设备进行干扰消除。Based on the instruction information, the second network device performs interference cancellation.
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的装置,其特征在于,所述参考信号的信息包括以下至少一项:参考信号强度的信息、干扰强度的信息、或者受到远程干扰的强度的信息。The apparatus according to claim 24, wherein the information of the reference signal comprises at least one of the following: information of reference signal strength, information of interference strength, or information of the strength of remote interference.
  26. 根据权利要求24或25所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发器还用于:The device according to claim 24 or 25, wherein the transceiver is further used for:
    发送询问信息,所述询问信息用于询问所述干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态。Send inquiry information, where the inquiry information is used to inquire about the interference state of the interfering network device group.
  27. 根据权利要求24至26中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to any one of claims 24 to 26, wherein:
    当所述被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态时,或者,当在预设时长内未接收到用于指示所述被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息时,When the interfered state of the interfered network device group is in the non-cancelled state, or, when the interference state indicating that the interfered network device group is in the canceled state is not received within a preset time period Information,
    所述收发器还用于:The transceiver is also used for:
    向所述第一网络设备发送通知信息,所述通知信息用于通知所述第一网络设备所述被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为未消除状态。Sending notification information to the first network device, where the notification information is used to notify the first network device that the interfered state of the interfered network device group is an uneliminated state.
  28. 根据权利要求24至26中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发器还用于:The device according to any one of claims 24 to 26, wherein the transceiver is further configured to:
    在预设时长内接收到用于指示所述被干扰的网络设备组的受干扰状态为已消除状态的信息。The information indicating that the interference state of the interfered network device group is the eliminated state is received within the preset time period.
  29. 根据权利要求24至28中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to any one of claims 24 to 28, wherein:
    所述第一网络设备为接入网设备的一个或多个集中式单元,所述装置为接入网设备的分布式单元;或者The first network device is one or more centralized units of the access network device, and the device is a distributed unit of the access network device; or
    所述第一网络设备为核心网设备或网络管理设备,所述装置为基站;或者The first network device is a core network device or a network management device, and the device is a base station; or
    所述第一网络设备为基站,所述装置为基站。The first network device is a base station, and the device is a base station.
  30. 一种计算机存储介质,其特征在于,其上存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被计算机执行时使得,所述计算机执行:如权利要求1至8中任一项所述的方法,或,如权利要求9至14中任一项所述的方法。A computer storage medium, characterized in that a computer program is stored thereon, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer executes: the method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, or, as The method of any one of claims 9-14.
PCT/CN2020/074221 2019-02-15 2020-02-03 Communication method and communication device WO2020164402A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910117846.6A CN111586723B (en) 2019-02-15 2019-02-15 Communication method and communication device
CN201910117846.6 2019-02-15

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020164402A1 true WO2020164402A1 (en) 2020-08-20

Family

ID=72043997

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/074221 WO2020164402A1 (en) 2019-02-15 2020-02-03 Communication method and communication device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN111586723B (en)
WO (1) WO2020164402A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102655650A (en) * 2012-01-05 2012-09-05 电信科学技术研究院 Method and equipment for positioning far-end interference base station
US20130070816A1 (en) * 2011-09-20 2013-03-21 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Communication device, base station, and base station system
CN103563477A (en) * 2011-04-08 2014-02-05 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Reducing interference caused by an atmospheric duct in a wireless communication system
CN107534876A (en) * 2015-05-29 2018-01-02 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Method and apparatus for the source of the interference that is identified by atmospheric duct propagation
CN108632857A (en) * 2017-03-24 2018-10-09 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 Downlink signal transmission, device, computer readable storage medium and base station

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9402264B2 (en) * 2011-09-30 2016-07-26 Intel Corporation Methods to transport internet traffic over multiple wireless networks simultaneously
CN103517280B (en) * 2013-10-10 2016-05-25 清华大学 Be applicable to disturb in amorphous meshed network the semi-static frequency multiplexing method of inhibition
CN107466054A (en) * 2016-06-06 2017-12-12 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Disturb localization method, device and the base station of cell-of-origin

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103563477A (en) * 2011-04-08 2014-02-05 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Reducing interference caused by an atmospheric duct in a wireless communication system
US20130070816A1 (en) * 2011-09-20 2013-03-21 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Communication device, base station, and base station system
CN102655650A (en) * 2012-01-05 2012-09-05 电信科学技术研究院 Method and equipment for positioning far-end interference base station
CN107534876A (en) * 2015-05-29 2018-01-02 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Method and apparatus for the source of the interference that is identified by atmospheric duct propagation
CN108632857A (en) * 2017-03-24 2018-10-09 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 Downlink signal transmission, device, computer readable storage medium and base station

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN111586723B (en) 2022-04-22
CN111586723A (en) 2020-08-25

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11291064B2 (en) Communication method, network node, and radio access network system
US11729681B2 (en) Link switch in a wireless communication system
US20220201581A1 (en) SCG-Side Service Processing Method and Apparatus in Dual Connectivity Scenario
WO2020135400A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
KR102648835B1 (en) Cell selection and reselection method using multiple PMAX parameters
JP4695656B2 (en) System and method for channel selection management in a wireless communication network
JP7254831B2 (en) Relay resource setting method and device
WO2018010123A1 (en) Communication method, network device, and terminal devices
WO2018126952A1 (en) Communication method, network device, and terminal device
US8971889B2 (en) Method and apparatus for handover by calculating the distance between a mobile user equipment and an intermediate access point in a wireless communication system
TW201822553A (en) Measurement method, terminal equipment and network equipment
JP2014530551A (en) Interference control method and apparatus
WO2018040012A1 (en) Method for ack/nack feedback under unlicensed frequency spectrum, and relevant device
CN113615279B (en) Wireless link management method and related equipment
US10798708B2 (en) Method for data transmission in wireless network, apparatus, and system
JP2015513281A (en) Power adaptation method and apparatus in heterogeneous network
US20230171654A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2017080380A1 (en) Data transmission control method and network device
US20210258862A1 (en) Wireless Local Area Network Configuration Method and Central Access Point
WO2021204022A1 (en) Measurement method and apparatus
WO2020164402A1 (en) Communication method and communication device
JP6967018B2 (en) RAN connection control method and base station
WO2020057497A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
US11973589B2 (en) Mode switching method, data flow splitting method, and apparatus
US20210211224A1 (en) Mode Switching Method, Data Flow Splitting Method, And Apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20756137

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20756137

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1